Orban OPTIMOD-AM 9300 Operating Manual

Operating Manual
OPTIMOD-AM
9300
Digital Audio Processor
Version 1.0 Software
IMPORTANT NOTE: Refer to the unit’s rear panel for your Model Number.
Model Number:
Description:
9300
OPTIMOD 9300, Digital I/O, Five-band monophonic
processing, 85-264 VAC, 50-60 Hz using universal
switching power supply.
MANUAL:
Part Number:
Description:
96126.105.03
9300 Operating Manual
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to
the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage
inside the enclosure  voltage that may be
sufficient to constitute a risk of shock.
This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to important
operating and maintenance instructions in the accompanying literature. Read the manual.
In accordance to the WEEE (waste electrical and electronic equipment) directive of the European Parliament, this product must not be discarded into the
municipal waste stream in any of the Member States. This product may be
sent back to your Orban dealer at end of life where it will be reused or recycled
at no cost to you.
If this product is discarded into an approved municipal WEEE collection site or
turned over to an approved WEEE recycler at end of life, your Orban dealer
must be notified and supplied with model, serial number and the name and
location of site/facility.
Please contact your Orban dealer for further assistance.
www.orban.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated.
Retain Instructions: The safety and operation instructions should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions: All operation and user instructions should be followed.
Water and Moisture:
The appliance should not be used near water (e.g., near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc.).
Ventilation: The appliance should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a
bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings.
Heat:
The appliance should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
Power Sources:
The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on
the appliance.
Grounding or Polarization: Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated.
Power-Cord Protection:
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or
against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
Cleaning: The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Non-Use Periods: The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
Object and Liquid Entry: Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
Damage Requiring Service:
The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: The power supply cord or the plug has
been damaged; or Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or The appliance has been exposed to rain; or The appliance does
not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
Servicing:
The user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be
referred to qualified service personnel.
The Appliance should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
Safety Instructions (European)
Notice For U.K. Customers If Your Unit Is Equipped With A Power Cord.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
The cores in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
GREEN and YELLOW - Earth
BLUE - Neutral
BROWN - Live
As colours of the cores in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug marked with the letter E, or with the earth symbol, or coloured green, or green and yellow.
The core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal marked N or coloured black.
The core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal marked L or coloured red.
The power cord is terminated in a CEE7 / 7 plug (Continental Europe). The green / yellow wire is connected directly to the unit's chassis. If you need to
change the plug and if you are qualified to do so, refer to the table below.
WARNING: If the ground is defeated, certain fault conditions in the unit or in the system to which it is connected can result in full line voltage between
chassis and earth ground. Severe injury or death can then result if the chassis and earth ground are touched simultaneously.
Conductor
L
LIVE
WIRE COLOR
Normal
Alt
BROWN
BLACK
N
NEUTRAL
BLUE
WHITE
E
EARTH GND
GREEN-YELLOW
GREEN
AC Power Cord Color Coding
Safety Instructions (German)
Gerät nur an der am Leistungsschild vermerkten Spannung und Stromart betreiben.
Sicherungen nur durch solche, gleicher Stromstärke und gleichen AbschalAMerhaltens ersetzen. Sicherungen nie überbrücken.
Jedwede Beschädigung des Netzkabels vermeiden. Netzkabel nicht knicken oder quetschen. Beim Abziehen des Netzkabels den
Stecker und nicht das Kabel enfassen. Beschädigte Netzkabel sofort auswechseln.
Gerät und Netzkabel keinen übertriebenen mechanischen Beaspruchungen aussetzen.
Um Berührung gefährlicher elektrischer Spannungen zu vermeiden, darf das Gerät nicht geöffnet werden. Im Fall von Betriebsstörungen darf das Gerät nur Von befugten Servicestellen instandgesetzt werden. Im Gerät befinden sich keine, durch den Benutzer
reparierbare Teile.
Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen und Feuer ist das Gerät vor Nässe zu schützen. Eindringen von Feuchtigkeit und
Flüssigkeiten in das Gerät vermeiden.
Bei Betriebsstörungen bzw. nach Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten oder anderen Gegenständen, das Gerät sofort vom Netz trennen und
eine qualifizierte Servicestelle kontaktieren.
Safety Instructions (French)
On s'assurera toujours que la tension et la nature du courant utilisé correspondent bien à ceux indiqués sur la plaque de l'appareil.
N'utiliser que des fusibles de même intensité et du même principe de mise hors circuit que les fusibles d'origine. Ne jamais
shunter les fusibles.
Eviter tout ce qui risque d'endommager le câble seceur. On ne devra ni le plier, ni l'aplatir. Lorsqu'on débranche l'appareil,
tirer la fiche et non le câble. Si un câble est endommagé, le remplacer immédiatement.
Ne jamais exposer l'appareil ou le câble ä une contrainte mécanique excessive.
Pour éviter tout contact averc une tension électrique dangereuse, on n'oouvrira jamais l'appareil. En cas de dysfonctionnement,
l'appareil ne peut être réparé que dans un atelier autorisé. Aucun élément de cet appareil ne peut être réparé par l'utilisateur.
Pour éviter les risques de décharge électrique et d'incendie, protéger l'appareil de l'humidité. Eviter toute pénétration
d'humidité ou fr liquide dans l'appareil.
En cas de dysfonctionnement ou si un liquide ou tout autre objet a pénétré dans l'appareil couper aussitôt l'appareil
de son alimentation et s'adresser à un point de service aprésvente autorisé.
Safety Instructions (Spanish)
Hacer funcionar el aparato sólo con la tensión y clase de corriente señaladas en la placa indicadora de características.
Reemplazar los fusibles sólo por otros de la misma intensidad de corriente y sistema de desconexión. No poner nunca los fusibles en
puente.
Proteger el cable de alimentación contra toda clase de daños. No doblar o apretar el cable. Al desenchufar, asir el enchufe y no el
cable. Sustituir inmediatamente cables dañados.
No someter el aparato y el cable de alimentación a esfuerzo mecánico excesivo.
Para evitar el contacto con tensiones eléctricas peligrosas, el aparato no debe abrirse. En caso de producirse fallos de funcionamiento,
debe ser reparado sólo por talleres de servicio autorizados. En el aparato no se encuentra ninguna pieza que pudiera ser reparada por
el usuario.
Para evitar descargas eléctricas e incendios, el aparato debe protegerse contra la humedad, impidiendo que penetren ésta o líquidos
en el mismo.
En caso de producirse fallas de funcionamiento como consecuencia de la penetración de líquidos u otros objetos en el aparato,
hay que desconectarlo inmediatamente de la red y ponerse en contacto con un taller de servicio autorizado.
Safety Instructions (Italian)
Far funzionare l'apparecchio solo con la tensione e il tipo di corrente indicati sulla targa riportante i dati sulle prestazioni.
Sostituire i dispositivi di protezione (valvole, fusibili ecc.) solo con dispositivi aventi lo stesso amperaggio e lo stesso comportamento
di interruzione. Non cavallottare mai i dispositivi di protezione.
Evitare qualsiasi danno al cavo di collegamento alla rete. Non piegare o schiacciare il cavo. Per staccare il cavo, tirare la presa e mai
il cavo. Sostituire subito i cavi danneggiati.
Non esporre l'apparecchio e il cavo ad esagerate sollecitazioni meccaniche.
Per evitare il contatto con le tensioni elettriche pericolose, l'apparecchio non deve venir aperto. In caso di anomalie di funzionamento
l'apparecchio deve venir riparato solo da centri di servizio autorizzati. Nell'apparecchio non si trovano parti che possano essere riparate
dall'utente.
Per evitare scosse elettriche o incendi, l'apparecchio va protetto dall'umidità. Evitare che umidità o liquidi entrino nell'apparecchio.
In caso di anomalie di funzionamento rispettivamente dopo la penetrazione di liquidi o oggetti nell'apparecchio, staccare immediatamente
l'apparecchio dalla rete e contattare un centro di servizio qualificato.
PLEASE READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
Manual
The Operating Manual contains instructions to verify the proper operation of this unit and initialization of certain options.
You will find these operations are most conveniently performed on the bench before you install the unit in the rack.
Please review the Manual, especially the installation section, before unpacking the unit.
Trial Period Precautions
If your unit has been provided on a trial basis:
You should observe the following precautions to avoid reconditioning charges in case you later wish to return the unit to
your dealer.
(1) Note the packing technique and save all packing materials. It is not wise to ship in other than the factory carton. (Replacements cost $35.00).
(2) Avoid scratching the paint or plating. Set the unit on soft, clean surfaces.
(3) Do not cut the grounding pin from the line cord.
(4) Use care and proper tools in removing and tightening screws to avoid burring the heads.
(5) Use the nylon-washered rack screws supplied, if possible, to avoid damaging the panel. Support the unit when tightening the screws so that the threads do not scrape the paint inside the slotted holes.
Packing
When you pack the unit for shipping:
(1) Tighten all screws on any barrier strip(s) so the screws do not fall out from vibration.
(2) Wrap the unit in its original plastic bag to avoid abrading the paint.
(3) Seal the inner and outer cartons with tape.
If you are returning the unit permanently (for credit), be sure to enclose:







The Manual(s)
The Registration/Warranty Card
The Line Cord
All Miscellaneous Hardware (including the Rack Screws and Keys)
The Extender Card (if applicable)
The Monitor Rolloff Filter(s) (OPTIMOD-AM only)
The COAX Connecting Cable (OPTIMOD-AM and OPTIMOD-AM only)
Your dealer may charge you for any missing items.
If you are returning a unit for repair, do not enclose any of the above items.
Further advice on proper packing and shipping is included in the Manual (see Table of Contents).
Trouble
If you have problems with installation or operation:
(1) Check everything you have done so far against the instructions in the Manual. The information contained therein is
based on our years of experience with OPTIMOD and broadcast stations.
(2) Check the other sections of the Manual (consult the Table of Contents and Index) to see if there might be some suggestions regarding your problem.
(3) After reading the section on Factory Assistance, you may call Orban Customer Service for advice during normal California business hours. The number is (1) 510 / 351-3500.
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed
and used as directed by this manual, it may cause interference to radio communication. This
equipment complies with the limits for a Class A computing device, as specified by FCC
Rules, Part 15, subject J, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when this type of equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. If it does, the user will be
required to eliminate the interference at the user’s expense.
WARNING
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications. (Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques [de las class A] prescrites dans le
Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du
Canada.)
IMPORTANT
Perform the installation under static control conditions. Simply walking across a rug can generate a static charge of 20,000 volts. This is the spark or shock you may have felt when
touching a doorknob or some other conductive surface. A much smaller static discharge is
likely to destroy one or more of the CMOS semiconductors employed in OPTIMOD-AM. Static
damage will not be covered under warranty.
There are many common sources of static. Most involve some type of friction between two
dissimilar materials. Some examples are combing your hair, sliding across a seat cover or
rolling a cart across the floor. Since the threshold of human perception for a static discharge
is 3000 volts, you will not even notice many damaging discharges.
Basic damage prevention consists of minimizing generation, discharging any accumulated
static charge on your body or workstation, and preventing that discharge from being sent to or
through an electronic component. You should use a static grounding strap (grounded through
a protective resistor) and a static safe workbench with a conductive surface. This will prevent
any buildup of damaging static.
U.S. patents 4,208,548, 4,460,871, 5,737,434, 6,337,999, 6,434,241, 6,618,486, and 6.937,912
protect OPTIMOD 9300. Other patents pending.
Orban and Optimod are registered trademarks.
All trademarks are property of their respective companies.
This manual is part number 96126.105.03
Published April 2009
© Copyright Orban
8350 East Evans Suite C4, Scottsdale, AZ 85260 USA
Phone: (1) (480) 403-8300; Fax: (1) (480) 403-8301; E-Mail: [email protected]; Site: www.orban.com
Operating Manual
OPTIMOD-AM
9300
Digital Audio Processor
Version 1.0 Software
Table of Contents
Index.........................................................................................................................0-8
Section
1
Introduction
.........................................................................................................................................1-1
ABOUT THIS MANUAL.......................................................................................................1-1
THE OPTIMOD-AM 9300 DIGITAL AUDIO PROCESSOR ......................................................1-1
Making the Most of the AM Channel....................................................................1-2
Controllable and Adjustable...................................................................................1-2
Versatile Installation................................................................................................1-3
PRESETS IN OPTIMOD-AM..............................................................................................1-4
Factory Presets .........................................................................................................1-5
User Presets ..............................................................................................................1-5
INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................1-5
Digital AES3 Input/Output ......................................................................................1-5
Analog Input/Outputs .............................................................................................1-6
Remote Control Interface .......................................................................................1-6
Computer Interface .................................................................................................1-7
RS-232 Serial Port ............................................................................................................. 1-7
RJ45 Ethernet Connector ................................................................................................. 1-7
LOCATION OF OPTIMOD-AM ..........................................................................................1-7
Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels .........................................................1-7
Best Location for OPTIMOD-AM ............................................................................1-8
If the transmitter is not accessible:.................................................................................. 1-8
If the transmitter is accessible: ........................................................................................ 1-9
STUDIO-TRANSMITTER LINK ...............................................................................................1-9
Transmission from Studio to Transmitter...............................................................1-9
Digital Links .................................................................................................................... 1-10
Analog Microwave STLs ................................................................................................. 1-11
Analog Landline (PTT/Post Office Line)......................................................................... 1-12
AM Transmitters and Antennas............................................................................1-12
Bypassing the Transmitter's Internal Filters and Clippers...................................1-12
Power Supplies ......................................................................................................1-13
Pre-1965 Transmitters............................................................................................1-14
Asymmetry .............................................................................................................1-15
System Presets and Transmitter Equalization......................................................1-15
Antenna System.....................................................................................................1-17
USING LOSSY DATA REDUCTION IN THE STUDIO..................................................................1-17
ABOUT TRANSMISSION LEVELS AND METERING ..................................................................1-18
Meters ....................................................................................................................1-18
Figure 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading ............................................... 1-19
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom ..................................................................1-19
Transmission Levels................................................................................................1-20
LINE-UP FACILITIES .........................................................................................................1-20
Metering of Levels.................................................................................................1-20
Built-in Calibrated Line-up Tones.................................................................................. 1-20
Built-in Calibrated Bypass Test Mode............................................................................ 1-20
MONITORING.................................................................................................................1-21
Modulation Monitors and Their RF Amplifiers ...................................................1-21
Monitoring on Loudspeakers and Headphones..................................................1-21
Monitor Rolloff Filter ..................................................................................................... 1-21
EAS TEST ......................................................................................................................1-22
PC CONTROL AND SECURITY PASSCODE.............................................................................1-23
WHY THE NORTH AMERICAN NRSC STANDARD?...............................................................1-23
AM Stereo Introduces a Preemphasis Dilemma ............................................................ 1-23
Figure 1-2: NRSC Modified 75 µs Deemphasis ............................................................... 1-24
NRSC Standard Preemphasis and Low-pass Filtering .................................................... 1-24
Figure 1-3: NRSC Lowpass Filter ..................................................................................... 1-25
WARRANTY, USER FEEDBACK...........................................................................................1-26
User Feedback........................................................................................................1-26
LIMITED WARRANTY .............................................................................................1-26
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY ...............................................................................1-26
EXTENDED WARRANTY ........................................................................................1-27
Section
2
Installation
.........................................................................................................................................2-1
INSTALLING THE 9300.......................................................................................................2-1
Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard)......................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector ........................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3: 9300 Serial Port Pin Identification................................................................. 2-4
Figure 2-4: Jumper Positions, Monitor Roll-Off Filter ..................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-5: Frequency Response Curves as Function of ROLLOFF Control, Monitor Rolloff
Filter Strapped for 18 dB/Octave...................................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-6: Monitor Rolloff Filter Schematic Diagram.................................................... 2-6
9300 REAR PANEL ...........................................................................................................2-7
INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................2-8
Cable.........................................................................................................................2-8
Connectors ...............................................................................................................2-8
Analog Audio Input.................................................................................................2-8
Analog Audio Outputs ............................................................................................2-9
AES3 Digital Input and Output.............................................................................2-10
Grounding..............................................................................................................2-10
Power Ground........................................................................................................2-11
Circuit Ground .......................................................................................................2-11
9300 FRONT PANEL .......................................................................................................2-11
QUICK SETUP .................................................................................................................2-13
ANALOG AND DIGITAL I/O SETUP .....................................................................................2-20
Figure 2-7: Effect of Lowpass Filter Shape Control on 5 kHz Lowpass Filter ............... 2-23
Overview of Transmitter Equalization........................................................................... 2-28
Description of the TX EQ Controls ................................................................................. 2-28
Procedure for LF Equalization........................................................................................ 2-28
Figure 2-8: Unequalized RF envelope (showing tilt)..................................................... 2-29
Figure 2-9: RF envelope requiring no tilt equalization................................................. 2-29
Figure 2-10: Unequalized RF envelope (showing ringing) ........................................... 2-31
Figure 2-11: RF envelope showing successful HF equalization..................................... 2-31
AUTOMATION USING THE 9300’S INTERNAL CLOCK ............................................................2-34
SECURITY AND PASSCODE PROGRAMMING .........................................................................2-37
To Create a Passcode: ............................................................................................2-38
To Edit a Passcode:.................................................................................................2-38
To Delete a Passcode: ............................................................................................2-38
To Lock the Front Panel Immediately:..................................................................2-39
To Program local lockout: .....................................................................................2-39
To Unlock the Front Panel: ...................................................................................2-39
Dial-up Networking and the Passcode.................................................................2-40
If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode..................................................................2-40
REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING ..................................................................2-40
NETWORKING AND REMOTE CONTROL ..............................................................................2-42
INSTALLING 9300 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ..........................................................2-44
Installing the Necessary Windows Services..........................................................2-44
Check Hardware Requirements............................................................................2-45
Running the Orban Installer Program .................................................................2-46
Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections ...............................................2-46
Conclusion..............................................................................................................2-47
SYNCHRONIZING OPTIMOD TO A NETWORK TIMESERVER .....................................................2-47
Table 2-1: NIST-referenced timeservers (2006).............................................................. 2-48
APPENDIX: SETTING UP SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS .............................................................2-51
Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable ..............................2-51
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:..............................2-51
Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection ..................................2-56
Preparing for Communication through Modems ...............................................2-61
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection ......................................2-61
Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection ..........................................2-67
UPDATING YOUR 9300’S SOFTWARE.................................................................................2-73
Section
3
Operation
.........................................................................................................................................3-1
9300 FRONT PANEL .........................................................................................................3-1
SOME AUDIO PROCESSING CONCEPTS...................................................................................3-2
Loudness and density ....................................................................................................... 3-3
OPTIMOD-AM PROCESSING............................................................................................3-4
AM Processing: The Art of Compromise ................................................................3-4
Shortwave/HF Processing ................................................................................................. 3-6
Working Together............................................................................................................ 3-6
Fundamental Requirements: High-Quality Source Material and Accurate
Monitoring...............................................................................................................3-6
Monitor Rolloff Filter ....................................................................................................... 3-7
Reference Radios for the Processing ............................................................................... 3-7
Modulation Monitors....................................................................................................... 3-8
More About Audio Processing ...............................................................................3-8
Judging Loudness............................................................................................................. 3-9
Reverberation ................................................................................................................... 3-9
CUSTOMIZING THE 9300’S SOUND .....................................................................................3-9
Basic Control ..........................................................................................................3-10
Full Control ............................................................................................................3-11
Advanced Control..................................................................................................3-11
Gain Reduction Metering .....................................................................................3-12
To Create or Save a User Preset ............................................................................3-12
FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS ...................................................................................3-13
Description of the Factory Presets ................................................................................. 3-14
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets....................................................................... 3-15
EQUALIZER CONTROLS ....................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-2: Equalization Controls ................................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-1: HF Receiver Equalizer Curves ...................................................................... 3-21
AGC CONTROLS ............................................................................................................3-23
Table 3-3: AGC Controls.................................................................................................. 3-24
Advanced AGC Controls........................................................................................3-26
CLIPPER CONTROLS .........................................................................................................3-28
Table 3-4: Clipper Controls ............................................................................................. 3-28
MULTIBAND DYNAMICS PROCESSING ................................................................................3-30
Table 3-5: Multiband Controls ....................................................................................... 3-30
Table 3-6: MB Attack/Release Controls .......................................................................... 3-31
Table 3-7: MB Band Mix Controls................................................................................... 3-33
Advanced Multiband Controls..............................................................................3-34
TEST MODES .................................................................................................................3-37
Table 3-8: Test Modes ..................................................................................................... 3-37
USING THE 9300 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ...........................................................3-37
To set up a new connection: .................................................................................3-38
To initiate communication: ...................................................................................3-39
To modify a control setting:..................................................................................3-39
To recall a preset:...................................................................................................3-40
To save a user preset you have created: ..............................................................3-40
To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto your computer’s
hard drive:..............................................................................................................3-40
To restore archived presets, system files, and automation files:........................3-41
To modify INPUT/OUTPUT and SYSTEM SETUP: ...........................................................3-43
To modify AUTOMATION: .........................................................................................3-43
To group multiple 9300s: ......................................................................................3-43
Navigation Using the Keyboard ...........................................................................3-43
To Quit the Program..............................................................................................3-43
About Aliases created by Optimod 9300 PC Remote Software .........................3-43
Multiple Installations of Optimod 9300 PC Remote ...........................................3-44
To share an archived User Preset between 9300s: ........................................................ 3-45
Section
4
Maintenance
.........................................................................................................................................4-1
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................4-1
SUBASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT .......................................................................4-2
FIELD AUDIT OF PERFORMANCE..........................................................................................4-5
Section
5
Troubleshooting
.........................................................................................................................................5-1
PROBLEMS AND POTENTIAL SOLUTIONS ...............................................................................5-1
RFI, Hum, Clicks, or Buzzes ............................................................................................... 5-1
Poor Peak Modulation Control ........................................................................................ 5-1
Excessively Low Positive Peak Modulation ...................................................................... 5-2
Audible Distortion On-Air ................................................................................................ 5-2
Audible Noise on Air ........................................................................................................ 5-3
Shrill, Harsh Sound............................................................................................................ 5-3
Audible Lowpass Filter Ringing........................................................................................ 5-3
Dull Sound......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Excessive Occupied Bandwidth ........................................................................................ 5-4
System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation ............................................. 5-5
System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) Tones at the
Legally Required Modulation Level ................................................................................. 5-5
System Receiving 9300’s Digital Output Will Not Lock................................................... 5-5
General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound Quality.................................................. 5-5
Security Passcode Lost (When Unit is Locked Out) ......................................................... 5-6
Connection Issues between the 9300 and a PC, Modem, or Network ................5-6
Troubleshooting Connections.................................................................................5-6
You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection to
the 9300: ..................................................................................................................5-7
OS-SPECIFIC TROUBLESHOOTING ADVICE ............................................................................5-8
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect:..................................................5-8
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect:...............................................5-9
Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect: ...................................................5-10
Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect: ................................................5-11
TROUBLESHOOTING IC OPAMPS .......................................................................................5-12
TECHNICAL SUPPORT.......................................................................................................5-13
FACTORY SERVICE...........................................................................................................5-13
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................................5-13
Section
6
Technical
Data
.........................................................................................................................................6-1
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................6-1
Performance.............................................................................................................6-1
Installation ...............................................................................................................6-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................6-4
Overview ..................................................................................................................6-4
Control Circuits ........................................................................................................6-5
User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits ...................................................6-5
Input Circuits............................................................................................................6-7
Output Circuits.........................................................................................................6-8
DSP Circuit..............................................................................................................6-10
Power Supply .........................................................................................................6-10
ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................................................6-11
PARTS LIST ....................................................................................................................6-13
Obtaining Spare Parts ...........................................................................................6-13
Control Board ........................................................................................................6-13
Combined Input/Output and DSP (I/O+DSP) Board ............................................6-15
Display Board (Front) ............................................................................................6-18
Display Board (Back)..............................................................................................6-19
SCHEMATICS AND PARTS LOCATOR DRAWINGS ...................................................................6-19
Function
Chassis
Control board
I/O+DSP Board
Display Board
DSP Block
Diagram
Description
Drawing
Page
Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections
Control microprocessor. Services
front panel, serial port, Ethernet,
and DSP+I/O board.
Contains:
General Purpose bus, address decoder, DSP, and I/O interface
Memory and clock generation
Ethernet
Miscellaneous input/output
Power and Ground
Analog Input/output
AES3 Input/output
DSP Chips; Local regulators.
Contains:
L and R Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Digital Input and Sync Input
Digital Outputs
DSP Extended Serial Audio Interface (ESAI) and Host Interface
DSP Serial Peripheral Interface,
Power, and Ground
General Purpose bus 8-bit I/O
Serial Audio Interface and Clock
Generation
Power Distribution
Front-Panel LCD, LEDs, Buttons,
and Rotary Encoder
Contains:
Front of board
Rear of board
Shows signal processing
Top view
(not to scale)
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-21
6-22
Schematic 1 of 5
6-23
Schematic 2 of 5
Schematic 3 of 5
Schematic 4 of 5
Schematic 5 of 5
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
Schematic 1 of 9
Schematic 2 of 9
Schematic 3 of 9
Schematic 4 of 9
Schematic 5 of 9
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
Schematic 6 of 9
6-34
Schematic 7 of 9
Schematic 8 of 9
6-35
6-36
Schematic 9 of 9
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-37
6-38
Schematic 1 of 2
Schematic 2 of 2
6-39
6-40
6-41
Index
analog input 2- · 8
analog landline 1- · 12
analog output
6
circuit description 6- · 9
6300 2- · 13
9
9300 OPTIMOD-AM 1- · 1
compensating for 600 ohm load 2- · 24
analog output 2- · 9
antenna system 1- · 17
archiving presets 3- · 40
asymmetry
inverting 2- · 32
A
A/D converter
asymmetry 1- · 15, 16
attack 3- · 28
attack time controls 3- · 35
audio
circuit description 5- · 8
connections 2- · 8
specification 6- · 2
input, connecting 2- · 8
Abbreviations 6- · 11
AC Line Cord Standard 2- · 2
Advanced Control 3- · 11
AES/EBU I/O 2- · 10
AGC
output 2- · 10
output, connecting 2- · 9
Audio Precision 4- · 5
auditing performance 4- · 5
automation
bass attack control 3- · 28
add event 2- · 35
bass coupling control 3- · 26
delete event 2- · 37
bass release control 3- · 28
edit event 2- · 36
bass threshold control 3- · 27
control list 3- · 23
automation 2- · 34
automation 3- · 43
defeating 3- · 24
drive control 3- · 24
dual band 3- · 26
B
gate threshold control 3- · 25
idle gain control 3- · 27
master attack control 3- · 28
master release control 3- · 25
meter 2- · 12, 2
ratio control 3- · 27
studio 2- · 13
window release control 3- · 26
window size control 3- · 26
AGC Meter Display control 3- · 26
AM processing
general remarks 3- · 4
AM transmitters 1- · 12
analog I/O 1- · 6
analog input
circuit description 6- · 7
ref level, I/O setup 2- · 20
backing up presets 3- · 40
balanced
inputs 2- · 9
output, simulates transformer 2- · 9
base board
removing 4- · 2
replacing 4- · 4
Basic Control 3- · 10
bass clip threshold 3- · 28
bass punch
and the bass clipper 3- · 28
bass threshold 3- · 27
battery
replacing 6- · 5
bit depth of internal processing 6- · 1
block diagram 6- · 42
bounce 1- · 13
buttons
Windows XP 5- · 10
computer interface
RS-232 2- · 7
escape 2- · 12, 1
serial 2- · 7
modify 2- · 12, 1
next 2- · 12, 1
previous 2- · 12, 1
computer interface 1- · 7
connecting
through Win XP direct serial 2- · 56
RECALL 2- · 12, 1
setup 2- · 12, 1
connection to PC
soft buttons 2- · 12, 1
buzz 5- · 1
bypass
troubleshooting 5- · 6
connectors
audio 2- · 8
input and output 2- · 8
local 1- · 22
PC remote 1- · 23
remote interface 1- · 22
test mode 1- · 20
contrast 2- · 11, 1
control knob 2- · 12, 1
controls
contrast 2- · 11, 1
description 3- · 1
C
corrosion 4- · 1
cable
shielding 2- · 11
D
type recommended for analog I/O 2- · 8
chassis
getting inside 4 · 2
ground 2- · 11
circuit board locator drawing 6- · 21
circuit description
control 6- · 5
LCD display 6- · 5
user control interface 6- · 5
circuit description 6- · 4
cleaning front panel 4- · 1
clipper
bass clip threshold control 3- · 28
control list 3- · 28
final clip drive control 3- · 29
Clipping
Defined 3- · 3
clock
battery 6- · 5
setting 2- · 34
common-mode rejection 2- · 11
components
obtaining 6- · 13
Compression
Defined 3- · 2
compressor gate 3- · 25
computer
connecting to 2- · 5
interface, specifications 6- · 3
troubleshooting connections 5- · 6
Windows 2000 5- · 8
D/A converter
circuit description 6- · 9
specification 6- · 2
delta release control 3- · 36
density 3- · 3
digital I/O 1- · 5
digital input
circuit description 6- · 8
digital links 1- · 10
digital output
circuit description 6- · 9
display assembly
removing 4 · 2
display board
parts list 6- · 18, 19
distortion
excessive 5- · 5
specification 6- · 1
testing 4- · 8
troubleshooting 5- · 2
dither 2- · 25
DJ Bass control 3- · 22
downward expander 3- · 33
DSP
block diagram 6- · 42
circuit description 6- · 10
DSP board
replacing 4- · 4
dual microwave STLs 1- · 11
dull sound
troubleshooting 5- · 4
G
gain reduction
E
meters 2- · 13, 2
EAS
gate
threshold control 3- · 33
modulation low 5- · 5
test tones 1- · 22
easy setup 2- · 13
equalizer
control list 3- · 17
parametric 3- · 17
transmitter 1- · 15
escape button 2- · 12, 1
Ethernet 2- · 42, 46, 39
Ethernet cable
crossover 5- · 7
gate 3- · 25
gate LED 2- · 12, 2
Gateway 2- · 46, 39
gateway address 2- · 42
getting inside the unit 4 · 2
GPI
specifications 6- · 3
GPI interface
testing 4- · 10
grounding
circuit 2- · 11
loss of 4- · 1
F
power 2- · 11
factory presets
grounding 2- · 10
grouping 9300s 3- · 43
selecting 2- · 18
tv 3- · 15
factory presets 1- · 5
factory service 5- · 13
final clip drive 3- · 29
Firewall 2- · 46, 39
Firmware
updating 9300 2- · 73
five-band
attack time controls 3- · 35
band on/off switch 3- · 35
band threshold control 3- · 32
H
HF Clipping 3- · 29
HF Curve
frequency response 2- · 23
HF Curve control 3- · 21
HF Gain control 3- · 20
HF processing 3- · 6
High Frequency Enhancer 3- · 23
high frequency limiter
delta release control 3- · 36
downward expander thresold control 3- · 33
threshold 3- · 34
highpass filter
HF clipper threshold 3- · 34
in user preset 3- · 23
multiband drive control 3- · 30
quick setup 2- · 22
multiband gate threshold control 3- · 33
mutiband release control 3- · 31
output mix controls 3- · 35
five-band 3- · 30
frequency response
specification 6- · 1
setting 1- · 16
highpass filter 1- · 16
hum 5- · 1
I
testing 4- · 8
front panel 3- · 1
front panel description 2- · 11
Full Control 3- · 11
fuse 6- · 10
I/O
AES/EBU 2- · 10
connections 2- · 3
I/O board
replacing 4- · 4
IC opamps
troubleshooting 5- · 12
idle gain 3- · 27
input
analog, connecting 2- · 8
optimum · 8
lock
driven equipment cannot lock to 9300 output
5- · 5
analog, specifications 6- · 2
digital, specifications 6- · 3
meters 2- · 12, 2
input level
line-up 1- · 19
lockout
immediate 2- · 39
programming local 2- · 39
unlocking front panel 2- · 39
maximum 2- · 8
lossy data reduction
input meters 1- · 20
input selector
in studio 1- · 17
I/O setup 2- · 20
input/output board
removing 4- · 3
inspection of package contents 2- · 1
installation procedure 2- · 1
Internet
cannot access 5- · 7
IP address 2- · 42
IP port 2- · 43
NICAM 1- · 10
used in STLs · 10
loudness
insufficient 5- · 5
insufficient due to poor peak control 5- · 1
judging 3- · 9
loudness 3- · 3
loudness/distortion tradeoff 3- · 29
lowpass filter
in user preset 3- · 23
quick setup 2- · 22
setting 1- · 16
lowpass filter 1- · 16
J
J.17
and 9300 digital I/O 1- · 6
and NICAM 1- · 10
deemphasis applied to digital audio input 6·3
defined 1- · 6
preemphasis applied to digital audio output
6- · 3
M
MAC address 5- · 6
main board
reattaching 4 · 4
MB Clip control 3- · 29
measuring performance 4- · 5
meter
circuit description 6- · 6
L
gain reduction 3- · 12
meters
LEDs
AGC 2- · 12, 2
gate 2- · 12, 2
circuit description 6- · 6
Less-More 3- · 24
level
gain reduction 2- · 13, 2
metering 1- · 20
setup 2- · 17
transmission 1- · 20
Limiting
Defined 3- · 3
line voltage 2- · 2
line-up tones
system will not pass at 100% modulation 5- ·
5
line-up tones 1- · 20
location 1- · 7
location of 9300
input 2- · 12, 2
studio 1- · 18
modem
preparing for connection 2- · 61
recommended baud rate 2- · 62
setting up 2- · 43
specification for 2- · 45
Windows 2000 configuration 2- · 61
Windows XP configuration 2- · 67
modify button 2- · 12, 1
modulation control
troubleshooting poor 5- · 1
modulation monitor
accuracy of 3- · 8
modulation monitors 1- · 21
monitor rolloff filter · 7
Monitor Rolloff Filter 1- · 21
monitor rolloff filter 2- · 5
multiband drive 3- · 30
parts list
base board 6- · 13
display board 6- · 18, 19
I/O board 6- · 15
parts list 6- · 13
passcode
and dial-up networking 2- · 40
creating 2- · 38
N
deleting 2- · 38
editing 2- · 38
NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD
4- · 5
network
timeserver 2- · 47
networking 2- · 42
NEXT button 2- · 12, 1
NICAM 1- · 10
noise
troubleshooting 5- · 3
NRSC 3- · 3
NRSC deemphasis 1- · 24
NRSC standard 1- · 23
null modem cable
programming 2- · 37
recovering from lost 2- · 40
PC
Orban installer program 2- · 46
PC board locator diagram 6- · 21
PC control
security 1- · 23
PC hardware requirements 2- · 45
PC Remote
aliases 3- · 43
moving alias folders 3- · 45
multiple coexisting versions 3- · 44
upgrading versions 3- · 44
null modem cable 2- · 45
PC Remote Software 3- · 37
peak control criteria 1- · 7
performance
O
phase-linear
output
port, IP 2- · 43
Ports 2- · 46, 39
positive peak threshold 1- · 16
positive peaks
communicating through 2- · 51
measuring 4- · 5
system group delay spec · 7
analog output level trim adjustment 4- · 7
analog, connecting 2- · 9
analog, specifications 6- · 2
compensating for 600 ohm load 2- · 24
digital, setting dither 2- · 25
digital, setting sync 2- · 25
digital, setting word length · 25
digital, specifications 6- · 3
output level
I/O setup 2- · 24, 26
quick setup 2- · 17
output mix controls 3- · 35
overshoot
in transmitter 1- · 12
overshoot
excessive 5- · 1
cannot achieve desired 5- · 2
positive peaks 1- · 15
power
cord 2- · 2, 7
power supply
circuit description 6- · 10
Orban part # 6- · 10
transmitter 1- · 13
power supply board
reattaching 4 · 4
preemphasis
quick setup 2- · 14
preemphasis 1- · 23
preset
restoring archived 3- · 41
P
presets
parts
obtaining 6- · 13
backup 3- · 40
customizing 3- · 9
factory 1- · 5
factory programming 3- · 13
ringing
saving user 3- · 5, 12
photo showing 2- · 31
sharing between 9300s 3- · 42, 45
reducing audible 3- · 22
user presets 1- · 5
PREVIOUS button 2- · 12, 1
processing
block diagram 6- · 42
Proof of Performance 1- · 3
Proof of Performance 3- · 20, 37
testing for 2- · 27
RJ45 jack 2- · 43
routine maintenance 4- · 1
RS232
testing 4- · 10
RS-232 connector 2- · 7
RS-232 interface
circuit description 6- · 6
Q
quick setup 2- · 13
S
sample rate
R
at digital output 6- · 3
radio
reference for processor adjustment 3- · 7, 20
ratio
AGC 3- · 27
rear panel 2- · 7
RECALL button 2- · 12, 1
receiver
HF rolloff 3- · 3
receiver equalizer 3- · 20
registration card 2- · 1
release
fast 3- · 32
medium-fast 3- · 32
medium-slow 3- · 32
slow 3- · 31
remote
PC Remote software 3- · 37
remote control
bypass 1- · 22
connecting 2- · 3
GPI, specifications 6- · 3
wiring 2- · 3
remote control 2- · 7
remote interface
functions controllable by 2- · 41
GPI 1- · 6
programming GPI 2- · 40
testing 4- · 10
wiring 2- · 3
remote interface connector 2- · 7
resolution
specification 6- · 1
reveberation 3- · 9
RFI 5- · 1
internal, specification 6- · 1
setting output 2- · 17
sample rate converter
testing 4- · 9
saving user presets 3- · 5, 12
screen display 2- · 11, 1
screens
System Setup 2- · 13
Security
lock immediately 2- · 39
security 1- · 23
security 2- · 37
Serial Communications
setting up 2- · 51
serial connection
setting up direct 2- · 44
serial connector 2- · 7
service 5- · 13
setup
I/O 2- · 20
quick 2- · 13
setup button 2- · 12, 1
shipping instructions 5- · 13
shortwave processing 3- · 6
shrill sound
troubleshooting 5- · 3
signal flow diagram 6- · 42
soft buttons 2- · 12, 1
Software
updating 9300 2- · 73
software updates 1- · 3
Sound Technology 4- · 5
spare parts
obtaining 6- · 13
specifications 6- · 1
spectrum analyzer 4- · 5
sports 3- · 32
Stanford Research Systems 4- · 5
station ID
setting 2- · 19
STL
compatibility with 32 kHz sample rate 2- · 10
overshoot in uncomressed digital 2- · 10
systems 1- · 9
studio AGC 2- · 13
studio chassis mode 2- · 16
studio-transmitter link 1- · 9
subassembly removal and replacement 4- ·
2
subnet mask 2- · 42
system setup
installation 5- · 1
tv presets 3- · 15
U
unlock front panel 2- · 39
unpacking 2- · 1
Updating software 2- · 73
user presets
archiving 3- · 13
creating 3- · 5, 10, 12
user presets 1- · 5
V
VPN, setting up 2- · 46, 39
quick setup 2- · 13
System Setup screen 2- · 13
W
T
talk 3- · 32
TCP/IP
warranty 1- · 26
Warranty 1- · 26
warranty 6- · 4
window
setting parameters 2- · 42
technical support 5- · 26, 13
telephone support 5- · 26, 13
test
transmission facility · 27
release control 3- · 26
window size control 3- · 26
Windows
installing services 2- · 44
Windows 2000
test modes 3- · 20, 37
threshold control 3- · 32
tilt
adding direct serial connection 2- · 52, 56,
62, 69
Direct Connect 5- · 8
photo showing 2- · 29
direct serial connection 2- · 51
testing for 2- · 27
modem connect 5- · 9
tilt 1- · 13
time & date 2- · 14
timeserver 2- · 47
Timeservers
Table of 2- · 48
top cover
modem connection 2- · 61
Windows XP
direct connect 5- · 10
modem configuration 2- · 67
modem connect 5- · 11
word length
at output, specification 6- · 3
reattaching 4 · 5
setting output 2- · 25
removing 4 · 2
transmission preset 1- · 15
transmitter
X
pre-1965 1- · 14
transmitter equalization 2- · 28
transmitter equalizer 1- · 15
transmitter overshoot 1- · 12
troubleshooting
XLR connector
wiring standard 2- · 9
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Section 1
Introduction
About this Manual
The Adobe pdf form of this manual contains numerous hyperlinks and bookmarks. A
reference to a numbered step or a page number (except in the Index) is a live hyperlink; click on it to go immediately to that reference.
If the bookmarks are not visible, click the “Bookmarks” tab on the left
side of the Acrobat Reader window.
This manual has a table of contents and index. To search for a specific word or
phrase, you can also use the Adobe Acrobat Reader’s text search function.
The OPTIMOD-AM 9300 Digital Audio Processor
Orban's all-digital 9300 OPTIMOD-AM Audio Processor can help you achieve the
highest possible audio quality in monophonic AM shortwave, medium wave and
long wave broadcasts. OPTIMOD-AM delivers louder, cleaner, brighter, FM-like audio
with an open, fatigue-free quality that attracts listeners and holds them. Because all
processing is performed by high-speed mathematical calculations within Motorola
DSP56367 digital signal processing chips, the processing has cleanliness, quality, and
stability over time and temperature that is unmatched by analog processors.
OPTIMOD-AM 9300 is descended from the industry-standard 9100 and 9200
OPTIMOD-AM audio processors. Thousands of these processors are on the air all
over the world. They have proven that the “OPTIMOD sound” attracts and keeps an
audience even in the most competitive commercial environment.
Because OPTIMOD-AM incorporates several audio processing innovations
exclusive to Orban products, you should not assume that it can be operated
in the same way as less sophisticated processors. If you do, you may get
disappointing results.
Take a little time now to familiarize yourself with OPTIMOD-AM. A small investment
of your time now will yield large dividends in audio quality.
OPTIMOD-AM was designed to deliver a high-quality FM-like sound to the listener's
ear by pre-processing for the limitations of the average car or table radio (while
1-1
1-2
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
avoiding audible side effects and compromises in loudness or coverage). Because
such processing can make audible many defects ordinarily lost in the usual sea of
AM mud, it is very important that the source audio be as clean as possible. Orban's
publication Maintaining Audio Quality in the Broadcast Facility (available in .pdf
form from ftp.orban.com) contains valuable information and specific suggestions for
improving the quality of your audio.
The rest of Section 1 explains how OPTIMOD-AM fits into the AM broadcast facility.
Section 2 explains how to install it and set it up. Section 3 tells how to operate
OPTIMOD-AM. Sections 4 through 6 provide reference information.
For best results, feed OPTIMOD-AM unprocessed audio. No other audio processing is
necessary or desirable.
If you wish to place level protection prior to your studio / transmitter link (STL), use
an Orban studio level control system expressly designed for this purpose. (At the
time of this writing, this is the Orban 6300 Multipurpose Digital audio Processor.)
The 6300 can be set up so that it substitutes for the broadband AGC circuitry in
OPTIMOD-AM, which is then defeated.
Making the Most of the AM Channel

OPTIMOD-AM rides gain over an adjustable range of up to 25dB, compressing
dynamic range and compensating for operator gain-riding errors and for gain inconsistencies in automated systems.

OPTIMOD-AM increases the density and loudness of the program material by multiband limiting and multiband distortion-canceling clipping, improving the consistency of the station's sound and increasing loudness and definition
without producing audible side effects.

OPTIMOD-AM precisely controls peak levels to prevent overmodulation.

OPTIMOD-AM compensates for the high- and low-frequency rolloffs of
typical AM receivers with a fully adjustable program equalizer providing up to
20dB of high-frequency boost (at 5 kHz) without producing the side effects encountered in conventional processors. This equalizer can thus produce extreme
preemphasis that is appropriate for very narrow-band radios. OPTIMOD-AM's
fully parametric low- and mid-frequency equalizers allow you to tailor your air
sound to your precise requirements and desires. OPTIMOD-AM also fully supports
the NRSC standard preemphasis curve.
Controllable and Adjustable

OPTIMOD-AM comes with a wide variety of factory presets to accommodate
almost any user requirement. A single LESS-MORE control easily modifies any factory preset. The user (via FULL CONTROL) can further customize the presets, and
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
these can be stored and recalled on command. Advanced Control (accessible
from the PC Remote application) facilitates detailed sound design using the
same controls that were available to the factory programmers.

An LCD and full-time LED meters make setup, adjustment and programming
of OPTIMOD-AM easy — you can always see the metering while you’re adjusting
the processor. Navigation is by dedicated buttons, soft buttons (whose functions
are context-sensitive), and a large rotary knob. The LEDs show all metering functions of the processing structure (Two-Band or Five-Band) in use.

OPTIMOD-AM contains a versatile real-time clock, which allows automation of
various events (including recalling presets) at pre-programmed times.

A Bypass Test Mode can be invoked locally, by remote control (from either the
9300’s GPI port or the 9300 PC Remote application), or by automation to permit
broadcast system test and alignment or “proof of performance” tests.

OPTIMOD-AM contains a built-in line-up tone generator that offers sine,
square, and triangle waves, facilitating quick and accurate level setting in any
system.

OPTIMOD-AM's software can be upgraded by running Orban-supplied
downloadable upgrade software on a PC. The upgrade can occur remotely
through the 9300’s Ethernet port or serial port (connected to an external modem), or locally (by connecting a Windows® computer to the 9300’s serial port
through a null modem cable).

The 9300 can be remote-controlled by 5-12V pulses applied to eight programmable, optically isolated “general-purpose interface” (GPI) ports.

9300 PC Remote software runs under Windows 2000 and XP. It communicates
with a given 9300 via TCP/IP over modem, direct serial, and Ethernet connections. You can configure PC Remote to switch between many 9300s via a convenient organizer that supports giving any 9300 an alias and grouping multiple
9300s into folders. Clicking a 9300’s icon causes PC Remote to connect to that
9300 through an Ethernet network, or initiates a Windows Dial-Up or Direct Cable Connection if appropriate. The PC Remote software allows the user to access
all 9300 features (including advanced controls not available from the 9300’s
front panel), and allows the user to archive and restore presets, automation lists,
and system setups (containing I/O levels, digital word lengths, GPI functional assignments, etc.).
Versatile Installation

OPTIMOD-AM controls the transmitter bandwidth as necessary to meet
government regulations, regardless of program material or equalization.
OPTIMOD-AM's high-frequency bandwidth can be switched instantly in 500Hz
1-3
1-4
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
increments between 4.5 kHz and 9.5 kHz. The lower cutoff frequencies meet the
output power spectral density requirements of ITU-R 328-5 without further lowpass filtering at the transmitter, while the 9.5 kHz filter meets the requirements
of the NRSC-1 standard (North America). The 5.0 kHz filter makes the analog AM
bandwidth compatible with HD-AM transmission. The lowpass filters have parametric cutoff shapes, allowing you to trade off filter ringing against frequency
response flatness.

OPTIMOD-AM compensates for inaccuracies in the pulse response (tilt,
overshoot, ringing) of transmitters and antenna systems with a powerful
four-parameter transmitter equalizer. A built-in square-wave generator makes
adjustment easy. Four sets of equalizer parameters can be stored and recalled, allowing you to program day and night variations for two transmitters.

Two mono analog outputs and one AES3 output accommodate as many as
three transmitters.

OPTIMOD-AM is usually installed at the transmitter, replacing all processing
normally employed at the transmitter site, including compressor, protection peak
limiters, clippers, and high- and low-pass filters normally included within the
transmitter. It can also be installed at the studio if an uncompressed digital
STL is available.

OPTIMOD-AM comes with a Monitor Rolloff Filter for use in studio monitoring. This filter emulates the frequency response of an average receiver.

The 9300 includes analog and AES3 digital inputs and outputs. Both the digital input and the digital output are equipped with sample-rate converters and
can operate at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz sample rates. The digital
output can be pre-emphasized to the J.17 standard.

The analog inputs are transformerless, balanced 10k instrumentationamplifier circuits, and the analog outputs are transformerless balanced, and
floating (with 50 impedance) to ensure highest transparency and accurate
pulse response.

All input, output, and power connections are rigorously RFI-suppressed to
Orban’s traditional exacting standards, ensuring trouble-free installation.

The 9300 is designed and certified to meet all applicable international
safety and emissions standards.
Presets in OPTIMOD-AM
There are two distinct kinds of presets in OPTIMOD-AM: factory presets and user
presets.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Factory Presets
The Factory Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various program
formats or types. The description indicates the processing structure and the type of
processing. Each Factory Preset on the Preset list is really a library of more than 20
separate presets, selected by navigating to MODIFY PROCESSING > > BASIC CONTROLS >
LESS-MORE and using the LESS-MORE control to adjust OPTIMOD-AM for less or more
processing. The factory presets are listed and described on page 3-13.
Factory Presets are stored in OPTIMOD-AM’s non-volatile memory and cannot be
erased. You can change the settings of a Factory Preset, but you must then store
those settings as a User Preset, which you are free to name as you wish. The Factory
Preset remains unchanged.
User Presets
User Presets permit you to change a Factory Preset to suit your requirements and
then store those changes.
You can store more than 100 User Presets, limited only by available memory in your
9300 (which will vary depending on the version of your 9300’s software). You can
give your preset a name up to 18 characters long.
User Presets cannot be created from scratch. You must always start by recalling a
Factory Preset. Make the changes, and then store your modified preset as a User
Preset. You can also recall a previously created user preset, modify it, and save it
again, either overwriting the old version or saving under a new name. In all cases,
the original Factory Preset remains for you to return to if you wish.
User Presets are stored in non-volatile memory that does not require battery
backup. To Create or Save a User Preset on page 3-12 has more about User Presets.
Input/Output Configuration
OPTIMOD-AM simultaneously accommodates:

A digital AES3 left/right input and an AES3 mono output.

A stereo analog left/right input and two mono outputs.
Digital AES3 Input/Output
The digital input and output conform to the professional AES3 standard. They have
sample rate converters to allow operation at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz sample
frequency.
1-5
1-6
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
The left/right digital input is on one XLR-type female connector on the rear panel;
the mono digital output is on an XLR-type male connector on the rear panel.
You can select whether OPTIMOD-AM uses its digital or analog input either locally
or by remote interface. If OPTIMOD-AM is set to accept a digital input and the feed
fails, you can configure OPTIMOD-AM so that it automatically switches back to the
analog input.
The 9300 can process the signal from the left, right, or sum of the left and right
channels of either the analog or the digital input.
Level control of the AES3 input is accomplished via software control via System
Setup (see step 5 on page 2-22) or via PC Remote.
Both analog and digital outputs are active continuously.
The 9300’s output sample rate can be locked either to the 9300’s internal crystal
clock or to the sample rate present at its AES3 input.
The 9300 can apply J.17 deemphasis to signals applied to its digital input and J.17
preemphasis to the processed signal emitted from its digital output. J.17 is a
6 dB/octave shelving preemphasis/deemphasis standard with break points at 477 Hz
and 4.13 kHz. It is primarily used in older studio/transmitter links that use NICAM
technology. The 9300’s provisions for J.17 make it fully compatible with systems using this standard.
Analog Input/Outputs
The left and right analog inputs are on XLR-type female connectors on the rear
panel. Input impedance is greater than 10k; balanced and floating. Inputs can accommodate up to +27dBu (0dBu = 0.775Vrms). Although the 9300’s processing is
monophonic, we have supplied stereo inputs so that the 9300 can process the L+R, Lonly, or R-only signals without needing an external mixer.
The two mono analog outputs are on XLR-type male connectors on the rear panel.
Output impedance is 50; balanced and floating. The outputs can drive 600 or
higher impedances, balanced or unbalanced. The peak output level is adjustable
from –6 dBu to +20 dBu.
Level control of the analog inputs and outputs is accomplished via software control
through System Setup (see step 4 on page 2-20 and step 10 on page 2-26) or via PC
Remote.
Remote Control Interface
The Remote Control Interface is a set of eight optically isolated GPI inputs on a DB25 connector, which can be activated by 5-12V DC. They can control various functions of the 9300. See page 2-40 for a list of functions and information on programming the remote control interface.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Computer Interface
On the rear panel of the 9300 are an RS-232 serial port and a 100 Mbps Ethernet
port for interfacing to IBM-compatible PCs either locally or through a TCP/IP network. These computer interfaces support remote control and metering, and allow
downloading software upgrades.
Each 9300 package ships with 9300 PC Remote software, an application for any IBMcompatible PC running Microsoft Windows 2000 (Service Pack 3 or higher) or XP.
9300 PC Remote permits you to adjust any 9300 preset by remote control or to do
virtually anything else that you can do from the 9300’s front panel controls. The
program displays all of the 9300’s LCD meters on the computer screen to aid remote
adjustment.
RS-232 Serial Port
9300 PC Remote can communicate at up to 115 kbps via modem or direct connection
between the computer and the 9300 through their RS-232 serial ports.
RJ45 Ethernet Connector
The 9300 can be connected to any Ethernet network that supports the TCP/IP protocol.
See Networking and Remote Control on page 2-42 for more information.
Location of OPTIMOD-AM
Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels
The audio processing circuitry in OPTIMOD-AM produces a waveform that is precisely peak-controlled to prevent overmodulation, and is lowpass filtered to protect
adjacent channels and to conform to government regulations. Severe changes in the
shape of the waveform can be caused by passing it through a circuit with nonconstant group delay and/or non-flat frequency response in the 30-9500Hz range.
Deviation from flatness and phase linearity will cause spurious modulation peaks because the shape of the peak-limited waveform is changed. Such peaks add nothing
to average modulation. Thus, the average modulation must be lowered to accommodate those peaks so that they do not overmodulate. Transformers can cause such
problems.
Landline equalizers, transformers, and low-pass filters in transmitters typically introduce frequency response errors and non-constant group delay. There are three criteria for preservation of peak levels through the audio system:
1) The system group delay must be essentially constant throughout the frequency
range containing significant energy (30-9,500Hz). If low-pass filters are present,
this may require the use of delay equalization. The deviation from linear-phase
must not exceed 1 from 30-9,500Hz.
1-7
1-8
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
2) The low-frequency 3 dB point of the system must be placed at 0.15Hz or lower
(this is not a misprint!). This is necessary to ensure less than 1% overshoot in a
50Hz square wave and essentially constant group delay to 30Hz.
3) Any preemphasis used in the audio transmission system prior to the transmitter
(such as in an STL) must be canceled by a precisely complementary deemphasis:
Every pole and zero in the preemphasis filter must be complemented by a zero
and pole of identical complex frequency in the deemphasis network. An all-pole
deemphasis network (like the classic series resistor feeding a grounded capacitor) is not appropriate.
In this example, the network could be corrected by adding a second resistor between ground and the capacitor, which would introduce a zero.
Low-pass filters (including anti-aliasing filters in digital links), high-pass filters, transformers, distribution amplifiers, and long transmission lines can all cause the above
criteria to be violated, and must be tested and qualified. It is clear that the above
criteria for optimal control of peak modulation levels are met most easily when the
audio processor directly feeds the transmitter. While OPTIMOD-AM’s transmitter
equalizer can mitigate the effects of group delay and frequency response errors in
the signal path, an accurate path will still achieve the best results.
Best Location for OPTIMOD-AM
The best location for OPTIMOD-AM is as close as possible to the transmitter so that
OPTIMOD-AM’s output can be connected to the transmitter through a circuit path
that introduces the least possible change in the shape of OPTIMOD-AM’s carefully
peak-limited waveform. This connection could be short lengths of shielded cable (for
transmitters with analog inputs) or a direct AES3 connection (if the transmitter has a
digital input available). If this is impossible, the next best arrangement is to feed the
9300’s AES3 digital output through an all-digital, uncompressed path to the transmitter's exciter.
If the programming agency’s jurisdiction ends at the link connecting the audio facility to the transmitter, a variety of problems can occur downstream. (The link might
be telephone/post lines, analog microwave radio, or various types of digital paths.)
The link, the transmitter, the transmitter peak limiters, or the transmitter itself can
all introduce artifacts that a studio-located audio processor cannot control.
If the transmitter is not accessible:
All audio processing must be done at the studio and you must tolerate any damage
that occurs later. If an uncompressed AES3 digital link is available to the transmitter,
this is an excellent, accurate means of transmission. However, if the digital link employs lossy compression, it will disturb peak levels by up to 4 dB. Lossy compression is
also inappropriate for another reason: it cannot accommodate pre-emphasized audio (like OPTIMOD-AM‘s output) without introducing serious artifacts.
Unlike FM, where the transmitter usually can be set up to provide preemphasis, AM transmitters are universally “flat.” Therefore, unlike FM,
there is no option when using lossy compression to de-emphasize at the
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
output of OPTIMOD-AM and then to restore the preemphasis at the
transmitter. The best one can do is to use NRSC preemphasis, apply NRSC
deemphasis before the lossy link’s input, and then re-apply NRSC preemphasis at the link’s output.
If only an analog link is available, use a 9300’s audio output and feed the audio directly into the link. If possible, request that any transmitter protection limiters be
adjusted for minimum possible action — OPTIMOD-AM does most of that work.
Transmitter protection limiters should respond only to signals caused by faults or by
spurious peaks introduced by imperfections in the link. To ensure maximum quality,
all equipment in the signal path after the studio should be carefully aligned and
qualified to meet the appropriate standards for bandwidth, distortion, group delay
and gain stability, and such equipment should be re-qualified at reasonable intervals. (See Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels on page 1-7).
If the transmitter is accessible:
You can achieve the most accurate control of modulation peaks by locating
OPTIMOD-AM at the transmitter site or by connecting it to the transmitter through
an uncompressed digital STL.
Because OPTIMOD-AM controls peaks, it is irrelevant whether the audio link feeding
OPTIMOD-AM’s input terminals is phase-linear. However, the link should have low
noise, the flattest possible frequency response from 30-9,500, and low nonlinear distortion.
Studio-Transmitter Link
Transmission from Studio to Transmitter
There are several types of studio-transmitter links (STLs) in common use in broadcast
service: uncompressed digital, digital with lossy compression (like MPEG, Dolby®, or
APT-x®), microwave, analog landline (telephone/post line), and audio subcarrier on a
video microwave STL.
STLs in AM service are used in two fundamentally different ways. They can either:

pass unprocessed audio for application to the 9300’s input, or

pass the 9300’s peak-controlled analog or digital audio outputs for application
to the transmitter.
These applications have different performance requirements. In general, a link that
passes unprocessed audio should have very low noise and low nonlinear distortion,
but its transient response is not important. A link passing processed audio does not
need as low a noise floor as a link passing unprocessed audio. However, its transient
response is critical. At the current state of the art, an uncompressed digital link using
digital inputs and outputs to pass audio in left/right format achieves best results. We
will elaborate below.
1-9
1-10
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Digital Links
Digital links may pass audio as straightforward PCM encoding or they may apply
lossy data reduction processing to the signal to reduce the number of bits per second required for transmission through the digital link. Such processing will almost
invariably distort peak levels; such links must therefore be carefully qualified before
you use them to carry the peak-controlled output of the 9300 to the transmitter. For
any lossy compression system the higher the data rate, the less the peak levels will
be corrupted by added noise, so use the highest data rate practical in your system.
As stated above, links using lossy data reduction cannot pass an OPTIMOD-AM–
processed signal without distorting it. However, it is practical (though not ideal) to
use lossy data reduction to pass unprocessed audio to the 9300’s input. The data rate
should be at least of “contribution quality” — the higher, the better. If any part of
the studio chain is analog, we recommend using at least 20-bit A/D conversion before encoding. Because the 9300 uses multiband limiting, it can dynamically change
the frequency response of the channel. This can violate the psychoacoustic masking
assumptions made in designing the lossy data reduction algorithm. Therefore, you
need to leave “headroom” in the algorithm so that the 9300’s multiband processing
will not unmask quantization noise. This is also true of any lossy data reduction applied in the studio (such as hard disk digital delivery systems).
For MPEG Layer 2 encoding, we recommend 384 kB/second or higher.
Some links may use straightforward PCM (pulse-code modulation) without lossy
data reduction. If you connect to these through an AES3 digital interface, these can
be very transparent if they do not truncate the digital words produced by the devices driving their inputs. Because the 9300’s output is tightly band-limited to 9.5
kHz or lower (depending on the 9300’s lowpass filter setting), any link with 32 kHz
or higher sample frequency can pass either output without additional overshoot.
Currently available sample rate converters use phase-linear filters. These have constant group delay at all frequencies. Sample rate conversion, whether upward or
downward, will not add overshoot to the signal if it does not remove spectral energy from the original signal.
If the link does not have an AES3 input, you must drive its analog input from the
9300’s analog output. This is less desirable because the link’s analog input circuitry
may not meet all requirements for passing processed audio without overshoot.
NICAM is a sort of hybrid between PCM and lossy data reduction systems. It uses a
block-companded floating-point representation of the signal with J.17 preemphasis.
Older technology converters (including some older NICAM encoders) may exhibit
quantization distortion unless they have been correctly dithered. Additionally, they
can exhibit rapid changes in group delay around cutoff because their analog filters
are ordinarily not group-delay equalized. The installing engineer should be aware of
all of these potential problems when designing a transmission system.
Any problems can be minimized by always driving a digital STL with an AES3 digital
output, which will provide the most accurate interface to the STL. The 9300’s digital
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
input and output accommodate sample rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
and 96 kHz.
Analog Microwave STLs
Potential problems include overloads induced by preemphasis and requirements
that the audio applied to the microwave transmitter be processed to prevent overmodulation of the microwave system.
Lack of transparency in the path will cause overshoot. Unless carefully designed,
analog microwave STLs can introduce non-constant group delay in the audio spectrum, distorting peak levels when used to pass processed audio. Nevertheless, in a
system using a microwave STL, the 9300 is sometimes located at the studio and any
overshoots induced by the link are tolerated or removed by the transmitter’s protection limiter (if any).
The 9300 can only be located at the transmitter if the signal-to-noise ratio of the STL
is good enough to pass unprocessed audio. The signal-to-noise ratio of the STL can
be used optimally if an Orban Optimod-PC 1101, Optimod 6300, 8200ST Compressor
/ Limiter / HF Limiter / Clipper or an 4000 Transmission Limiter protects the link from
overload. Of these, the 1101 and 6300 are currently manufactured as of this writing
and are the preferred choices because their AGCs are identical to the AGC in the
8500.
If the 9300 is located at the transmitter and fed unprocessed audio from a microwave STL, it may be useful to use a companding-type noise reduction system (like
dbx Type 2 or Dolby SR) around the link. This will minimize any audible noise
buildup caused by compression within the 9300.
Some microwave links can be modified such that the deviation from linear phase is
less than +10 from 20 Hz to 9.5 kHz and frequency response is less than 3 dB down
at 0.15Hz and less than 0.1 dB down at 20 kHz. This specification results in less than
1% overshoot with processed audio. Many such links have been designed to be easily configured at the factory for composite operation, where an entire FM stereo
baseband is passed. The requirements for maintaining stereo separation in composite operation are similar to the requirements for high waveform fidelity with low
overshoot. Therefore, most links have the potential for excellent waveform fidelity
if they are configured for composite operation.
Nevertheless, in an analog microwave system, the 9300 is usually located at the main
AM transmitter and is driven by the microwave receiver. One of Orban’s studio level
control systems (like our 6300) protects the microwave transmitter at the studio
from overload. This unit also performs the gain riding function ordinarily executed
by the AGC section of the 9300’s processing and it optimizes the signal-to-noise ratio
obtainable from the dual-microwave link.
If the STL microwave uses preemphasis, its input preemphasis filter will probably introduce overshoots that will increase peak modulation without increasing average
modulation. If the studio level control system is capable of producing a preemphasized output, we strongly recommend that the microwave STL’s preemphasis
be defeated and preemphasis performed in the studio level control system. This
1-11
1-12
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
frees the system from potential overshoot. (The Orban 6300 can be configured to
produce a pre-emphasized output.)
Further, it is common for a microwave STL to bounce because of a large infrasonic
peak in its frequency response caused by an under-damped automatic frequency
control (AFC) phase-locked loop. This bounce can increase the STL’s peak carrier deviation by as much as 2dB, reducing average modulation. Many commercial STLs
have this problem.
Analog Landline (PTT/Post Office Line)
Analog landline quality is extremely variable, ranging from excellent to poor.
Whether landlines should be used or not depends upon the quality of the lines locally available and upon the availability of other alternatives. Due to line equalizer
characteristics and phase shifts, even the best landlines tend to veil audio quality
slightly. Moreover, slight frequency response irregularities and non-constant group
delay characteristics will alter the peak-to-average ratio, and will thus reduce the effectiveness of any peak limiting performed prior to their inputs.
AM Transmitters and Antennas
The behavior of an FM station is more or less determined by the behavior of the exciter. Alas, this is not true in AM broadcast! The performance of an AM broadcast
station is highly dependent upon the high-power sections of the transmitter and
upon the behavior of the antenna system.
The extremely high average power and the pre-emphasized high-frequency component of audio processed by OPTIMOD-AM put great demands upon the performance
of the transmitter and antenna system. While improved results can be expected
from most facilities, outstanding results can only be achieved by facilities having
transmitters that can accurately reproduce OPTIMOD-AM's output without changing
the shape of the waveform, and having wide-band, symmetrical antenna arrays.
Any AGCs, compressors, limiters, and clippers that follow OPTIMOD-AM in the circuit
should be bypassed. OPTIMOD-AM provides all of these functions itself.
Bypassing the Transmitter's Internal Filters and Clippers
Some AM transmitters, especially those supplied to stations outside of North or
South America, contain built-in filters and clippers after their audio inputs. The filters may have various purposes: A low-pass filter is often included to ensure that the
transmitter's output spectrum adheres to the occupied bandwidth specifications of
the governing authority. A high-pass filter may be present to protect the transmitter
from damage. Safety clippers are often present to prevent the modulator from being over-driven.
As discussed in earlier sections, accurate reproduction of OPTIMOD-AM's output requires that the deviation from linear phase must be less than 10 degrees, 30-9500Hz.
Frequency response must be less than 3dB down at 0.15Hz, and less than 0.1dB
down at 9.5 kHz.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
The highly processed output of OPTIMOD-AM is carefully band-limited and peakcontrolled. This output will often contain waveforms with flattops like square
waves. If the transmitter has constant group delay above 30Hz, these difficult waveforms will be transmitted intact and peak modulation will be accurately controlled.
However, if low-frequency response is more than 3dB down at 0.15Hz, as would be
true if a high-pass filter is present, the group delay above 30Hz will not be constant.
For example, a typical 50Hz high-pass filter introduces significant non-constant
group delay to 500Hz — ten times the cutoff frequency. This non-constant group delay will tilt the flattops produced by OPTIMOD-AM. The tilt increases the peak level
of the audio waveform, but not the average level. This will force you to decrease
the average modulation to prevent the spurious peaks from overmodulating.
Similarly, a typical EBU 4.5 kHz filter will introduce significant non-constant group
delay down to 1 kHz about one-fourth the cutoff frequency. This will cause overshoot in the highly processed waveforms produced by OPTIMOD-AM. The overshoot
increases the peak level of the audio waveform, but not the average level. This will
force you to decrease average modulation even more.
Alternatively, if you do not decrease the average modulation to accommodate the
spurious peaks introduced by the filters, the transmitter’s safety clipper will clip the
peaks. This will introduce out-of-band energy that will almost certainly violate the
limits on occupied bandwidth specified by the governing authority and will greatly
degrade the spectral control provided by OPTIMOD-AM.
To achieve the full performance capability built into OPTIMOD-AM, any filters in the
transmitter must be bypassed. This is essential! OPTIMOD-AM contains low-pass and
high-pass filters that are fully capable of protecting the transmitter and controlling
occupied bandwidth. Because of their location within OPTIMOD-AM, the internal
filters do not introduce spurious modulation peaks.
Any built-in peak clippers in the transmitter should be defeated. OPTIMOD-AM contains a clipping system that is fully capable of controlling transmitter modulation
without introducing out-of-band energy. If the drive level to the transmitter is even
slightly excessive, the transmitter clipper will be driven hard enough to create excessive spurious spectrum. Defeating any clippers in the transmitter prevents this possibility.
This problem will be even worse if OPTIMOD-AM's transmitter equalizer is in use.
OPTIMOD-AM's output level will frequently exceed 100% modulation because it is
pre-distorted to complement the transmitter's pulse response. The transmitter's
built-in safety clipper will surely clip this pre-distorted waveform.
Power Supplies
An AM transmitter is required to provide 150% of equivalent unmodulated carrier
power when it is modulating 100%. High-voltage power supplies are subject to two
major problems: sag and resonance.
1-13
1-14
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Sag is a result of inadequate steady-state regulation. It causes the conventional carrier shift that is seen on a modulation monitor. Good transmitter engineering practice usually limits this shift to -5% (which corresponds to about 0.5dB — not a highly
significant loudness loss).
A more serious problem is dynamic carrier shift, or bounce. This has been known to
cause up to 3dB loudness loss. Resonances in the power supply's LC filter network
usually cause it. Any LC network has a resonant frequency. In order to achieve reasonable efficiency, the power supply filter network must be underdamped. Therefore, high modulation excites this resonance, which can cause overmodulation on
the low-voltage peaks of the resonance.
Curing bounce is not straightforward because of the requirement that the power
supply filter smooth the DC sufficiently to achieve low hum. One approach that has
been employed is use of a 12-phase power supply. Upon rectification, the ripple
component of the DC is down about -40dB without filtering. A single-capacitor filter
can thus be used, eliminating the filter inductor as a potential source of resonance
with the capacitor.
Other sources of resonance include the modulation reactor and modulation transformer in conventional plate-modulated transmitters. Such transmitters will not
greatly benefit from a 12-phase power supply.
The newer generations of transmitters employ switching modulation techniques to
control bounce far better than do older plate-modulated designs. The latest transmitters using digital modulation techniques have even better performance and most
are essentially transparent.
Pre-1965 Transmitters
Some older transmitters were under-designed by today's standards because modern
audio processing techniques to increase average modulation had not yet been developed and because the designers of those transmitters assumed that average
power demands on the modulator would be relatively small. If you have a transmitter designed before 1965, you should monitor it carefully to make sure that
OPTIMOD-AM processing is not overheating the modulation transformer, the modulation reactor, or the power supply. The high-frequency boost performed by
OPTIMOD-AM can cause unusually high voltages in the final amplifier, which could
cause arcing and/or component breakdown (although the latter is very rare).
There are no simple cures for such problems. Pre-1965 transmitters usually require
substantial modification, including the addition of heavier-duty components and
perhaps a completely new power supply for the modulator alone. Because of dramatic improvements in transmitter design since these transmitters were built, we
recommend that such transmitters be replaced. The latest solid-state transmitters
sound audibly better on-air and their higher efficiency substantially reduces operating power costs.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Asymmetry
While the physics of carrier pinch-off limit any AM modulation system to an absolute
negative modulation limit of 100%, it is possible to modulate positive peaks as high
as desired. In the United States, the FCC permits positive peaks of up to 125% modulation. Many countries have similar restrictions.
However, many transmitters cannot achieve such modulation without substantial
distortion, if they can achieve it at all. The transmitter's power supply can sometimes
be strengthened to correct this. Sometimes, RF drive capability to the final power
amplifier must be increased.
Voice, by its nature, is substantially asymmetrical. Therefore, asymmetrical modulation was popular at one time in an attempt to increase the loudness of voice. Traditionally, this was achieved by preserving the natural asymmetry of the voice signal.
An asymmetry detector reversed the polarity of the signal to maintain greater positive modulation. The peaks were then clipped to a level of -100%, +125%.
OPTIMOD-AM takes a different approach: OPTIMOD-AM's input conditioning filter
contains a time dispersion circuit (phase scrambler) that makes asymmetrical input
material, like voice, substantially symmetrical.
OPTIMOD-AM permits symmetrical or asymmetrical operation of both the safety
clipper and multiband distortion-canceling clipper. Asymmetrical clipping slightly increases loudness and brightness, and can produce dense positive peaks up to 125%.
However, such asymmetrical processing by its very nature produces both odd and
even-order harmonic and IM distortion. While even-order harmonic distortion may
sound pleasingly bright, IM distortion of any order sounds nasty.
There is really nothing lost by not modulating asymmetrically: Listening tests easily
demonstrate that modulating symmetrically, if time dispersion has been applied to
the audio, produces a considerably louder and cleaner sound than does asymmetrical modulation that retains the natural asymmetry of its program material.
Some of the newer transmitters of the pulse-width modulation type have circuitry
for holding the carrier shift constant with modulation. Since artificial asymmetry can
introduce short-term DC components (corresponding to dynamic upward carrier
shift), such carrier shift cancellation circuitry can become confused, resulting in further distortion.
System Presets and Transmitter Equalization
OPTIMOD-AM's transmitter equalizer can cure linear problems caused by the transmitter or antenna system. However, the transmitter equalizer cannot cure nonlinear
problems, particularly those caused by inadequate power supplies, modulation
transformers, or reactors. If any of these components saturate or otherwise fail to
perform under heavy power demands, no amount of small-signal equalization will
solve their problems.
1-15
1-16
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
OPTIMOD-AM was designed with the assumption that one audio processor would
be devoted to no more than two transmitters, usually called main and standby (or
main and alternate). Each transmitter might be required to change power at night
or to drive a different antenna array. Only one transmitter is assumed to be on the
air at a given time.
To drive two transmitters, OPTIMOD-AM provides two mono analog outputs (called
Analog Output 1 and Analog Output 2) and one AES3 digital output, which can alternatively be used to drive the main transmitter if it has a digital input.
OPTIMOD-AM provides four system presets for its transmitter equalizer controls and
certain other controls. Only one preset can be active at a given time; all three outputs receive the same transmitter equalization. This is consistent with the principle
that only one transmitter will be on the air.
Transmitter equalizer controls in a given system preset include:

LF Gain for the LF tilt equalizer [LF GAIN]

LF Breakpoint Frequency for the LF tilt equalizer [LF FREQ]

HF Shelf tuning [HF FREQ]

HF Delay equalization [HF DELAY]
System presets also contain the following controls:

System Lowpass Filter Cutoff Frequency [LOW PASS]

System Lowpass Filter Cutoff Shape [LPF SHAPE]

System Highpass Filter Cutoff Frequency [HIGH PASS]

Positive Peak Threshold (Asymmetry) [POS PEAK]
For convenience and to describe their most common application, the four transmitter equalizer presets are labeled TX1/DAY, TX1/NIGHT, TX2/DAY, and TX2/NIGHT, although they can be applied in a completely general way to the requirements of
your transmission facility.
For example, in countries observing NRSC standards you might want to transmit the
full 9.5 kHz bandwidth during the day, and, in cooperation with other stations on
first-adjacent channels, reduce audio bandwidth to 5 kHz at night. This will eliminate any skywave-induced monkey-chatter interference between first-adjacent
channels. Alternatively, your nighttime directional antenna array might have poor
VSWR performance at high modulating frequencies, so you might find that your
transmitter works better and produces less distortion if you limit the audio bandwidth to those frequencies where the antenna is well behaved. Further, if you operate a talk format during certain parts of the day, you will probably find that you can
operate the processing for a louder on-air sound if you restrict the transmitted
bandwidth below the maximum permitted by government regulation. (Bear in mind
that most AM radios have an audio bandwidth of 2.5 to 3 kHz and changing trans-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
mission bandwidth from 5 kHz to 9.5 kHz will produce virtually no audible difference on these radios.)
Antenna System
AM antenna systems, whether directional or non-directional, frequently exhibit inadequate bandwidth or asymmetrical impedance. Often, a system will exhibit both
problems simultaneously.
An antenna with inadequate bandwidth couples RF energy into space with progressively less efficiency at higher sideband frequencies (corresponding to higher modulation frequencies). It reflects these higher-frequency sideband components back
into the transmitter or dissipates them in the tuning networks. This not only causes
dull sound on the air (and defeats OPTIMOD-AM's principal advantage: its ability to
create a highly pre-emphasized signal without undesirable side effects), but it also
wastes energy, can cause distortion, and can shorten the life of transmitter components.
Asymmetrical impedance is the common point impedance's not being symmetrical
on either side of the carrier frequency when plotted on a Smith Chart. This problem
can cause transmitter misbehavior and sideband asymmetry, resulting in on-air distortion in receivers with envelope detectors.
Both of these limitations can cause severe problems in AM stereo and even worse
ones in HD-AM installations.
Neither problem is easily solved. Unless the radio station engineer is a knowledgeable antenna specialist, a reputable outside antenna consultant should be employed
to design correction networks for the system.
Note that many antenna systems are perfectly adequate, particularly for ordinary
mono analog transmission. However, if the transmitter sounds significantly brighter
and/or cleaner into a dummy load than it does into your antenna, the antenna system should be evaluated and corrected if necessary.
As noted above, if your circumstances or budget precludes correcting your antenna's
bandwidth and/or symmetry, you will often get lower on-air distortion if you set
OPTIMOD-AM's low-pass filter to a lower frequency than the maximum permitted
by the government. Because OPTIMOD-AM's output bandwidth is easily adjustable
in real time, it is very easy to experiment to see which bandwidth gives the best audio quality on an average AM radio, given the quality of your transmitter and antenna.
Using Lossy Data Reduction in the Studio
Many stations are now using lossy data reduction algorithms like MPEG-1 Layer 2 to
increase the storage time of digital playback media. In addition, source material has
often been passed through a lossy data reduction algorithm, whether from satellite
1-17
1-18
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
or over landlines. Sometimes, several encode/decode cycles will be cascaded before
the material is finally presented to OPTIMOD-AM’s input.
All such algorithms operate by increasing the quantization noise in discrete frequency bands. If not psychoacoustically masked by the program material, this noise
may be perceived as distortion, “gurgling,” or other interference. Psychoacoustic
calculations are used to ensure that the added noise is masked by the desired program material and not heard. Cascading several stages of such processing can raise
the added quantization noise above the threshold of masking into audibility. In addition, at least one other mechanism can cause the noise to become audible at the
radio. OPTIMOD-AM’s multiband limiter performs an “automatic equalization”
function that can radically change the frequency balance of the program. This can
cause noise that would otherwise have been masked to become unmasked because
the psychoacoustic masking conditions under which the masking thresholds were
originally computed have changed.
Accordingly, if you use lossy data reduction in the studio, you should use the highest
data rate possible. This maximizes the headroom between the added noise and the
threshold where it will be heard. In addition, you should minimize the number of
encode and decode cycles because each cycle moves the added noise closer to the
threshold where the added noise is heard.
About Transmission Levels and Metering
Meters
Studio engineers and transmission engineers consider audio levels and their measurements differently, so they typically use different methods of metering to monitor
these levels. The VU meter is an average-responding meter (measuring the approximate RMS level) with a 300ms rise time and decay time; the VU indication usually
under-indicates the true peak level by 8 to 14dB. The Peak Program Meter (PPM) indicates a level between RMS and the actual peak. The PPM has an attack time of
10ms, slow enough to cause the meter to ignore narrow peaks and under-indicate
the true peak level by 5 dB or more. The absolute peak-sensing meter or LED indicator shows the true peak level. It has an instantaneous attack time, and a release
time slow enough to allow the engineer to read the peak level easily. Figure 1-1
shows the relative difference between the absolute peak level, and the indications
of a VU meter and a PPM for a few seconds of music program.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
ABSOLUTE PEAK
PPM
VU
Figure 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom
The studio engineer is primarily concerned with calibrating the equipment to provide the required input level for proper operation of each device, and so that all devices operate with the same input and output levels. This facilitates patching devices
in and out without recalibration.
For line-up, the studio engineer uses a calibration tone at a studio standard level,
commonly called line-up level, reference level, or operating level. Metering at the
studio is by a VU meter or PPM (Peak Program Meter). As discussed above, the VU or
PPM indication under-indicates the true peak level. Most modern studio audio devices have a clipping level of no less than +21dBu, and often +24dBu or more. So the
studio standardizes on a maximum program indication on the meter that is lower
than the clipping level, so peaks that the meter does not indicate will not be
clipped. Line-up level is usually at this same maximum meter indication. In facilities
that use VU meters, this level is usually at 0VU, which corresponds to the studio
standard level, typically +4 or +8dBu.
For facilities using +4dBu standard level, instantaneous peaks can reach +18dBu or
higher (particularly if the operator overdrives the console or desk). Older facilities
with +8dBu standard level and equipment that clips at +18 or +21dBu will experience noticeable clipping on some program material.
In facilities that use the BBC-standard PPM, maximum program level is usually PPM4
for music, PPM6 for speech. Line-up level is usually PPM4, which corresponds to
+4dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +17dBu or more on voice.
In facilities that use PPMs that indicate level directly in dBu, maximum program and
line-up level is often +6dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +11dBu or more.
1-19
1-20
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Transmission Levels
The transmission engineer is primarily concerned with the peak level of a program
to prevent overloading or overmodulation of the transmission system. This peak
overload level is defined differently, system to system.
In FM modulation, it is the maximum-permitted RF carrier frequency deviation. In
AM modulation, it is negative carrier pinch-off. In analog telephone/post/PTT transmission, it is the level above which serious crosstalk into other channels occurs, or
the level at which the amplifiers in the channel overload. In digital, it is the largest
possible digital word.
For metering, the transmission engineer uses an oscilloscope, absolute peak-sensing
meter, calibrated peak-sensing LED indicator, or a modulation meter. A modulation
meter usually has two components — a semi-peak reading meter (like a PPM), and a
peak-indicating light, which is calibrated to turn on whenever the instantaneous
peak modulation exceeds the overmodulation threshold.
Line-Up Facilities
Metering of Levels
The meters on the 9300 show left/right input levels and both positive and negative
output modulation.
Input metering is stereo because the 9300 will most often be fed by a stereo source even though the 9300 processing is mono.
Left and right input level is shown on a VU-type scale, while the metering indicates
absolute instantaneous peak (much faster than a standard PPM or VU meter). The
input meter is scaled so that 0 dB corresponds to the absolute maximum peak level
that the 9300 can accept. If you are using the AES3 digital input, the maximum digital word at the input corresponds to the 0 dB point on the 9300’s input meter.
Built-in Calibrated Line-up Tones
To facilitate matching the output level of the 9300 to the transmission system that it
is driving, the 9300 contains an adjustable test tone oscillator that produces sine
waves at 9300’s (analog or digital) left and right outputs. The frequency and modulation level of the line-up tones can be adjusted from the front panel (as described
in Test Modes on page 3-37).
You can adjust the frequency and modulation level of the built-in line-up tone. You
can use the front panel, the PC Control software, or the opto-isolated remote control interface ports to activate the Test Tone.
Built-in Calibrated Bypass Test Mode
A BYPASS Test Mode is available to pass line-up tones generated earlier in the system. This mode applies a DC servo, a highpass filter, a 15 kHz lowpass filter, a safety
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
clipper, and transmitter equalization. The negative safety clipper threshold is set to
105% modulation. The positive threshold is determined by the active transmission
preset (see System Presets and Transmitter Equalization on page1-15), as are the settings of the highpass filter and transmitter equalizer.
Monitoring
Modulation Monitors and Their RF Amplifiers
Many AM modulation monitors (particularly older ones) indicate dynamic modulation inaccurately even though they may accurately measure sine-wave modulation.
This occurs producing overshoot and ringing. An incorrectly designed modulation
monitor may indicate that modulation is as much as 3dB higher than it actually is.
When modulation monitors are used at locations distant from the transmitter, they
are driven from highly selective RF amplifiers. These sometimes suffer from similar
problems. They can overshoot and ring if the passband filters are too sharp, causing
the monitor to falsely indicate high modulation.
If your modulation monitor does not agree with an oscilloscope monitoring the RF
envelope at the common point, do not assume that the monitor is indicating fast
peaks that your eye cannot see. A probable cause of the disparity is overshoot in the
modulation monitor or its RF amplifier. If you observe this problem, we recommend
that you assume that what you see on the oscilloscope is correct; oscilloscopes are
designed to display pulse waveforms accurately. (Make sure the oscilloscope’s input
is set for DC coupling.)
Note also that modulation percentages will vary depending on where in the transmission system the RF sample is taken. Depending on the location observed, actual
modulation can be either lower or higher than modulation observed at the common
point. What is crucial is whether the carrier is actually pinched off at the final amplifier because this carrier pinch-off is what causes splatter. On the other hand, if the
carrier appears is suppressed because of a particular choice of monitoring point
within the system, negative peaks will fold around zero instead of cutting off. This
causes no problem with out-of-band radiation, and far-field radiation is likely to
show normal AM modulation envelopes. We therefore recommend that you use an
RF sample from the final amplifier.
Monitoring on Loudspeakers and Headphones
Monitor Rolloff Filter
The output of a loudspeaker fed from the modulation monitor typically sounds shrill
and strident because, unlike virtually all real AM radios, the modulation monitor
and loudspeaker have a flat response. Rolloff filtering can be used to supply monitors with audio that more closely resembles that heard over a typical receiver.
1-21
1-22
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Orban offers the optional model MRF-023 Monitor Rolloff Filter for this purpose.
This filter is a small passive unit designed to be installed between the modulation
monitor and the monitor amplifier. (See step 8 on page 2-5 for installation instructions). It provides complementary deemphasis and a 10 kHz notch for off-air monitoring of NRSC standard audio. The output of the rolloff filter accurately simulates
the sound of a standard NRSC receiver. Alternately, for use in non-NRSC countries,
an adjustable 18dB/octave rolloff that complements the 9300's HF GAIN control can
be selected with jumpers (see Figure 2-4 on page 2-4). Figure 2-5 on page 2-5 shows
the frequency response of the Monitor Rolloff Filter for various settings of its
ROLLOFF control.
If a different tonal balance is desired for off-the-air monitoring, install a simple program equalizer after the Monitor Rolloff Filter and adjust the 5 kHz region to taste.
EAS Test
For stations participating in the Emergency Alert System (EAS) in the United States,
broadcast of EAS tones and data can be accomplished in three different ways:
1. Run EAS tones and data through the 9300.
Note that 9300 processing may not allow the full modulation level as required by
EAS standards. It may therefore be necessary to temporarily defeat the 9300’s
processing during the broadcast of EAS tones and data. Placing the 9300 in its
BYPASS Test Mode can defeat the processing. The BYPASS GAIN control allows
a fixed gain trim through the 9300. See “Test Modes,” on page 3-37 for more information.
2. Place the 9300 in Bypass mode locally.
A) Navigate to SETUP > TEST > MODE and set MODE to BYPASS.
You can set the bypass gain with the BYPASS GAIN control located to the
right of the MODE control.
B) Begin EAS broadcast.
After the EAS broadcast, resume normal processing:
C) Set the MODE to OPERATE.
This will restore the processing preset in use prior to the Test Mode.
3. Place the 9300 in Bypass mode by remote control. Then program any
two Remote Interface inputs for “Bypass” and “Exit Test,” respectively.
A) Connect two outputs from your station remote control system to the
REMOTE INTERFACE connector on the rear panel of the 9300, according to
the wiring diagram in Figure 2-2 on page 2-3.
B) Program two GPI ports for BYPASS and EXIT TEST according to the instructions
in Remote Control Interface Programming starting on page 2-40.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
C) Place the 9300 in bypass mode by remote control.
a) Switch the 9300 into BYPASS mode by a momentary command from your
station’s remote control to the GPI port programmed as BYPASS.
b) Begin EAS broadcast.
c) When the EAS broadcast is finished, switch the 9300 from BYPASS mode by
a momentary command from your station’s remote control to the GPI port
programmed as EXIT TEST.
You may also choose to insert EAS broadcast tones and data directly into the
transmitter, thus bypassing the 9300 for the duration of the EAS tones and data
broadcast.
PC Control and Security Passcode
PC software control provides access to OPTIMOD-AM via network, modem or direct
(null modem cable) connection, with IBM PC-compatible computers running Windows. PC access is permitted only with a valid user-defined passcode.
PC remote control can be ended from the front panel; this feature effectively prevents simultaneous remote and local control.
See Security and Passcode Programming (starting on page 2-38) for more detail.
Why the North American NRSC Standard?
Over the years, as the North American air waves have become more crowded, interference from first and second adjacent stations has become more and more of a
problem. Receiver manufacturers responded by producing receivers with decreased
audio bandwidth so that an adjacent station's modulation extremes would not be
audible as interference. This cutting of the bandwidth had the effect of reducing
the receiver's high-frequency response, but it was felt that lower fidelity would be
less obnoxious than interference. As long ago as 1978, Orban proposed and implemented preemphasis and low-pass filtering for AM broadcast to provide brighter
sound at the receiver while minimizing interference. This approach has become
widely accepted. The NRSC-formalized standard is acceptable to all industry segments, and when implemented, can result in a vast improvement in AM radio.
AM Stereo Introduces a Preemphasis Dilemma
Certain AM receivers manufactured since 1984 for sale in North America, particularly
those designed for domestic AM stereo reception, have a frequency response that is
substantially wider than that of the typical mono AM receiver. The frequency response was widened largely to enhance the sales potential of AM stereo by presenting a dramatic, audible improvement in fidelity in the showroom. As these new receivers became more prevalent, broadcasters had to choose whether the station's
preemphasis would be optimized for the new AM stereo receivers or for the existing
conventional receivers that form the vast majority of the market. If the choice was
1-23
1-24
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
for conventional receivers (which implies a relatively extreme preemphasis), the
newer receivers might sound strident or exceptionally bright. If the choice favored
the newer receivers (less preemphasis and probably less processing), the majority of
receivers would be deprived of much high-end energy and would sound both quieter and duller.
NRSC Standard Preemphasis and Low-pass Filtering
In response to this dilemma, the National Radio Systems Committee (NRSC) undertook the difficult task of defining a voluntary recommended preemphasis curve for
AM radio that would be acceptable to broadcasters (who want the highest quality
sound on the majority of their listeners' radios) and to receiver manufacturers (who
are primarily concerned with interference from first- and second-adjacent stations).
After a year of deliberation, a modified 75-microsecond preemphasis/deemphasis
standard was approved (See Figure 1-2). This provides a moderate amount of improvement for existing narrowband radios while optimizing the sound of wideband
radios. Most importantly, it generates substantially less first-adjacent interference
than do steeper preemphasis curves. The second part of the NRSC standard calls for
a sharp upper limit of 10 kHz (at –15dB) for the audio presented to the transmitter.
(See Figure 1-3.)
OPTIMOD-AM's NRSC low-pass setting is essentially flat to 9.5 kHz and substantially
exceeds the NRSC standards above that frequency. This essentially eliminates interference to second and higher adjacencies. While some have protested that this is inadequate and that 15 kHz audio should be permitted, the unfortunate fact is that
interference-free 15 kHz audio could only be achieved by a complete re-allocation
of the AM band.
On April 27, 1989, The FCC (U.S.A.) released a Report and Order that amended section 73.44 of the FCC Rules by requiring all U.S. AM stations to comply with the oc-
Figure 1-2: NRSC Modified 75 µs Deemphasis
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
cupied bandwidth specifications of the NRSC-2 standard by June 30, 1990. The NRSC2 standard is an RF mask that was derived from the NRSC-1 audio standard. The
purpose of the NRSC-2 RF mask is to provide a transmitted RF occupied bandwidth
standard that any station with a properly operating transmitter will meet if NRSC-1
audio processing is used prior to the transmitter and if the station is not overmodulating.
100%
-10
31.6%
-20
10%
Stopband Area
-30
3.2%
-40
1%
-50
Modulation
Relative Amplitude (dB)
0
0.32%
10
10.5
11
12
13
14
15
Audio Frequency (kHz)
Figure 1-3: NRSC Lowpass Filter
OPTIMOD-AM complies fully with the NRSC-1 standard when the 9.5 kHz NRSC lowpass filter is in use and the HF CURVE control is set to NRSC.
Unfortunately, at this writing, the trend towards wider band receivers has reversed
and most receivers are no wider than they were in the 1970s. For this reason, many
engineers feel that using a third-order equalizer with 10 dB of ultimate boost provides a more intelligible sound on the average radio than does the NRSC curve. The
9300’s HF shelving equalizer can provide such a boost.
When a station is transmitting with 5 kHz audio bandwidth, the 9300’s 5 kHz lowpass filter can produce audible ringing that some find objectionable. Using the
9300’s bell-shaped HF parametric EQ tuned to 3 kHz can reduce the effects of this
ringing by reducing the boost at 5 kHz by comparison to the 9300’s HF shelving EQ,
which maintains full boost all the way to 5 kHz. Additionally, you can use the LPF
SHAPE control to trade off brightness against ringing.
1-25
1-26
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Warranty, User Feedback
User Feedback
We are very interested in your comments about this product. We will carefully review your suggestions for improvements to either the product or the manual. Please
email us at [email protected].
LIMITED WARRANTY
[Valid only for products purchased and used in the United States]
Orban warrants Orban products against defects in material or workmanship for a
period of two years from the date of original purchase for use, and agrees to repair
or, at our option, replace any defective item without charge for either parts or labor.
IMPORTANT: This warranty does not cover damage resulting from accident, misuse
or abuse, lack of reasonable care, the affixing of any attachment not provided with
the product, loss of parts, or connecting the product to any but the specified receptacles. This warranty is void unless service or repairs are performed by an authorized
service center. No responsibility is assumed for any special, incidental, or consequential damages. However, the limitation of any right or remedy shall not be effective
where such is prohibited or restricted by law.
Simply take or ship your Orban products prepaid to our service department. Be sure
to include a copy of your sales slip as proof of purchase date. We will not repair
transit damage under the no-charge terms of this warranty. Orban will pay return
shipping. (See Technical Support on page 5-13.)
No other warranty, written or oral, is authorized for Orban Products.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights that vary
from state to state. Some states do not allow the exclusion of limitations of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the above exclusions and limitations may not apply to you.
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY
Orban warrants Orban products against evident defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of original purchase for use. This warranty does not cover damage resulting from misuse or abuse, or lack of reasonable
care, or inadequate repairs performed by unauthorized service centers. Performance
of repairs or replacements under this warranty is subject to submission of this Warranty/Registration Card, completed and signed by the dealer on the day of purchase,
and the sales slip. Shipment of the defective item is for repair under this warranty
will be at the customer’s own risk and expense. This warranty is valid for the original
purchaser only.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
EXTENDED WARRANTY
Any time during the initial two-year Warranty period (but not thereafter), you may
purchase a three-year extension to the Warranty (yielding a total Warranty period
of five years) by remitting to Orban ten percent of the gross purchase price of your
Orban product. This offer applies only to new Orban products purchased from an
authorized Orban Dealer. To accept the extended five-year warranty, please sign and
date below and fax this copy along with a copy of your original invoice (showing
date of purchase) to Gareth Paredes at the fax number shown under his name at
http://www.orban.com/contact/.
I ACCEPT THE EXTENDED FIVE-YEAR WARRANTY
__________________________________________________________________________
DATE______________________________________________________________________
MODEL NUMBER: 9300
SERIAL NUMBER____________________________________________________________
1-27
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
Section 2
Installation
Installing the 9300
Allow about 2 hours for installation.
Installation consists of: (1) unpacking and inspecting the 9300, (2) mounting the
9300 in a rack, (3) connecting inputs, outputs and power, (4) optional connecting of
remote control leads and (5) optional connecting of computer interface control
leads.
When you have finished installing the 9300, proceed to “Quick Setup,” on page 213.
1. Unpack and inspect.
If you note obvious physical damage, contact the carrier immediately to make a
damage claim. Packed with the 9300 are:
2ea.
4ea.
1ea.
Line Cords (domestic, European)
Rack-mounting screws, 10-32 x ½ — with washers, #10
PC Remote Software and Operating Manual CD
Save all packing materials! If you should ever have to ship the 9300 (e.g., for servicing), it is best to ship it in the original carton with its packing materials because both the carton and packing material have been carefully designed to protect the unit.
Complete the Registration Card and return it to Orban. (please)
The Registration Card enables us to inform you of new applications, performance improvements, software updates, and service aids that may be
developed, and it helps us respond promptly to claims under warranty
without our having to request a copy of your bill of sale or other proof
of purchase. Please fill in the Registration Card and send it to us today.
Customer names and information are confidential and are not sold to
anyone.
2-1
2-2
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
2. Install the appropriate power cord.
TYPE 18/3 SVT COR, TYP
(3 x .82 mm 2 )
WIRE COLOR
CONDUCTOR
NORMAL
ALT
BLACK
L
LINE
BROWN
N
NEUTRAL
BLUE
WHITE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW
GREEN
PLUG FOR
115 VAC
(USA)
TYPE H05VV - F - 0.75
CONDUCTOR
WIRE COLOR
L
LINE
BROWN
N
NEUTRAL
BLUE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW
PLUG FOR
230 VAC
(EUROPEAN)
Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard)
A) Check the power cord.
AC power passes through an IEC-standard mains connector and an RF filter designed to meet the standards of all international safety authorities.
The power cord is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA standard), or
CEE7/7 plug (Continental Europe), as appropriate to your 9300’s Model
Number. The green/yellow wire is connected directly to the 9300 chassis.
If you need to change the plug to meet your country’s standard and you
are qualified to do so, see Figure 2-1. Otherwise, purchase a new mains
cord with the correct line plug attached.
The 9300 uses a universal switching power supply that will operate without readjustment from 95 to 264 volts AC, 50 or 60 Hz.
3. Mount the 9300 in a rack.
The 9300 requires one standard rack unit (1¾ inches / 4.45 cm).
There should be a good ground connection between the rack and the 9300 chassis — check this with an ohmmeter to verify that the resistance is less than 0.5.
Mounting the unit over large heat-producing devices (such as a vacuum-tube
power amplifier) may shorten component life and is not recommended. Ambient
temperature should not exceed 45C (113F) when equipment is powered.
Equipment life will be extended if the unit is mounted away from sources of vibration, such as large blowers and is operated as cool as possible.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
PIN ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22-24.
25.
DIGITAL GOUND
REMOTE
1+
REMOTE
2+
REMOTE
3+
REMOTE
4+
REMOTE
5+
REMOTE
6+
REMOTE
7+
REMOTE
8+
TALLY
1
TALLY
2
N/C
ANALOG GROUND
REMOTE
1REMOTE
2REMOTE
3REMOTE
4REMOTE
5REMOTE
6REMOTE
7REMOTE
8N/C
+12 VOLTS DC
REMOTE INTERFACE
Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector
4. Connect inputs and outputs.
See the hookup and grounding information on the following pages.
TOPIC
PAGE
Audio Input and Audio Output Connections.............................................2-8
AES3 Digital Input and Output .................................................................2-10
Grounding ..................................................................................................2-10
5. Connect remote control interface. (optional)
For a full listing of 9300’s extensive remote control provisions, refer to Remote
Control Interface Programming on page 2-40.
Optically isolated remote control connections are terminated in a type DB-25
male connector located on the rear panel. It is wired according to Figure 2-2 on
page 2-3. To select the desired function, apply a 5-12V AC or DC pulse between
the appropriate REMOTE INTERFACE terminals. The () terminals can be connected together and then connected to ground at pin 1 to create a Remote
Common. A current-limited +12VDC source is available on pin 25. If you use 48V,
connect a 2k 10%, 2-watt carbon composition resistor in series with the Remote Common or the (+) terminal to provide current limiting.
2-3
2-4
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Figure 2-3: 9300 Serial Port Pin Identification
In a high-RF environment, these wires should be short and should be run
through foil-shielded cable, with the shield connected to CHASSIS GROUND at
both ends.
6. Connect tally outputs (optional)
See the schematic on page 6-26.
The 9300 supports two hardware tally outputs, which are NPN open-collector
and operate with respect to pin 1 (common). Therefore, the voltage applied to
the load (such as a relay or opto-isolator) must be positive. You can use the 12
VDC source on pin 25 to drive the high side of the load, taking into account the
fact that the voltage on pin 25 is current limited by a 310  resistor.
The tally outputs are protected against reverse polarity.
To avoid damaging the 6300, limit the current into a tally output to 30 mA. DO
NOT connect a tally output directly to a low-impedance voltage source! The tally
outputs are not protected against this abuse and the output transistors are likely
to burn out. When driving a relay or other inductive load, connect a diode in re-
Figure 2-4: Jumper Positions, Monitor Roll-Off Filter
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
verse polarity across the relay coil to protect the driver transistors from reverse
voltage caused by inductive kickback.
Note that the tally outputs have no special RFI protection. Therefore, it is wise to
use shielded cable to make connections to them.
See step 9 on page 2-25 for instructions on programming the tally outputs.
7. Connect to a computer
You can connect to a computer via the 9300’s serial connector or via an Ethernet
network.
You must have the 9300 PC Remote application installed on your computer before you upgrade your 9300’s firmware because 9300 PC Remote
manages the upgrade.
See Networking and Remote Control on page 2-42, Appendix: Setting Up Serial
Communications on page 2-51, Installing 9300 PC Remote Control Software on
page 2-44, and Using the 9300 PC Remote Control Software on page 3-37 for
more detail.
8. Install Monitor Rolloff Filter. (optional)
Orban Monitor Rolloff Filters are accessories that can be ordered from your authorized Orban Broadcast Dealer. The Orban model number is MRF-023.
The Orban Monitor Rolloff Filter alters the flat response typical of a modulation
monitor's audio output to one that more closely resembles that of an actual AM
Figure 2-5: Frequency Response Curves as Function of ROLLOFF Control,
Monitor Rolloff Filter Strapped for 18 dB/Octave
2-5
2-6
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
receiver. It is a passive filter, requiring no power supply. It can be mounted to
one rail of a standard rack. (See page 1-21 for more about studio monitoring.)
A) Select rolloff response.
The Monitor Rolloff Filter is supplied jumpered for NRSC
NOTCH, unless otherwise noted.

WITH
10
KHZ
NRSC with 10 kHz notch:
Accurately simulates the sound of a standard NRSC receiver. Also useful
for remote off-air monitoring because it filters out the 10 kHz whistles
caused by interfering first-adjacent stations (in countries with 10 kHz
channel spacing). Intended to complement the HF CURVE NRSC setting
in OPTIMOD-AM.
Note that very few consumer radios have a frequency response resembling the NRSC standard. Therefore, the NRSC rolloff will result in substantially brighter sound than most radios provide, and the 18dB/OCTAVE
setting provides a more realistic simulation of a typical radio.

NRSC: NRSC rolloff without 10 kHz notch.

18dB/OCTAVE:
Simulates the sound of an average narrowband AM/MW receiver except
that it shelves off above 6 kHz instead of continuing to rolloff as a real
radio would. This rolloff complements an HF CURVE setting of 0 in
OPTIMOD-AM. The amount of rolloff is adjustable with the filter's high
frequency ROLLOFF control to complement the setting of the HF GAIN
control on OPTIMOD-AM.
B) Change the jumpers to the desired rolloff. See Figure 2-4.
C) Connect the output of your modulation monitor to the Input terminals of the
Monitor Rolloff Filter.
Figure 2-6: Monitor Rolloff Filter Schematic Diagram
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION

If the output impedance of the source is between 0 and 35 ohms (such as
the output of an opamp), connect the source between the 0 OHM
SOURCE and COM terminals on the rolloff filter chassis.

If the output impedance of the source is 600 ohms, connect the source
between the 600-OHM SOURCE and COM terminals.

If the output impedance is some value in between, connect a resistor between the source's output and the Monitor Rolloff Filter's 600-OHM
SOURCE terminal so that the total source impedance seen by the Monitor Rolloff Filter is 600Ω (external resistor + output impedance of source
= 600Ω).

If your console monitor or monitor amplifier input is bridging (like virtually all modern amplifiers), set the TERMINATION switches on the Rolloff
Filter to ON.

If the console monitor or monitor amplifier input impedance is a true
600Ω, set the TERMINATION switch on the Rolloff Filter to OFF.
D) Connect the input of your console monitor or monitor amplifier to the
OUTPUT terminals on the Monitor Rolloff Filter.
E) Connect the earth ground terminals on the Rolloff Filter to earth ground for
shielding.
To avoid potential ground loops, the earth ground is not connected to
the COM terminals.
F) Set the ROLLOFF control of the Rolloff Filter to taste. See Figure 2-5 on page 25.
9300 Rear Panel
The Power Cord is detachable and is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA standard) or CEE7/7 plug (Continental Europe).
An RS-232 (PC Remote) Computer Interface, labeled SERIAL PORT, is provided to
connect the 9300 to IBM PC-compatible computers, directly or via modem, for remote control, metering and software downloads.
A Remote Interface Connector allows you to connect the 9300 to your existing
transmitter remote control or other simple contact-closure control devices. The 9300
remote control supports user-programmable selection of up to eight optically isolated inputs for any one of the following parameters: recalling any factory- or user
presets, tone or bypass modes, selecting stereo input modes (mono-left, mono-right,
mono-sum), selecting analog, digital or digital+J.17 input, and clock synchronization. (See Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-40.) The 9300 remote
control accepts a DB-25 connector.
A valid signal is a momentary transition from no-current to current flowing through
the particular remote signal pins. Current must flow for at least 50ms for the signal
to be interpreted as valid. It is acceptable to apply current continuously to an input,
2-7
2-8
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
DC or AC. Do not exceed 12 volts unless you use an external current-limiting resistor
that limits current to 10mA. Voltage is available at this connector to facilitate use of
contact closures.
The Ethernet Port accepts an Ethernet cable terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Digital AES3 Input and Output are provided to support two-channel AES3standard digital audio signals through XLR-type connectors.
Analog Inputs and Outputs use XLR-type connectors The analog inputs support
left and right audio signals (to allow the 9300 to mix these to mono or to choose
one of the two channels as a mono source). There are two analog outputs for two
transmitters. When the POLARITY CONTROL (located in the active System Preset) is set
to POSITIVE, a positive-going signal at pin 2 of the XLR-type connector corresponds
to positive modulation.
Input and Output Connections
Cable
We recommend using two-conductor foil-shielded cable (such as Belden 8451 or
equivalent) for the audio input and output connections because signal current flows
through the two conductors only. The shield does not carry signal and is used only
for shielding.
Connectors

Input and output connectors are XLR-type connectors.
In the XLR-type connectors, pin 1 is CHASSIS GROUND, while pin 2 and
pin 3 are a balanced, floating pair. This wiring scheme is compatible with
any studio-wiring standard: If pin 2 or 3 is considered LOW, the other pin
is automatically HIGH.
Analog Audio Input

Nominal input level between –14dBu and +8dBu will result in normal operation
of the 9300.
(0dBu = 0.775Vrms. For this application, the dBm @600 scale on voltmeters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu.)

The peak input level that causes overload is +27.0dBu.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION

The electronically balanced input uses an ultra low noise and distortion differential amplifier for best common mode rejection, and is compatible with most professional and semi-professional audio equipment, balanced or unbalanced, having a source impedance of 600 or less. The input is EMI suppressed.

Input connections are the same whether the driving source is balanced or unbalanced.

Connect the red (or white) wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#2 or #3)
that is considered HIGH by the standards of your organization. Connect the black
wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2) that is considered LOW by
the standards of your organization.

In low RF fields (like a studio site), connect the cable shield at 9300 input only —
it should not be connected at the source end. In high RF fields (like a transmitter
site), also connect the shield to pin 1 of the male XLR-type connector at the 9300
input.

If the output of the driving unit is unbalanced and does not have separate
CHASSIS GROUND and (–) (or LOW) output terminals, connect both the shield and
the black wire to the common (–) or ground terminal of the driving unit.
Analog Audio Outputs

There are two monophonic outputs (for two transmitters).

Electronically balanced and floating outputs simulate a true transformer output.
Because of the built-in high-order EMI suppression filter, the source impedance is
351. The output is capable of driving loads of 600 or higher; the 100% modulation level is adjustable with the AO 100% control over a –6dBu to +24dBu
range. Loading the output with 600 will decrease the output level by 4.0 dB
compared to a high impedance (bridging) load and will reduce the maximum
available output level by 4.0 dB. A software switch in Analog Output screen allows the output level calibration to be set for a bridging or 600 load.

If an unbalanced output is required (to drive unbalanced inputs of other equipment), it should be taken between pin 2 and pin 3 of the XLR-type connector.
Connect the LOW pin of the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2, depending on your
organization’s standards) to circuit ground; take the HIGH output from the remaining pin. No special precautions are required even though one side of the
output is grounded.

Use two-conductor foil-shielded cable (Belden 8451, or equivalent).

At the 9300’s output (and at the output of other equipment in the system), do
not connect the cable’s shield to the CHASSIS GROUND terminal (pin 1) on the
XLR-type connector. Instead, connect the shield to the input destination. Con-
2-9
2-10
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
nect the red (or white) wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#2 or #3) that
is considered HIGH by the standards of your organization. Connect the black wire
to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2) that is considered LOW by the
standards of your organization.
AES3 Digital Input and Output
There is one AES3 input and one AES3 output. The program input and output are
both equipped with sample rate converters and can operate at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2,
and 96 kHz.
Per the AES3 standard, each digital input or output line carries two
channels. The input accepts stereo, which the 9300 can process as monofrom-left, mono-from-right, or mono-from-sum. The output carries two
identical mono-processed channels.
The connection is 110 balanced. The AES3 standard specifies a maximum cable length of 100 meters. While almost any balanced, shielded
cable will work for relatively short runs (5 meters or less), longer runs require used of 110 balanced cable like Belden 1800B, 1801B (plenum
rated), multi-pair 180xF, 185xF, or 78xxA. Single-pair category 5, 5e, and 6
Ethernet cable will also work well if you do not require shielding. (In
most cases, the tight balance of Category 5/5e/6 cable makes shielding
unnecessary.)
The AES3id standard is best for very long cable runs (up to 1000 meters).
This specifies 75 unbalanced coaxial cable, terminated in BNC connectors. A 110/75 balun transformer is required to interface an AES3id
connection to your Optimod’s digital input or output.
The digital input clip level is fixed at 0 dB relative to the maximum digital
word. The maximum digital input will make the 9300 input meters display 0dB. The reference level is adjustable using the DI REF control.
The 9300 is a “multirate” system; its internal sample rate is 32 kHz and
multiples thereof (up to 128 kHz). The output is strictly band-limited to
16 kHz or less. Therefore, the output can pass through a 32 kHz uncompressed link with bit-for-bit transparency. Because sample rate conversion
is a phase-linear process that does not add bandwidth, the 9300’s output
signal will continue to be compatible with 32 kHz links even if it undergoes intermediate sample rate conversions (for example, 32 kHz to 48
kHz to 32 kHz).
Grounding
Very often, grounding is approached in a “hit or miss” manner. But with care it is
possible to wire an audio studio so that it provides maximum protection from power
faults and is free from ground loops (which induce hum and can cause oscillation).
In an ideal system:

All units in the system should have balanced inputs. In a modern system with
low output impedances and high input impedances, a balanced input will pro-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
vide common-mode rejection and prevent ground loops regardless of whether it
is driven from a balanced or unbalanced source.
The 9300 has balanced inputs.

All equipment circuit grounds must be connected to each other; all equipment
chassis grounds must be connected together.

In a low RF field, cable shields should be connected at one end only — preferably the source (output) end.

In a high RF field, audio cable shields should be connected to a solid earth
ground at both ends to achieve best shielding against RFI.
Power Ground

Ground the 9300 chassis through the third wire in the power cord. Proper
grounding techniques never leave equipment chassis unconnected to
power/earth ground. A proper power ground is essential for safe operation. Lifting a chassis from power ground creates a potential safety hazard.
Circuit Ground

To maintain the same potential in all equipment, the circuit (audio) grounds
must be connected together.

In high RF fields, the system is usually grounded through the equipment rack in
which the 9300 is mounted. The rack should be connected to a solid earth
ground by a wide copper strap — wire is ineffective at RF frequencies because of
the wire’s self-inductance.

The 9300’s chassis and circuit grounds are internally connected. There is no
ground lift switch.
A ground lift switch should never be necessary on any piece of equipment connected entirely via balanced I/O.
9300 Front Panel

Screen Display labels the four soft buttons and provides control-setting information.

Screen Contrast button adjusts the optimum viewing angle of the screen display.
2-11
2-12
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300

Four Soft buttons provide access to all 9300 functions and controls. The functions of the soft buttons change with each screen, following the labels at the
bottom of each screen.

Next and Prev ( and ) buttons scroll the screen horizontally to accommodate menus that cannot fit in the available space. They also allow you to move
from one character to the next when you enter data into your 9300. These flash
when such a menu is in use. Otherwise, they are inactive.

Control Knob is used to change the setting that is selected by the soft buttons.
To change a value, you ordinarily have to hold down a soft button while you are
turning the control knob.

Recall button allows you recall a Factory or User Preset.
Selecting the Recall button does not immediately recall a preset. See step
16 on page 2-18 for instructions on recalling a preset.

Modify button brings you to list of controls that you can use to edit a Factory or
User Preset. If you edit a Factory Preset, you must save it as a new User Preset to
retain your edit.

Setup button accesses the technical parameters necessary to match the 9300 to
your transmission system.

Escape button provides an escape from the currently active screen, returning
the user to the next higher-level screen. Repeatedly pressing Escape will always
return you to the Idle screen, which is at the top level of the screen hierarchy.

Input meters show the peak input level applied to the 9300’s analog or digital
inputs with reference to 0 = digital full-scale. If the input meter’s red segment
lights up, you are overdriving the 9300’s analog to digital converter. This clips at
+27 dBu.

AGC meter shows the gain reduction of the slow two-band AGC processing that
precedes the separate analog and digital processing chains. Full-scale is 25 dB
gain reduction. You can switch the meter so that it either reads the gain reduction of the Master (above-200 Hz) band, the Bass (below-200 Hz) band, or the
difference between the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands.
The latter reading is useful for assessing the dynamic bass equalization
that the AGC produces and it helps you set the AGC BASS COUPLING control.

Gate LED indicates gate activity, lighting when the input audio falls below the
threshold set by the AGC gate threshold control (via the Full Control screen’s
AGC GATE control). When this happens, the AGC’s recovery time is slowed to
prevent noise rush-up during low-level passages.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
There is also an independent gate for the multiband compressor. You can
only see its action from the Optimod PC Remote software.

Gain Reduction meters show the gain reduction in the multiband compressors.
Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction.

Output meters show the instantaneous peak output of the processed audio in
units of percentage modulation. The right-hand meter shows positive peaks and
the left-hand meter shows negative peaks.
Quick Setup
Quick Setup guides you through 9300 setup for your primary transmitter. It is appropriate for users with modern transmitter facilities. Following this section, you can
find more detailed information regarding setup beyond the Quick Setup screens. In
most cases, you will not need this extra information.
Quick Setup assumes that your transmission facility does not need to use the 9300’s
Transmitter Equalizer. This should be true if you are using a modern solid-state
transmitter and have a reasonably wideband antenna system. If you need to correct
tilt, overshoot, or ringing in the RF envelope, adjust the Transmitter Equalizer after
Quick Setup is completed.
For the following adjustments, use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose
the parameter you wish to adjust. To change a parameter (like an output level), you
must usually hold down the soft button while turning the knob. However, if there is
only one parameter on a screen, you can change this with the knob alone. (You do
not have to hold down a button.) Let the text on the screen guide you through the
process.
1. If your signal path includes a studio level controller, set it up.
We recommend Orban’s 6300 Multipurpose Digital Audio Processor. The 6300
substitutes for the AGC in the 9300 at the transmitter and provides protection
limiting for the STL. See Using OPTIMOD 6300 as a Studio Level Controller in the
6300’s operating manual.
The 6300’s AGC uses the same dual-band, window-gated technology as
the 9300’s AGC. It can therefore accurately substitute for this AGC and
can help maintain an all-digital signal path throughout the facility.
2. Make sure that the transmitter is turned off.
This avoids potential damage caused by overdriving it. You will set the modulation level later in Quick Setup.
2-13
2-14
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
3. Press the front-panel Setup button.
4. Press the Quick Setup soft button when its label appears on the display.
Quick Setup presents a guided sequence of screens into which you must insert information about your particular requirements. In general, the screens are selfexplanatory.
Use the NEXT and PREV buttons to navigate between screens. These buttons will
flash to indicate that they are active.
5. Set the time, date, and Daylight Saving Time.
[Skip this step if you will be using an Internet timeserver to set time, date, and
Daylight Saving Time. See Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Timeserver on
page 2-47. To skip this step, press the NEXT button four times.]
The set time screen appears when you enter Quick Setup for the first time.
A) Hold down the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the
hour, minute, and seconds. Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time.
B) Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time. Then press the
ENTER TIME button to set the clock.
C) After you press ENTER TIME, you will see the ENTER DATE screen. Hold down
the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the day, month,
and year.
D) After you press ENTER DATE, you will see the SET DAYLIGHT SAVING screen. Turn
the knob to specify the month at which Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time)
begins in your area.
E) Press the NEXT button.
F) Turn the knob to specify the week of the month when Daylight Saving Time
begins.
G) Press the NEXT button.
H) Turn the knob to specify the month at which Standard Time begins in your
area.
I) Press the NEXT button.
J) Turn the knob to specify the week of the month when Standard Time begins.
6. Set output bandwidth.
This step sets the lowpass filter bandwidth in the default system preset
(TX1/DAY).
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Select the lowpass filter cutoff frequency you need by turning the knob.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
The setting of the lowpass filter controls your RF occupied bandwidth. It
is very important to set it to meet the government standards in your
country.
OPTIMOD-AM can be readily programmed from its front panel or by remote control for any lowpass filter cutoff frequency from 4.5 kHz to 9.5
kHz (NRSC) in 0.5 kHz steps. Default is 9.5 kHz (NRSC).
Quick Setup programs the filter so that it is down 0.1 dB at the assigned
cutoff frequency. However, you can later edit any system preset to shape
the transition region of the input section of the filter to trade off ringing
against bright sound. This may be particularly useful when using a low
cutoff frequency like 5.0 kHz. (See step 6.C) on page 2-23.)
The LPF SHAPE control in the system preset does this by allowing you to
set the cutoff frequency so that it is –0.1 dB, –3 dB, or –6 dB down. By
making the transition between the passband and stopband progressively
more rounded and gentle, each step trades off duller sound against less
ringing.
7. Set highpass filter cutoff frequency.
This step sets the highpass filter bandwidth in the default system preset
(TX1/DAY).
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Select the highpass filter cutoff frequency you need by turning the knob.
OPTIMOD-AM can be programmed for any highpass filter cutoff frequency from 50 to 100Hz in 10Hz steps. Default is 50 Hz.
The appropriate setting of the highpass filter is not determined by government regulations, but instead depends on both your programming
format and transmitter. Modern transmitters can accommodate frequencies below 50Hz without loss of performance due to bounce or tilt. However, virtually no AM radio can satisfactorily reproduce frequencies below 50Hz. Many produce distortion when attempting to reproduce such
frequencies because their RF AGC circuits are poorly designed and they
mistake low-frequency modulation for changes in carrier level. Simultaneously, 50Hz is a low enough cutoff frequency to retain significant bass
punch and slam with music. We therefore recommend that you set the
highpass filter to 50Hz unless you have a good reason for setting it differently. One reason to set it higher would be if you have an oldertechnology transmitter that cannot reproduce low frequencies without
bounce or tilt. (You should experiment by setting the highpass filter to
various frequencies higher than 50Hz to determine if you can get more
average modulation from your transmitter by doing so.) Another reason
would be if your format is predominantly talk, because talk does not require frequencies below approximately 80Hz.
All highpass filters have greater than 30dB/octave rolloff and have a
notch at 25Hz to remove any cueing tones and to protect transmitters
that might be adversely affected by modulating frequencies in this area.
Technically, what you have just done is to set the highpass filter cutoff
frequency in the TX1/DAY(default) system preset.
2-15
2-16
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
8. Set external AGC mode.
Most of the processing structures in the 9300 control level with a preliminary
AGC (Automatic Gain Control). If you are using a suitable automatic gain control
at the studio, the AGC in the 9300 should be defeated. This is so that the two
AGCs do not “fight” each other and so they do not simultaneously increase gain,
resulting in increased noise.
As of this writing, the currently manufactured Orban products that can be used
as external AGCs are Optimod-PC 1101 and Optimod 6300. Their manuals contain
instructions on how to use them in this application. They are the preferred
choices because their AGCs are identical to the AGC in the 9300.
Discontinued Orban products usable as external AGCs include the 8200ST, 464A
“Co-Operator,” 8100AST, and 1100 OPTIMOD-PC. In this manual, we do not provide step-by-step instructions for setting up all of these older products
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Set external AGC mode by turning the knob.
 Set the field to YES if you have a external AGC installed at your studio
feeding the studio-to-transmitter link. This setting appropriately defeats
the 9300’s AGC for all presets.
 Set the field to NO If you do not have an external AGC installed; this setting
enables the 9300 AGC status to be determined by the selected preset.
If you are using an Orban 4000 Transmission Limiter, set field to NO (so
that the AGC function in the 9300 continues to work). The Orban 4000 is
a transmission system overload protection device and is normally operated below threshold. It is not designed to perform an AGC or gainriding function, and it cannot substitute for the AGC function in the
9300.
9. Select your primary input (analog or digital).
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) If your main input source is digital, turn the knob to select DIGITAL or
DIGITAL+J17. Otherwise, select ANALOG.
The only digital encoding that typically uses J.17 preemphasis (of which
we are aware) is NICAM. DIGITAL, not DIGITAL+J17, is appropriate for almost anyone using the digital input.
10. Choose how the processing will be fed from the active input.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Choose either MONO L (mono sourced from the left input channel), MONO R
(mono sourced from the right input channel), or MONO L+R (mono sourced
from the sum of the left and right input channels.
If you are sourcing the 9300 with stereo audio, choose MONO L+R.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
11. Set input operating levels.
In this step, you set the operating levels of the 9300 to match the input levels it is
receiving so the 9300’s AGC can operate in the range for which it was designed.
There are separate settings for the analog and digital inputs. If you provide both
analog and digital inputs to the 9300, optimum adjustment is achieved when the
AGC gain reduction meters show the same amount of processing when you
switch between both analog and digital inputs.
This will allow you to switch between analog and digital inputs without
sudden level changes.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Feed normal program material to the 9300.
C) Play program material from your studio, peaking at normal program levels
(typically 0 VU if your console or mixing desk uses VU meters).
D) [Skip this step if you are not using the analog input.]
Hold down the ANALOG soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC
meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
E) [Skip this step if you are not using the digital input.]
Hold down the DIGITAL soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC
meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
12. Set the digital output sample rate.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output(s).]
Turn the knob to set the Digital OUTPUT SAMPLE RATE to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2,
or 96 kHz.
The internal sample rate converter sets the rate at the 9300’s digital outputs. This adjustment allows you to set the output sample rate to ensure
compatibility with equipment requiring a fixed sample rate. In all cases,
the 9300’s sample rate is 32 kHz and multiples thereof up to 128 kHz.
13. Prepare to set output levels.
A) Press the NEXT button.
The positive peak threshold for all outputs is now set to 100%.
You can set asymmetry as desired after you have completed Quick Setup.
The POSPEAKTHR control in the active system preset determines asymmetry. For Quick Setup, the active system preset is TX1/DAY.
You can use either program material or tone to set the output level (and
thus, the on-air modulation).
 To use tone, press the YES button.
 To use program material, press the NO button.
2-17
2-18
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
We recommend using program material because it automatically takes
into account any bounce, overshoot, and ringing in the transmission
plant. A tone setup can cause overmodulation with program material
unless the modulation control in your facility is “textbook perfect.”
14. Set the digital output level.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you are not using the digital output.]
Turn the knob to set the desired digital output level corresponding to
100% modulation, in units of dB below full-scale.
If you plan to modulate asymmetrically, you must leave headroom for
the positive peaks. For example, you must set the DO 100% control lower
than –2.0 dBfs to support 125% modulation.
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
monitor or oscilloscope connected to your transmitter’s common point.
An oscilloscope is the most reliable method because it will unambiguously show negative carrier pinch-off, whereas some monitors have overshoot that can cause them to under-indicate peak modulation.
15. Set the analog output level.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you are not using the analog output.]
This Quick Setup procedure adjusts Analog Output #1. If you are also using Analog Output #2 (to drive a second transmitter, for example), you
can adjust it after you complete Quick Setup.
Turn the knob to set the desired analog output level corresponding to
100% modulation, in units of dBu (0 dBu = 0.776 Vrms).
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
monitor or oscilloscope connected to your transmitter.
C) Press the NEXT button.
If you activated the modulation setup tone in step (13.A) on page 2-17,
the tone will turn off automatically.
D) Press the NEXT button.
16. Choose a processing preset.
A) Turn the knob until your desired preset is visible in the lower line of the display.
B) Press the RECALL NEXT button to put your desired preset on-air.
This step selects the processing to complement various program formats.
After this step, you can always select a different processing preset, program the 9300 to automatically change presets on a time/date schedule,
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
use a GPI input to trigger preset changes, modify presets to customize
your sound, and store these presets as User Presets.
Preset names are just suggestions. Feel free to audition different presets
and to choose those whose sound you prefer. Your preferred preset
might not be named for your format.
You can easily modify a preset later with the 9300’s one-knob LESS-MORE
feature. Refer to Section 3.
Note that factory processing presets (but not user presets) change their
sonic characteristics depending on the setting of the system lowpass filter. The switch occurs between 7.0 and 7.5 kHz. The presets for bandwidths of 7.5 kHz and above are oriented toward radios with higher audio bandwidth than are the presets for 7.0 kHz and below. In most cases,
the difference is the amount of HF equalization applied and the curve
shape of the equalizer.
Congratulations! You are now on the air with your initial sound. Feel free to
read the material in Section 3 of this manual, which describes the various presets
and how you can customize them to achieve your desired signature sound.
If your transmitter plant is not “textbook-perfect,” we recommend using the instructions in the detailed setup procedure (following Quick Setup) to achieve
highest average modulation by equalizing your transmitter and/or antenna system with the 9300’s Transmitter Equalizer.
17. Complete Station ID (optional).
The Station ID is an optional setting that you can provide to associate the 9300
with the station providing the program material (e.g., “KABC”). The name can
be up to eight characters long. It is used to identify your 9300 to Orban’s 9300 PC
Remote application and appears on the Main Screen when the 9300 is being controlled by the PC Remote application.
A) Navigate to SETUP > NEXT > TIME DATE AND ID > STATION ID.
B) Use the knob to set the each character in the ID. Use the NEXT and PREV buttons to control the cursor position.
C) When finished entering your name, press the SAVE button. If you escape to
the main screen from Setup, you can now see the station name toggle on the
main screen.
The following material provides detailed instructions on how to set up the 9300. If
QUICK SETUP does not fully address your setup needs or if you wish to customize
your system beyond those provided with QUICK SETUP, then you may need the additional information in the sections below. However, for most users, this material is
only for reference because QUICK SETUP has enabled them to set up the 9300 correctly.
2-19
2-20
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Analog and Digital I/O Setup
For the following adjustments, use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose
the parameter to be adjusted. To change a parameter (like an output level), it is
usually necessary to hold down the soft button while turning the knob.
1. Make sure that the transmitter is turned off.
This avoids potential damage caused by overdriving it. You will set the modulation level later in this setup procedure.
2. Temporarily set the external AGC mode to “No.”
Navigate to SETUP > NEXT > NEXT > EXT AGC and set EXT AGC to NO.
If you are using a external AGC like the Orban 6300, you should restore this setting to YES after the setup procedure is complete.
3. Adjust Input selector.
A) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > INPUT > ANLG IN CALIB.
B) Set the INPUT to ANALOG.
The 9300 will automatically switch to its analog input if signal lock is unavailable at its AES3 input.
4. Adjust Analog Input Reference Level.
[9dBu to +13dBu (VU), or –2 to +20dBu (PPM)] in 0.5 dB steps
[Skip this step if you will not be using the analog input.]
The reference level VU and PPM (Peak) settings track each other with an offset
of 7 dB. This compensates for the typical indications with program material of a
VU meter versus the higher indications on a PPM. (See About Transmission Levels
and Metering on page 1-18.)
This step sets the center of the 9300’s gain reduction range to the level to which
your studio operators peak their program material on the studio meters. This assures that the 9300’s processing presets will operate in their preferred range.
You may adjust this level with a standard reference/line-up level tone from your
studio or with program material.
Note that in this step, you are calibrating to the normal indication of the studio
meters; this is quite different from the actual peak level.
If you know the reference VU or PPM level that will be presented to the 9300, set
the reference level to this level, but please verify it with the steps shown directly
below.
A) Press the RECALL button.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
B) Turn the knob until GEN PURPOSE MEDIUM appears in the lower line of the
display.
C) Press the RECALL NEXT button.
D) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > INPUT > ANLG IN CALIB > AI REF (VU or PPM, depending on which metering system you use).
E) Calibrate using Tone.
[Skip to step (F) if you are using Program material to calibrate the 9300 to
your standard studio level.]
a) Verify EXT AGC is set to NO.
Refer to step 1 on page 2-20.
b) Feed a tone at your reference level to the 9300.
If you are not using a studio level controller, feed a tone through your
console at normal program levels (typically 0VU if your console uses VU
meters).
If you are using a studio level controller that performs an AGC function,
such as an Orban 6300, adjust it for normal operation.
c) Adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) control to make the 9300’s AGC meter
indicate 10 dB gain reduction.
d) Skip to step (G).
F) Calibrate using Program.
[Skip this step if you are using Tone to calibrate the 9300 to your standard studio level — see step (E) above.]
a) Verify EXT AGC is set to NO.
Refer to step 1 on page 2-20.
b) Feed normal program material to the 9300
Play program material from your studio, peaking at the level to which
you normally peak program material (typically 0VU if your console uses
VU meters).
c) Adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) control to make the 9300’s AGC meters
indicate an average of 10 dB gain reduction when the console’s VU meter
or PPM is peaking at its normal level.
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages less than 10 dB gain reduction
(higher on the meter), re-adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) to a lower level.
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages more gain reduction (lower on
the meter), re-adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) to a higher level.
G) When finished, reset EXT AGC to YES if required (e.g., if that was its setting
prior to setting AI REF (VU or PPM) level).
Refer to step 1 on page 2-20.
2-21
2-22
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
5. Adjust the Digital Input Reference Level control.
[Skip this step if you will not be using the digital input.]
A) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > INPUT > DIGITAL INPUT CALIB > INPUT and set the
input source to DIGITAL.
B) Repeat steps 3 and 4 (starting on page 2-20), but use the DI REF (VU OR PPM)
control.
6. Set output bandwidth and highpass filter cutoff frequency.
A) Navigate to SETUP > MODIFY TX PRESET > TX1/DAY .
To describe their most common application, the four system presets are
labeled TX1/DAY, TX1/NIGHT, TX2/DAY, and TX2/NIGHT, although they
can be applied in a completely general way to the requirements of your
transmission facility. System presets can be recalled by remote control
(GPI or PC Remote) and/or at preset times by the 9300’s clock-based
automation. TX1/DAY is the default system preset and many stations will
always use it once they have set it up.
The controls within a given system preset include lowpass filter cutoff
frequency, lowpass filter shape, highpass filter cutoff frequency, positive
peak threshold (asymmetry), and four transmitter equalizer controls.
Only one system preset can be active at a given time; that preset determines the parameters applied to all outputs.
Once you have selected a system preset, that preset will be active until
you explicitly select another via the front panel, remote control, or clockbased automation. This is true even if AC power is interrupted. However,
if clock-based automation was scheduled to recall a different preset during the period when the 9300 was powered down, upon power-up, the
9300 will automatically recall the preset that would have been on-air at
that time if power had stayed on.
B) Hold down the soft key under LOWPASS and Select the desired lowpass filter
cutoff frequency by turning the knob.
Lowpass filter cutoff frequencies range from 4.5 kHz to 9.5 kHz (NRSC) in
0.5 kHz steps. The setting of the lowpass filter controls your RF occupied
bandwidth, so it is very important to set it to meet the government standards in your country.
Note that the user processing presets can only lower the low-pass cutoff
frequency below its setting in active system preset. For example, if you
have set the low-pass cutoff frequency in the active system preset to 6.5
kHz, this can be lowered to 6.0 kHz or below in a processing preset, but
cannot be raised above 6.5 kHz. This is to prevent accidentally creating
presets that violate the occupied bandwidth standards of your governing
authority.
In Region-2 countries, we recommend configuring the 9300 for 9.5 kHz
NRSC-1 lowpass filtering (via the active system preset) and the
18dB/octave HF equalizer active with a GAIN of 10dB and a CURVE of 10
(via the active processing preset). This is similar in spirit to the NRSC preemphasis, which also has a maximum gain of 10dB. However, it provides
more midrange boost than the NRSC preemphasis, which helps the vast
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
majority of radios in the field. These are narrowband radios with 2 to 3
kHz audio bandwidth (3dB down). They do not meet the EIA's AMAX
standard (or even come close to it). Of course, if you wish to broadcast
with strict NRSC preemphasis, you can easily adjust the 9300's HF Equalizer to do this by setting the HF curve to NRSC.
Some broadcasters have now chosen to reduce their output bandwidth
below the NRSC limit voluntarily. Setting the output bandwidth to 7.0
kHz or below in a system preset will automatically invoke the narrowband versions of the factory presets. However, it will not change a user
processing preset. It is wise to develop user presets while using the same
lowpass filter cutoff frequency that you will employ when these presets
are on air.
For countries where narrowband lowpass filtering is required, we recommend setting OPTIMOD-AM’s lowpass filter to 6.0 kHz. This will meet
the requirements of ITU-R 328-5 without further lowpass filtering in the
transmitter. Any such lowpass filters already in the transmitter should be
removed to prevent overmodulation caused by the filter's overshoot and
ringing.
For HF/international shortwave use, set the lowpass filter to 4.5 kHz.
C) Hold down the soft key under LPF SHAPE and turn the knob to determine
whether the input lowpass filter is down 0.1 dB, 3 dB, or 6 dB at the lowpass
filter cutoff frequency. By making the transition between the passband and
stopband progressively more rounded and gentle, each step trades off duller
sound against less ringing. See Figure 2-7 on page 2-23.
Figure 2-7: Effect of Lowpass Filter Shape Control on 5 kHz Lowpass Filter
2-23
2-24
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
D) Hold down the soft key under HIGHPASS and Select the highpass filter cutoff
frequency you need by turning the knob.
OPTIMOD-AM can be programmed for any highpass filter cutoff frequency from 50 to 100Hz in 10Hz steps. Default is 50 Hz. See the text in
step (7.B) on page 2-15 for guidance on where to set the frequency. Refer to the text in step (B) on page 2-22 regarding global system settings
in the 9300’s Transmission Presets versus setting in user processing presets.
E) Set the lowpass and highpass filter cutoff frequencies for any other System
Presets you will be using. Note that each preset has an independent setting
for lowpass cutoff, lowpass shape, highpass cutoff, and asymmetry.
a) Press ESC.
b) Press the soft key labeled with the system preset you wish to adjust.
c) Adjust the filter frequencies as you did in the steps above.
7. Configure analog output(s).
[Skip this step if you will not be using the analog output(s).]
A) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > OUTPUT > ANALOG1.
If necessary, use the NEXT button to scroll horizontally.
B) Set the LOAD control to BRIDGING or 600 OHMS. The normal setting is BRIDGING.
Only set this control to 600 OHMS if your transmitter has been verified to have
a 600-ohm input impedance.
Functionally, the control increases the output level by 4.0 dB when the
control is changed from BRIDGING to 600 OHM. This compensates for the 4
dB loss in the 9400’s EMI filtering network when this network is loaded
by 600 ohms.
If you are using Analog Output #2, navigate to Navigate to SETUP > IO
CALIB > OUTPUT > ANALOG2 and repeat this step.
8. Configure digital output(s).
[Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output(s).]
A) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > OUTPUT > DIGITAL.
If necessary, use the NEXT button to scroll horizontally.
B) Set the PRE-EMPH control to J.17 or FLAT.
Almost all systems will require FLAT output. J.17 is only used if you are
driving a STL employing J.17 preemphasis (like certain NICAM STLs) and
you have bypassed the J.17 emphasis filter in the STL.)
C) Set the DO RATE to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz.
The 9300’s fundamental sample rate is always 32 kHz. However, the internal sample rate converter sets the rate at the 9300’s digital output.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
This adjustment allows you to set the output sample rate to ensure compatibility with equipment requiring a fixed sample rate.
D) Set FORMAT to AES3 or SPDIF.
Professional equipment usually requires AES3.
E) Set the desired output WORD LEN (word length).
[14], [16], [18], [20], or [24], in bits
The largest available word length is 24 bits. The 9300 can truncate its
output word length to 20, 18, 16 or 14 bits. The 9300 can add dither for
input material that is insufficiently dithered for these lower word lengths
(see the next step).
F) Adjust DITHER to IN or OUT, as desired.
[In] or [Out]
When set to In, the 9300 adds “high-pass” dither before any truncation
of the output word. The amount of dither automatically tracks the setting of the WORD LGTH control. This first-order noise shaped dither considerably reduces added noise in the midrange by comparison to white
PDF dither. However, unlike extreme noise shaping, it adds a maximum
of 3 dB of excess total noise power when compared to white PDF dither.
Thus, it is a good compromise between white PDF dither and extreme
noise shaping.
If the source material has already been correctly dithered (as is true for
virtually all commercially recorded material), you may set this control to
OUT. However, particularly if you use the Noise Reduction feature, the
processing can sometimes attenuate input dither so that it is insufficient
to dither the output correctly. In this case, you should add dither within
the 9300.
G) Set the DO SYNC.
You can choose INTERNAL (the output sample rate is synchronized to the
9300’s internal crystal-controlled clock) or EXTERNAL (the output sample
rate is synchronized to the sample rate appearing at the 9300’s AES3 input).
9. Program Tally Outputs.
[Skip this step if you do not wish to use the tally outputs.]
See step 6 on page 2-4 for wiring instructions.
You can program the two tally outputs to indicate several operational and fault
conditions.
A) Navigate to SETUP > TALLY > TALLY OUT1.
B) Program tally output #1.
To program a given tally output, press and hold the soft button associated with the output you are programming. As you turn the control
knob, the functions listed below will appear in the highlighted field.
2-25
2-26
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
 Input: Analog: Indicates that the 6300 is processing audio from its analog
input.
 Input: Digital: Indicates that the 6300 is processing audio from its AES3
digital input.
 AES Input Error: Indicates that the 6300's AES input receiver chip has detected that the input data is unusable. When the chip detects such an error,
it automatically switches the in-put to ANALOG.
 No Function: Tally output is disabled.
C) Program tally output #2 if you wish, following the procedure in step (B) above
with the TALLY OUT2 button.
10. Set output and configuration level.
This is a preliminary level adjustment. Later in this installation procedure, you
will set 9300 for the highest modulation level that your facility can produce. If
your transmission facility proves to have overshoot, tilt, or ringing when you test
it in step 11 on page 2-27, you will have to go through the Transmitter Equalizer
adjustment procedure, which starts with step 12 on page 2-28.
A) Make sure that the transmitter is turned off.
B) Turn on the 400Hz calibration tone. To do this:
a) Navigate to SETUP > TEST.
b) Set the MODE to SINE.
c) Press the NEXT key twice.
d) Set SINE/TRNGL MOD to 50%.
e) Press NEXT.
f) Set SINE/TRNGL FREQ to 400 HZ.
C) Set modulation.
If you plan to modulate asymmetrically, you must leave headroom for the
positive peaks. For example, you must set the DO 100% control lower
than –2.0 dBfs to support 125% modulation.
a) Set to its minimum level the AOX 100% or DO 100% control associated with
the output you are using to drive the transmitter under adjustment.
b) Turn the transmitter on.
c) Set the control you adjusted in step (a) to produce 40% modulation.
This leaves 2 dB of headroom to accommodate overshoot in the transmission plant. This should suffice for most facilities.
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
analyzer or oscilloscope connected to your transmitter.
D) In SETUP > TEST, set the MODE to OPERATE.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
E) Drive the 9300 with program material and observe the negative modulation
level. Trim the AOX 100% or DO 100% control associated with the output you
are using to drive the transmitter under adjustment so that you observe 99%
modulation on negative peaks.
Spend time observing the modulation with different program material. If
you see the peak modulation level vary significantly depending on program material, the 9300’s transmitter equalizer can often improve this
situation.
Note that if you set the processing up for asymmetrical modulation
(which is done by editing the active System Preset) and you observe
negative peaks that are higher than positive peaks, you can correct this
by changing the setting of the POLARITY control, located next to the AOX
100% or DO 100% control in the active System Preset.
11. Test the equipment downstream from OPTIMOD-AM.
Test the RF envelope at the transmitter’s output to determine if it exhibits tilt,
overshoot, or ringing. If you observe these problems, you can often adequately
equalize it them with the 9300’s transmitter equalizer, whose settings are determined by the on-air System Preset.
Dealing with tilt and overshoot may seem fussy, but every dB of tilt or overshoot
is a dB of loudness lost!
Use the 9300's built-in square wave generator to make this test:
A) Navigate to SETUP > TEST.
B) Set the SQUARE MOD to 0%.
C) Set the MODE to SQUARE.
D) You may now turn the final amplifier on. Observe the RF envelope at the
common point with a DC-coupled oscilloscope and advance the SQUARE MOD
LVL control until you can easily see the shape of the square wave.
Sweep the TONE FREQ control from 125 to 1000 Hz and observe the shape
of the square wave as you do so. If you are driving more than one transmitter and/or your antenna load changes between day and night, test all
combinations that you will be using.
If the square wave is free from tilt and ringing at all frequencies in the
sweep, you do not need to set up the transmitter equalizer in steps 12
through 13.H)a) below. Otherwise, you must do so to achieve the highest
loudness and coverage that your facility can produce.
If you observe problems with some combinations of transmitter and load
but not others, record which combinations cause problems. You will only
need to set up set up the Transmitter Equalizer for these combinations.
You will dedicate one System Preset for each problematic combination so
that each combination can be equalized independently.
Figure 2-8 on page 2-29 shows what tilt looks like and Figure 2-10 on
page 2-31 shows ringing.
2-27
2-28
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Caution: To avoid damaging the transmitter, do not exceed 50% modulation
with square waves.
Important: Do not place additional clipping devices after OPTIMOD-AM! The
additional distortion introduced by these devices will totally nullify the advantages of OPTIMOD-AM's distortion-canceling clipper and will cause the out-ofband energy induced by clipping to violate FCC or ITU-R standards. In HD-AM
installations, this energy will interfere with the HD digital carriers.
12. Equalize the transmitter’s low frequency square wave response.
[Skip the Transmitter Equalizer adjustment steps [(steps 12 though 13.H)a)] if the
RF envelope square wave test you preformed in step 11 above showed no sign of
tilt, overshoot, or ringing.]
Overview of Transmitter Equalization
The Transmitter Equalizer has a low frequency section to equalize tilt and a high
frequency section to equalize overshoot and ringing. The Transmitter Equalizer
setup parameters are stored independently in the four System Presets (See page
1-15). If you are driving two transmitters, you will usually dedicate either one or
two System Presets to each transmitter. Using two system presets per transmitter
allows you to equalize that transmitter and its antenna load independently for
day and night operation. This may be desirable if the transmission parameters
(power or antenna pattern) change between day and night.
In addition to the Transmitter Equalizer controls, you must set the LOWPASS,
HIGHPASS, and POS PEAK controls in each preset you use.
If you are only driving one transmitter and the transmitter plant’s parameters do
not change between day and night, then you only need to use and adjust the
default TX1/DAY System Preset.
Description of the TX EQ Controls
LF FREQ: Determines the frequency at which the response of the Tilt
Equalizer section of the Transmitter Equalizer is up approximately +3dB.
LF GAIN: Determines the maximum amount of low frequency correction
provided by the Tilt Equalizer section of the Transmitter Equalizer.
HF DELAY: Determines the frequency at which the delay equalizer section of the Transmitter Equalizer begins to add phase shift to correct for
non-constant delay in the transmitter and antenna system.
HF GAIN: Determines the frequency at which the High Frequency Shelving Equalizer section of the Transmitter Equalizer begins to roll off the
high frequency response, compensating for overshoot in the transmitter
and antenna system.
Procedure for LF Equalization
You will set up one 9300 System Preset at a time.
A) Connect the vertical input of the oscilloscope to the transmitter’s sampling
loop (or other convenient source of RF).
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
B) Connect the sync (or external trigger) input of the oscilloscope to an available
9300 analog output.
There are two analog outputs and you will be using one at most while
adjusting any given System Preset. You may have to move the sync connection between outputs if you need to set up System Presets for two
transmitters.
C) Turn on the 9300's built-in square wave generator:
a) Navigate to SETUP > TEST.
b) Set the SQUARE MOD to 0%.
c) Set the MODE to SQUARE.
d) Set SQUARE FREQ to 125 HZ.
D) Turn on the carrier.
E) Observe the RF envelope at the common point with a DC-coupled oscilloscope
and advance the SQUARE MOD control to produce 30% modulation.
F) Navigate to SETUP > MODIFY SYS PST > TX1/DAY.
G) If necessary, press NEXT until you see the screen containing the four transmitter equalizer controls.
H) Review the RF envelope display.
Many transmitters (particularly older designs) will produce an RF envelope resembling Figure 2-8. If the oscilloscope display looks like this, continue to step (I).
If the oscilloscope display looks like Figure 2-9, low frequency equalization is unnecessary. Skip to step 13 on page 2-30.
I) Set the LF GAIN to 10.0 dB.
Setting the LF GAIN control to maximum low-frequency boost ensures response that is closest to true DC-coupling, optimizing square wave re-
Figure 2-8: Unequalized RF envelope
(showing tilt)
Figure 2-9: RF envelope requiring
no tilt equalization
2-29
2-30
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
sponse.
Depending on the transmitter, this large amount of boost at sub-audible
frequencies might cause bounce and/or distortion on heavy bass transients in music. In step 14 on page 2-32, you will be instructed to turn the
LF GAIN control down until these problems are no longer observed. This
will make the measured square wave response poorer. However, engineering realities force a compromise between best small signal (i.e.,
square wave) response and best large signal (i.e., bounce and distortion)
performance. This compromise is best made by careful experimentation
with program material to find the setting of the LF GAIN control that
gives the highest average modulation without audible distortion.
J) Adjust the LF FREQ to make the square wave as flat as possible.
Work quickly to avoid overheating the transmitter. Figure 2-9 shows the
result of a successful adjustment. If a display like that in Figure 2-9 could
not be produced by adjusting the LF FREQ control, transmitter lowfrequency response is inadequate and there is too much low-frequency
rolloff.
Because equalization occurs below the audible frequency range, a transmitter that cannot be fully equalized can cost up to 4dB average modulation even though audible frequency response measures essentially flat.
This problem cannot be corrected without modifying the transmitter. In
many cases, such modification is easy: it merely requires bypassing the
highpass filter(s) in the input stage of the transmitter. It also may require
replacing coupling capacitors with capacitors of a larger value. In other
cases, fundamental inadequacies in the input, interstage transformers (if
used), and/or modulation transformers (if used) are the cause. See the
discussion on page 1-13.
Unless the transmitter is of a relatively modern solid-state design, being
unable to equalize it fully is a good reason to replace it with an up-todate solid-state design using a switching or digital modulator. In most
cases, this purchase will pay for itself in reduced power bills and the new
transmitter will sound far better on the air.
K) Turn off the transmitter and allow it to cool down for several minutes.
13. Equalize transmitter high-frequency response.
A) Set the 9300's square wave controls to produce a 1 kHz square wave at 30%
modulation:
a) Navigate to SETUP > TEST.
b) If necessary, set the MODE to SQUARE.
c) Set SQUARE FREQ to 1000 HZ.
Note: Because the 9300 is digital, its square wave generator cannot produce any harmonics higher than 16 kHz (one-half of its 32 kHz sampling
frequency). To prevent visible ringing of the square wave due to this
sharp cutoff of its higher harmonics, we have applied an internal digital
filter to the output of the 9300's square wave generator. This filter
rounds off the edges and prevents significant ringing. You may want to
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
look directly with the scope at the unequalized output of the 9300 to get
a feel for what this waveform looks like before it is applied to your
transmitter.
B) Make sure that the oscilloscope is synchronized to the square wave.
C) Turn on the carrier. Observe the RF envelope at the common point with a DCcoupled oscilloscope and trim the SQUARE LVL control (if necessary) to produce
30% modulation.
D) Navigate to SETUP > MODIFY TX PST > TX1/DAY.
E) If necessary, press NEXT until you see the screen containing the four transmitter equalizer controls.
To avoid overheating the transmitter, perform steps (C) through (G) quickly.
Adjustment of the high frequency transmitter equalizer controls cannot be done
into a dummy load because the transmitter will overshoot and ring differently
when loaded by the reactance of your antenna system.
F) Set the HF DELAY and HF GAIN controls to OFF.
If no overshoot is observed, skip to step (H).
G) Adjust the HF FREQ and HF DELAY controls to minimize ringing and overshoot.
The HF FREQ and HF GAIN controls interact. First, adjust the HF FREQ control until any ringing is reduced to the same level as the flat part of the
square wave (you will still have ringing, but no overshoot). Then adjust
the HF DELAY control (which will further reduce the amplitude of the
ringing on the leading edge of the square wave while introducing a new
ring on the trailing edge) until the amplitudes of the ringing at the leading and trailing edges are equal. The peaks of the ringing at both edges
should approach the flattop modulation level as closely as possible without exceeding it. Note that the HF GAIN control does most of the work.
Note also that the HF DELAY control will produce little or no visible effect
until you set it beyond 40.
Adjusting the HF DELAY control like this usually reduces the level of the
Figure 2-10: Unequalized RF envelope
(showing ringing)
Figure 2-11: RF envelope showing
successful HF equalization
2-31
2-32
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
ringing to below the flattop modulation level. Reducing the setting of
the HF FREQ control until the ringing is again at the flattop modulation
level will unbalance the ringing at the leading and trailing edge of the
square wave, and necessitate further adjustment of the HF DELAY control. Alternate between these two interactive controls until the peaks of
ringing at both the leading and trailing edges of the square wave are at
the flattop modulation level. Figure 2-10 illustrates a typical waveform
before adjustment and Figure 2-11 shows the result of a successful adjustment. The waveform produced by your system may look quite different.
H) Turn off the square wave generator and turn off the carrier to allow the
transmitter to cool down for several minutes:
a) Navigate to SETUP > TEST.
b) Set the MODE to OPERATE.
14. Test the polarity and LF transmitter equalization settings under program
conditions.
A) Apply program material to OPTIMOD-AM's input at normal operating levels.
B) Recall the GEN PURPOSE MEDIUM preset:
a) Press the RECALL button.
b) Turn the control knob until you see next: GEN PURPOSE MEDIUM.
c) Press the RECALL NEXT soft key button to select the GEN PURPOSE
MEDIUM preset.
C) Turn on the carrier.
D) Navigate to SETUP > MODIFY TX PRESET > TX1/DAY.
E) Set the POS PEAK control to 125%:
F) Check modulation asymmetry with the oscilloscope or with your modulation
monitor.
If negative peaks are modulating higher than positive peaks:
a) Navigate to SETUP > I/O CALIB > OUTPUT.
b) Press the button corresponding to the active output
c) Change the setting of the POLARITY control.
d) Navigate to SETUP > MODIFY TX PRESET > TX1/DAY.
G) Set the POS PEAK control to 100%.
The 100% setting yields the cleanest sound. (See page 1-15 for an explanation.)
However, if absolute maximum loudness is desired at the expense of
cleanest possible sound, the POS PEAK control may be set as high as
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
your government regulations and transmitter performance will allow. In
the U.S., FCC Rules limit this to 125%.
Note too that the distortion of older transmitters and most receivers
tends to increase radically when negative modulation of more than 85%
is attempted. In the case of receivers, the major cause of this distortion is
cheaply designed envelope detectors with incorrectly biased diodes. Consider reducing clipping in the processing so that the last 15% or so of
modulation consists of low duty-cycle spikes that can be soft-clipped by
the receiver’s detector. This trades off about 1.5dB loudness loss for substantially cleaner sound.
If you choose to modulate asymmetrically with a transmitter that compresses peaks in the positive direction, do not attempt to modulate beyond the performance limitations of your transmitter. Doing so would
only cause distortion beyond the distortion intrinsic to asymmetrical operation.
H) Navigate to SETUP > I/O CALIB > OUTPUT.
I) Press the button corresponding to the active output.
J) Observe the oscilloscope. Adjust the output level control (AO1 100%, AO2
100%, or DO 100%) to achieve as high negative peak modulation as possible
without carrier pinch-off.
If all is well, the negative peaks of the envelope modulation will usually
hang close to 100% at all times except during pauses. If the correct adjustment of the output level control seems dependent on the nature of
the program material, the transmitter probably suffers from power supply bounce. See the next step.
To achieve highest possible modulation without carrier pinch-off (and
therefore most efficient utilization of available transmitter power), the
output level control must be adjusted with program material (not test
tones), because the transmitter will usually behave somewhat differently
with program material than with tone. For example, tone cannot excite
power supply bounce.
K) Adjust the LF GAIN control. (optional)
Some transmitters cannot be corrected fully because the bass boost produced by the equalizer exaggerates power supply bounce problems
and/or causes actual saturation or clipping of modulator stages, transformers, reactors, etc. (see page 1-13). In some cases, a compromise between full tilt correction and these other problems may have to be
achieved by careful experimentation with program material. The 9300's
LF GAIN control is designed to permit such a compromise.
The preceding transmitter equalization adjustment (using square waves)
was done using the maximum low-frequency boost to ensure response
that is closest to true DC coupling, which optimizes square wave response. If this large amount of boost at sub-audible frequencies causes
bounce and/or distortion on heavy bass transients in music, turn the LF
GAIN control counterclockwise until these problems are no longer observed. This will make the measured square wave response poorer. However, engineering realities force a compromise between best small signal
(i.e., square wave) response and best large signal (i.e., bounce and distortion) performance. This compromise is best made by careful experimenta-
2-33
2-34
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
tion with program material to find the setting of the LF GAIN control
that gives the highest average modulation without audible distortion.
If the tilt correction trips overload relays when program material is
broadcast, it is often possible to readjust the trip point of these relays to
avoid this problem but do this with the greatest care, because the transmitter will be endangered by an improperly adjusted overload relay.
Orban accepts no responsibility for transmitter failures introduced by
such re-adjustments, or by the high average power, bass and treble preemphasis, or by any other characteristics of OPTIMOD-AM audio processing.
The care and feeding of your transmitter requires the application of
sound engineering judgment: inadequate transmitters (typically of old
vacuum-tube plate-modulated design) may fail, may have their tube life
shortened, etc. Such transmitters are simply incapable of supplying the
average power demands of OPTIMOD-AM processing regardless of
transmitter equalization. If the station is to achieve the full benefits of
OPTIMOD-AM processing, these transmitters must be either repaired,
modified, or replaced.
15. If you will be using other System Presets, repeat steps 11 through 14 to
adjust them.
Substitute the name of the System Preset under adjustment for “TX1/DAY” in
these steps.
Do not forget the set the LOWPASS, HIGHPASS, and POS PEAK controls for each System Preset that you use.
16. End I/O setup.
If you are using a external AGC and you temporarily set the EXT AGC to NO in
step 1 on page 2-20, set the EXT AGC to YES.
17. Select a processing preset.
See step 16 on page 2-18.
Automation Using the 9300’s Internal Clock
1. If you have not already done so, set the system clock.
[You can also set the clock automatically via PC Remote or the Internet. See
Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Timeserver starting on page 2-47.]
A) Navigate to SETUP > NEXT > TIME DATE AND ID > SET TIME.
a) Set hours and minutes.
b) Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
c) Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time. Then press the
ENTER TIME button to set the clock.
B) Press the SET DATE button.
a) Set today’s date, using the days, month, and year buttons.
b) Press the ENTER DATE button.
C) Press the DAYLIGHT TIME button.
a) Using the Daylight Saving (DT MONTH and DT WEEK) buttons, Set the month
and week when Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) begins, or OFF.
b) Using the Standard Time (ST MONTH and ST WEEK) buttons, Set the month
and week when Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) ends.
Note that setting DT MONTH, DT WEEK, ST MONTH, or ST WEEK to OFF will
defeat Daylight Time functionality.
c) Press the ESCAPE key to back out of the daylight saving screen.
D) (Optional) Press the STATION ID button to specify your station’s identifier (call
sign or call letters).
a) Use the knob to select characters. Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move
the cursor.
b) When you are finished, press SAVE.
2. Navigate to Setup > Next > Automation.
If the AUTOMATION button reads DISABLED, hold it down and turn the knob to enable automation.
This button allows you to easily enable or disable all automation events
without having to edit individual automation events.
3. To add an automation event:
A) Push the ADD EVENT button.
B) Choose whether you wish to program an event that occurs only once or an
event that follows a daily or weekly schedule.
C) For events that occur only once:
a) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor over the word “DAILY:”
and turn the knob so that is reads “DATE:” instead.
b) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor to the day, month, and
year when the automation event will occur. Set the desired values with the
knob.
c) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour, minute,
and second (in 24-hour format) when the automation event is to occur. Set
the desired values with the knob.
D) For events that occur on a daily or weekly schedule:
2-35
2-36
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
a) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor the each day of the
week in turn, and use the rotary encoder to turn the day on or off.
You can program the event to occur on as many days of the week as you
wish.
b) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour, minute,
and second (in 24-hour format — e.g., 18:00:00 for 6:00 PM) when the
automation event is to occur. Set the desired values with the knob.
Automation events have a “start” time but no “stop” time. The 9300 will
indefinitely remain in the state specified by an existing automation event
until its state is changed by another automation event or by another action (such as a user’s interacting with the front panel or PC Remote software).
E) For all events:
a) Press the SELECT EVENT button.
b) Turn the knob to set the desired event. The available events are:

No function

Recall factory preset

Recall user preset

Recall System TX preset

Mono-from left-channel (MONO-L) mode

Mono-from right-channel (MONO-R) mode

Mono-from-sum-of-channels (MONO-SUM)

Bypass mode (Bypasses the processing except for highpass filtering
and transmitter equalization, applying the signal at the 9300’s active
input to all outputs with a gain set by the SETUP > TEST > BYPASS GAIN
control. To protect the transmitter, applies a clipper set to 105%
negative modulation and the positive modulation set in the active
System Preset.)

Exit test (restores the operating preset that was on-air before a test
mode was invoked)
F) When you have finished programmed an event, press the SAVE EVENT button.
You will return to the automation menu.
4. To edit an existing event:
A) Press the VIEW > EDIT EVENT button.
B) Turn the knob until you see the event you wish to edit.
C) Press the EDIT EVENT button.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
D) Edit the event as desired. Use the same technique as adding an event.
See step 3 on page 2-35.
E) Press the SAVE EVENT button to store your edits.
5. To delete an event:
A) Press the DELETE EVENT button.
B) Choose the event to delete with the knob.
You can search by date or by event (i.e., recalling a given preset). Use the
NEXT button to navigate from one type of search to the other type.
C) When you have located the event you want to remove, press the DELETE
EVENT button.
This action will immediately delete the event. There is no “are you sure”
warning message. To abort the deletion, press the ESC button, not the
DELETE EVENT button.
Security and Passcode Programming
[Skip this step if you do not plan to use PC Remote software or do not plan to lock
out the front panel locally.]
The 9300 has several levels of security to prevent unauthorized people from changing its programming or operating state. Security controls access to the front panel
and to anyone connecting to the 9300 through a direct serial connection, dial-up
networking (through modems), or its Ethernet port.
The security levels are:
1. All Access (i.e., administrator level)
2. All Access except SECURITY
3. All screens except MODIFY and SECURITY
4. RECALL PRESETS, MODIFY, and AUTOMATION
5. RECALL PRESETS and AUTOMATION
6. RECALL PRESETS
There is no default passcode. The Optimod’s front panel cannot be locked out unless
the Optimod has been assigned at least one All Access passcode.
Your Optimod secures User Presets by encrypting them (using the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with the session passcode as its key) when PC Remote
fetches them. Hence, a packet sniffer cannot intercept User Presets in plaintext form.
PC Remote then writes the fetched User Presets in encrypted form on your hard
drive, where they remain for the duration of your PC Remote session.
2-37
2-38
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
If PC Remote exits normally, it will erase these temporary User Preset files
from your computer’s hard disk. If it does not exit normally, these files
will remain in encrypted form. However, the next time that PC Remote
starts up, it will automatically clean up any orphaned files.
To Create a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP > SECURITY > ADD PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with All Access privileges.
B) Use the four soft buttons, labeled“1,” “2,” “3,” and “4,” to create a passcode.
Passcodes can be up to eight characters long but can only contain the
characters “1,” “2,” “3,” and “4.” This limitation makes it easy to enter a
passcode using the four available soft buttons.
C) When you have finished entering your new passcode, write it down so you do
not forget it. Then press the NEXT button.
If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered, press the ESC button
instead. Then return to step (B).
D) The PERMISSIONS screen appears. Turn the knob to choose the permission level
for the passcode you just created.
If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered, press the PREV button to return to the Enter Passcode screen or ESC to return to the Security screen.
E) Press the NEXT button to save your new passcode.
To Edit a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP > SECURITY > VIEW-EDIT PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges.
B) Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to edit.
C) Press the NEXT button. The Permissions screen appears.
D) Turn the knob to set the desired permission level for the passcode you are editing.
E) Press the NEXT button to confirm your choice.
Your new permission level is stored and the Security menu appears.
To Delete a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP > SECURITY > DELETE PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with All Access privileges.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
B) Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to delete.
C) Press the NEXT button. The Confirm Delete screen appears.
D) Press the YES soft button to delete the passcode. Press the NO or ESCAPE
buttons to abort deleting the passcode.
To Lock the Front Panel Immediately:
After you have adjusted the processor, to maximize security you will often want
to lock it immediately without waiting for the timeout. To do so:
A) Press the SETUP button.
B) If the LOCK NOW soft button is not visible, press the NEXT button until you see
it.
C) Press the LOCK NOW soft button.
To Program local lockout:
A) Navigate to SETUP > SECURITY.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges.
B) Hold down the AUTOLOCK soft button and turn the knob to set the desired
lockout time (if any).
You can program the lockout delay time (in hours:minutes) from 1 minute to 8 hours, or OFF. This is the time delay between the last access to a
local front panel control and when the front panel automatically locks itself out, requiring entering a passcode to obtain front panel control of
the 9300.
Autolock can only be turned on if at least one passcode exists with ALL
ACCESS privileges because an ALL ACCESS passcode is required to fully
unlock the panel or to turn off the Autolock function.
C) Press the ESCAPE button to leave the Security menu.
To Unlock the Front Panel:
A) On the 9300 front panel, operate any button or the knob.
The ENTER PASSCODE screen will appear.
B) Enter a passcode using the four soft buttons.
The 9300 functionality that you can access depends on the security level
of the passcode that you entered.
After you have finished working, the panel will automatically re-lock after the time delay you set in SETUP > SECURITY > AUTOLOCK. (You can set a
new delay at any time if you have an ALL ACCESS passcode.)
2-39
2-40
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Dial-up Networking and the Passcode
When you make a Windows Dial-up Networking connection, Windows will ask you
for your passcode. To allow the connection to occur, enter any passcode that you set
at the 9300’s front panel. Once your PC is connected to the 9300, you will be able to
access the 9300 functionality corresponding to the security level of your passcode.
If you have not set a passcode, leave the Windows dialog box blank.
If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode
You can reset factory defaults and wipe out security passcodes (in case you forgot
your ALL ACCESS passcode).
A) Remove power from the 9300.
B) While pressing both the ESCAPE and SETUP buttons, restore power.
The Restore Defaults screen appears.
C) To gain access to the 9300, press the ERASE ALL PASSCODES soft button.
D) Reprogram passcodes as necessary; see To Create a Passcode on page 2-38.
The RESTORE DEFAULTS button (in the Restore Defaults screen) restores
all System Setup and Input/Output parameters to their factory default
settings. It also erases all passcodes. You should never need to use this
button in an existing installation, although it is a convenient way to
make the 9300 “factory fresh” if it is being installed in a different facility.
The RESTORE DEFAULTS button takes you to a screen that allows you to
keep or erase any user presets that exist in your unit.
Remote Control Interface Programming
[Skip this step if you do not wish to program the GPI (contact closure) remote control interface.]
1. Navigate to SETUP > NEXT > NETWORK & REMOTE > REMOTE INTERFACE.
2. Program one or more remote control interfaces.
A) Navigate to the desired Remote Contact button (1 through 8) by repeatedly
pressing the NEXT button.
B) Hold down the button while turning the knob to select the desired function
for the interface.
Use either button below the appropriate graphics; both work the same.
A momentary pulse of voltage will switch most functions, except as
noted.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION

Preset Name: switches the named preset on the air. The control interface
can recall any factory or user preset.

Input: Analog: selects the analog inputs.

Input: Digital: selects the digital input and but does not apply deemphasis to it.

Input: Digital+J.17: selects the digital input and applies J.17 deemphasis
to it.

Bypass: switches the Bypass Test Mode on the air.

Tone: switches the Tone Test Mode preset on the air.

Exit Test: If a test preset is presently on the air, EXIT TEST reverts to the
previous processing preset.

AM Mono from Left, Mono from Right, or Mono from Sum: Applies
the left channel, right channel, or sum (L+R) of the input audio channels
to the processing chain, which is monophonic.

Reset Clock To Hour: resets the internal clock to the nearest hour. For
example, 3:03:10 would be reset to 3:00:00, while 3:53:40 would be reset
to 4:00:00. Use this function to periodically re-sync the 9300’s internal
clock to your station’s master clock.

Reset Clock to Midnight: Resets the clock to 0:00:00. You can use this
function to periodically re-sync the 9300’s internal clock to your station’s
master clock.

Pass User Bits: Passes User Bits (as defined in the AES3 standard) from
the AES digital input through to the AES digital output.

Block User Bits

TX1/DAY: Recalls the TX1/DAY transmission preset.

TX1/Night

TX2/Day

TX2/Night

No Function: remote input is disabled.
3. End remote control interface programming.
When you are finished programming the remote control interface, press the Escape button to return to higher menu levels.
2-41
2-42
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Networking and Remote Control
[Skip this step if you do not wish to connect to your 9300 remotely, either for
downloading software upgrades or for PC Remote Control.]
The 9300 has a built-in Ethernet connector that can be used with 10 Mbps or 100
Mbps networks using the TCP/IP protocol. You can also connect a PC to the 9300
through the 9300’s RS-232 serial port, either by modem or directly through a null
modem cable.
1. Prepare the 9300 for an Ethernet network connection:
[Skip this step if you will not be using an Ethernet connection.]

See your network administrator to get the data required in the following
procedure.

Note that if you wish to do this from the 9300 PC Remote software, you
must first be able to connect to the 9300. Therefore, you will usually perform
this procedure from the 9300’s front panel to prepare it for connection.
A) Navigate to SETUP > NETWORK & REMOTE > NEXT.
B) Press the SET IP ADDRESS soft button.
The IP Address Screen appears.
a) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until
you have selected all the numbers in the IP address assigned by your
network administrator
b) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
C) Set the Subnet Mask assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the SET SUBNET MASK soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
subnet mask. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat
until you have selected all the numbers in the subnet mask assigned by
your network administrator
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
D) Set the Gateway Address assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the GATEWAY ADDRESS soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
gateway address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat
until you have selected all the numbers in the gateway address assigned by
your network administrator
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
E) Set the IP Port assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the IP PORT soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP port. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the IP port assigned by your network
administrator
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
F) Connect your Ethernet network to the RJ45 jack on the rear panel of your
9300.

If you are connecting to a hub or router, use a standard Ethernet cable.

If you are connecting directly to the Ethernet jack on a computer, use a
“crossover” or “reverse” Ethernet cable.
G) Press the NEXT button.
2. Prepare the 9300 for modem connection through the serial port:
[Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection.]
A) Navigate to SETUP > NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
MODEM on the display.
C) Press the MODEM INIT soft button.
D) If the string that appears in the display is S0=4, this is correct. Press the
ESCAPE button and skip steps (E) and (F) below.
S0=4 is the 9300 default setting. This activates auto-answer functionality
in the modem.
E) Set the InIT STRING to S0=4. Use the NEXT and PREV KEYs to move the cursor in
turn to each character in the modem initialization string. Use the knob to set
the character to the desired value. Repeat until you have set all the characters
in the initialization string.
F) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
3. Modem setup:
You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for your
PC and your 9300. Orban Customer Service supports only the 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT on the 9300 side of your connection, although other
56kbps modems will usually work OK.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.
A) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection
icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
2-43
2-44
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
B) Connect the modem to the 9300’s serial port with a standard (not null) modem cable.
C) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dipswitches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All other
dipswitches should be set to the up position.
4. Prepare the 9300 for direct serial connection through the serial port:
[Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection.]
A) Navigate to SETUP > NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
DIRECT on the display.
You are now ready to connect your computer to your 9300 through a null
modem cable connected to your computer’s serial port. Refer to Installing
9300 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-44.
Installing 9300 PC Remote Control Software
This section briefly summarizes the procedure for installing 9300 PC Remote software on existing 9300s. If required, you will find more detailed instructions in the
.pdf file automatically installed on your computer by Orban’s installer program,
Setup9300_x.x.x.x.exe, where “x.x.x.x” represents the software version you are
installing. (For example, for version 1.0 software, this would be 1.0.0.0.)
The PC Remote software is supplied on a CD shipped with your 9300. You can also
download it from ftp.orban.com/9300.
Instructions for using the PC Remote software are found in Section 3 of this manual.
Installing the Necessary Windows Services
The 9300 PC Remote application uses Windows’ built-in communications and networking services to deal with the low-level details necessary to communicate with
the 9300’s serial port. (These services are also used to upgrade your 9300’s firmware
when updates are available from Orban.) The exact process will vary, depending on
how you wish to set up the communications. That is:

If you want to communicate through a local PC without using an Ethernet network, you have two choices:
 Establish a connection between a serial (COM) port of the PC and the COM
port of your 9300 through a null modem cable and use Windows Direct Se-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
rial Connect to make the basic connection.
 Use a crossover Ethernet cable to communicate directly to your PC through
its Ethernet port.
In this case, you must set your computer’s Windows networking to provide a static IP address for your computer because your Optimod does
not contain a DHCP server.

If you want to communicate through a pair of modems, use the Windows DialUp networking service to make the connection.
You must install the appropriate communications services in Windows (if they
are not already installed) before you can run 9300 Remote software. You may
therefore need to have access to the Windows install disk(s) — or have their image copied onto your computer’s hard drive — before you attempt to use the
9300 PC Remote application.
Regardless of whether your PC communicates to the 9300 through its serial port or Ethernet connector, it uses the ppp and the TCP/IP protocols
to communicate with the 9300.
Check Hardware Requirements
To connect your PC to your 9300, regardless of the method you choose, you will
need the following:

Orban 9300 OPTIMOD-AM.

If connecting by serial cable: a null modem cable (also called a “reverse” cable).
This cable has DB9 female connectors at both ends for connecting the 9300 to
the serial port on your computer. If your computer has a DB25 connector, you
will need to obtain an adapter.

If connecting by modem: a 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT and
normal (not null) modem cable for the 9300 side of the connection. Note that
Orban Customer Service does not support any other type of modem for connecting to the 9300.

If connecting by network: a standard Ethernet cable (with RJ45 connectors) to
connect to a network hub or router, or a crossover Ethernet cable to connect directly to your PC’s Ethernet jack.

PC running Windows 2000 (SP3 or higher) or XP.
9300 PC Remote will not run on older Windows versions.
Recommended Components
Computer.................................................................... Pentium II or higher
Available Disk Space .......................................................................... 25MB
RAM .................................................................................................. 256MB
2-45
2-46
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Display................................................................................. SVGA or higher
Microsoft Windows................. 2000 SP3 (or higher) or XP (Home or Pro)
COM Port .......................................................16550 (or compatible) UART
WARNING!
When connecting your 9300, use shielded cable to protect the pins in the RS-232
connector from electrostatic discharge.
The following subsections provide steps for connecting to your 9300 OPTIMOD-AM
software using the Windows 2000/XP Direct Cable Connect or via modem connection.
Running the Orban Installer Program
Insert the installer CD into your computer’s CD drive.
The installer should start up and ask you if you wish to install the PC Remote application on your computer. If it fails to do so, navigate to Start \ Run on your computer, and type X:setup (where “X” is the drive letter of your CD drive).
Follow the prompts on your screen to install the PC Remote software automatically
on your computer.

You might have obtained the automatic installer application from some other
source than Orban’s CD, like Orban’s ftp site or another computer on your network. If so, just run the application and follow the on-screen instructions.

This program installs the necessary files and adds an Orban / Optimod 9300
folder to your computer’s Start Menu. This folder contains shortcuts to the PC
Remote application and to the documentation. If you accepted the option during installation, there is also a shortcut to the PC Remote application on your
desktop.
You have now installed all files necessary to use the PC Remote software. If you are
using a direct serial or a modem connection, the next step is to install and configure
the Windows communications services that allow your computer to communicate
with your 9300. Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications on page 2-51 provides
details.
Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections
If you are using an Ethernet connection and your computer can successfully connect
to the Internet through its Ethernet port, it already has the correct (TCP/IP) networking set up to communicate with the 9300. In most cases, all you need is your 9300’s
IP address, Port, and Gateway number, as set in step 1 on page 2-42. You will enter
these when you create a “connection” to your 9300 from the 9300 PC Remote application — see step (E) on page 3-38. If your computer does not have a working
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
Ethernet port, you will need to add one and then following the instructions provided by Microsoft to set it up to enable TCP/IP networking.
If you are using a crossover Ethernet cable to connect your Optimod directly to your
computer, you must set your computer’s Windows networking to provide a static IP
address for your computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server.
If you wish to connect to your 9300 through your LAN or VPN (through a WAN or
the Internet), consult your network administrator. Note that to cross subnets, you
must specify a gateway. If the PC and 9300 are on the same subnet, then it is unnecessary to specify a gateway.
If you are behind a firewall, you must open the port you specified in step (1.E) on
page 2-43. If the gateway, port, and firewall (if used) are configured correctly, it is
possible to connect 9300 PC Remote to a 9300 via a VPN.
Conclusion
By carefully following the instructions in the Appendix, you should have successfully
installed the necessary Windows services and connected to your 9300. However, if
you experience any problems with this process, or have any other 9300 questions,
please contact Orban Customer Service. Contact information is found at
http://www.orban.com/contact/
For details on your new 9300 software, from new features to operational suggestions, refer to our FTP site (ftp.orban.com/9300).
Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Timeserver
[Skip this section if you do not wish to automatically synchronize your Optimod’s internal clock to a network timeserver, which may be part of your local network or located on the Internet.]
1. Navigate to SETUP > NEXT > TIME DATE AND ID > NEXT > TIME SYNC.
A) Use the PROTOCOL control to choose either TIME PROT or SNTP.
 Select TIME PROT if the Optimod is behind a firewall that does not pass UPD
packets. TIME PROT selects the Time Protocol as described in the standard
RFC868. This method uses TCP on port 37.
 Select SNTP if your network timeserver supports the Simple Network Time
Protocol as described in standard RFC1769. This method uses UDP on port
123.
2-47
2-48
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Ask your network administrator which protocols are available. SNTP is
slightly more accurate.
B) Using SYNC PERIOD, choose how often your Optimod will automatically update
its internal clock to the timeserver you selected.
The choices are OFF, 8 HOURS, and 24 HOURS.
If the connection to the timeserver fails (due to network overload or
other problems), your Optimod will try once per hour to synchronize until it is successful.
C) Set the OFFSET to the difference (in hours) between your time zone and Universal Time (UTC).
UTC is also known as GMT, or Greenwich Mean Time.
 The value can range between –12 and +12 hours. If this value is set to 0,
your Optimod’s time will be the same as UTC.
 You can empirically adjust this value until the correct time for your location
is displayed after you synchronize your Optimod to a timeserver.
2. Choose a timeserver.
http://www.boulder.nist.gov/timefreq/service/time-servers.html provides a current list of timeservers available on the Internet. You network may also have a
local timeserver; ask your network administrator.
3. Press the NEXT button to set up timeserver parameters.
The TIME SERVER button is located on the second page of the TIME SYNC functions. (You can access this function from anywhere in the Optimod menu tree by
navigating to SETUP > NEXT > TIME DATE AND ID > NEXT > TIME SYNC > NEXT >
TIMESERVER.)
Name
time-a.nist.gov
time-b.nist.gov
time-a.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov
time-b.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov
time-c.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov
utcnist.colorado.edu
time.nist.gov
time-nw.nist.gov
nist1.symmetricom.com
nist1-dc.glassey.com
nist1-ny.glassey.com
nist1-sj.glassey.com
nist1.aol-ca.truetime.com
IP Address
129.6.15.28
129.6.15.29
132.163.4.101
132.163.4.102
132.163.4.103
128.138.140.44
192.43.244.18
131.107.1.10
69.25.96.13
216.200.93.8
208.184.49.9
207.126.98.204
207.200.81.113
nist1.aol-va.truetime.com
nist1.columbiacountyga.gov
205.188.185.33
68.216.79.113
Location
NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
NIST, Boulder, Colorado
NIST, Boulder, Colorado
NIST, Boulder, Colorado
University of Colorado, Boulder
NCAR, Boulder, Colorado
Microsoft, Redmond, Washington
Symmetricom, San Jose, California
Abovenet, Virginia
Abovenet, New York City
Abovenet, San Jose, California
TrueTime, AOL facility, Sunnyvale, California
TrueTime, AOL facility, Virginia
Columbia County, Georgia
Table 2-1: NIST-referenced timeservers (2006)
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
You can specify the timeserver either from your Optimod’s front panel or from
its PC Remote software. From the front panel, you can only enter the timeserver’s IP address (for example, 192.43.244.18). If you specify the timeserver
from PC Remote, you can specify either its named address (for example,
time.nist.gov) or its IP address.
4. Specify the time sync parameters from your Optimod’s front panel:
[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Windows XP computer.]
A) Press the TIME SERVER button.
The timeserver IP Address Screen appears.
a) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until
you have selected all the numbers in the desired IP address.
b) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
B) Press the SYNC NOW soft button to test your settings. Your Optimod’s display
should indicate that it is connecting to the IP address that you specified. When
the connection is successful, the Optimod’s clock will automatically synchronize to the timeserver.
 If the connection is not successful within five seconds, the display will indicate that the connection failed. This means either that the timeserver is too
busy or that your setup cannot connect to the timeserver. Double-check the
IP address. If you are behind a firewall, make sure that port 123 is open.
 If your connection failed, the gateway address might not be set correctly
on your Optimod. The gateway address for the timeserver connection is the
same gateway address that you set in step (1.D) on page 2-42. If you do not
know the correct gateway address, you can often discover it by connecting
a Windows computer to the same Ethernet cable that is ordinarily plugged
into your Optimod. Ascertain that the computer can connect to the Internet. At the command prompt, type ipconfig. The computer will return
the “Default Gateway.”
5. Specify the time sync from the Optimod PC Remote software:
[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Optimod’s front panel.]
Optimod PC Remote software can automatically set your Optimod’s local time,
OFFSET, and TIME SERVER to reflect the Windows settings in the machine running
PC Remote software.
If you are running Windows 2000, you cannot specify the timeserver from
your computer. However, you can still set your Optimod’s clock and offset.
A) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL > DATE AND TIME > TIME ZONE tab.
2-49
2-50
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
B) Set time zone to correspond to your local time zone.
C) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL > DATE
tab.
AND
TIME > INTERNET TIME
D) If you are running Windows XP:
a) Check “Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” to set your
Optimod’s SYNC PERIOD to “24.”
b) Set “Server” to the desired timeserver.
c) Click the “Update Now” button to synchronize your computer’s clock to
the selected timeserver. If this is successful, this means that you can connect
to the selected timeserver over your network.
 The INTERNET TIME tab is not available in Windows 2000. If you are running
Optimod PC Remote on Windows 2000, you must enter the timeserver from
your Optimod’s front panel as an IP address (step 4 on page 2-49).
 If the timeserver you selected in Windows is a named address (not a numerical IP address), the 9300 will resolve it correctly but the IP address that
appears in your Optimod’s display will be 0.0.0.0.
 To use PC Remote to turn off your Optimod’s automatic synchronization,
uncheck “Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” on your
PC. Then click the “Update Now” button on PC Remote.
E) Navigate to Optimod PC Remote’s I/O SETUP > UTILITY tab and click the SET
9300 CLOCK button.
 If you are running Windows XP, PC Remote will download your computer’s
currently specified timeserver into your Optimod.
 PC Remote will adjust your Optimod’s OFFSET setting to correspond to your
computer’s time zone setting.
 PC Remote will synchronize your Optimod’s clock with your computer’s
clock.
F) It is wise to disconnect from PC Remote and then to press the SYNC NOW button on your Optimod [step (4.B) on page 2-49]. This is to test the ability of
your Optimod to synchronize to the selected timeserver and to ensure that
your Optimod’s clock is set accurately.
NOTE: Manually setting your Optimod’s clock via Set Time, Set Date, Daylight
Time, and the remote contact closure Reset to Hour and Reset to Midnight will
not work when the automatic synchronization function is active. To inactivate
this function (thereby permitting manual setting to work), set the SYNC PERIOD to
OFF.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications
This appendix provides instructions for setting up both direct serial and modem
connections from your 9300 to your PC. You must do this when you define a new
connection from the 9300 PC Remote application. The appendix provides procedures
for both the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems. (Note that the
screen shots were prepared for Orban’s Optimod-FM 8300 and refer to that product.
They are directly applicable to the 9300 as well.)
Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable
1. Configure your 9300.
A) On your 9300’s front panel, navigate to SETUP > NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
DIRECT on the display.
2. Connect the cable.
A) Connect one end of a null modem cable to the DB9 serial connector on the
9300’s rear panel.
Be sure to use a null modem cable. A normal serial cable will not work.
B) Connect the other end of the cable to your computer’s COM port.
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:
Ordinarily, a direct serial connection through a null modem cable is used only when
you are controlling one 9300 per available COM port on your computer. If you wish
to control multiple local 9300s, it is better to use an Ethernet network connection.
However, in principle you could control multiple 9300s serially from one COM port,
using a hardware serial switch to select the 9300 you wish to control. In this case,
you should set up a separate 9300 “connection” for each 9300 to be controlled, following the instructions below. All connections should reference the same COM port.
This connection is used both for upgrading your 9300 and for connecting the 9300
PC Remote application to your 9300.
Important: The Direct Serial Connection must have exclusive access to the PC COM
port that connects to your 9300. Make sure than any software that monitors this
COM port (such as HotSync manager, etc) is disabled before running Direct Serial
Connection.
If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-56.
If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection, you
will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in Windows. Please see You
2-51
2-52
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection of the 9300
on page 5-7.
1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows 2000:
A) Create a New Windows
2000 Direct Connection:
a) Launch
Remote.
9300
PC
b) Choose “Connect > New
9300”
c) Give your 9300 a name
(e.g., “KABC”) by entering this name in the
“9300 Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have
9300
PC
Remote
remember
the
password
for
this
Optimod, enter the
pass-word
in
the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click “Add.”
g) Select “Connect Directly
to another computer.”
h) Click “Next.”
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
i) In the drop-down box, select the serial
port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”
k) Select either “For all users” or “Only
for myself.”
The correct setting depends on
how your network and security
are configured.
Your wizard may not display this
field if your computer is set up
for a single user only.
l) Click “Next.”
m)Enter a name for your Connection such
as: “Connection to 9300.”
n) Click “Finish.”
INSTALLATION
2-53
2-54
INSTALLATION
o) Click “Yes.”
B) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
b) Click the “General”
tab.
c) Select the device you
set up in step (i) on
page 2-53. This will
usually
be
“Communications
cable between two
computers (COM1).”
d) Click “Configure.”
ORBAN MODEL 9300
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
e) Set “Maximum
“115200.”
INSTALLATION
speed
(bps)”
to
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Make sure that all other boxes are
not checked.
h) Click “OK.”
i) Select the Networking tab.
j) Make sure that “PPP: Windows 95 /
98 / NT 4 / 2000, Internet” appears in
the “Type of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
k) Make sure that “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and Printer
Sharing for Microsoft Networks”
and “Client for Microsoft Networks” checked if you like.
l) Click “OK.”
m)When
the “Connection properties”
window appears, click “OK.”
2-55
2-56
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
2. Launch an existing Windows 2000 Direct connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 9300 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-38), choosing this
connection from 9300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connection to your 9300.
You can connect by selecting
the desired connection from
the drop-down list in the
CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying
your connection if the connection is successful.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting
Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect on page 5-8. If you have
trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions
above, try restarting your computer to clear its serial port.
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-52).
Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection
If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-60.
If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection, you will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in
Windows. Please see You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection of the 9300 on page 5-7.
1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows XP:
A) Create a New Windows XP Direct Connection:
a) Launch 9300 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect > New 9300”
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
c) Give your 9300 a name (e.g., “KABC”)
by entering this name in the “9300
Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 9300 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.
g) Choose “Connect directly to another
computer.”
h) Click “Next.”
i) In the drop-down box, select the serial
port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”
INSTALLATION
2-57
2-58
INSTALLATION
k) Type in a name for your
Connection
such
as:
“Connection to 9300.”
l) Click “Finish.”
m)Click “Yes.”
B) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
ORBAN MODEL 9300
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) Select the device you set up in step (i)
on page 2-57. This will usually be
“Communications cable between two
computers (COM1).”
d) Click “Configure.”
e) Set the “Maximum Speed (bps)” to
115200.
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Make sure all other hardware features
are unchecked.
h) Click “OK.”
INSTALLATION
2-59
2-60
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
i) Select the Networking tab.
j) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4 /
2000, Internet” appears in
the “Type of dial-up server I
am calling” field.
k) Make sure that “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and
Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” and
“Client for Microsoft
Networks” checked if
you like
l) Click “OK.”
m)When
the
“Connection
properties”
window
appears, click “OK.”
2. Launch an existing Windows XP Direct connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 9300 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-38), choosing this
connection from 9300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connection to your 9300.
You can connect by selecting the
desired connection from the dropdown list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by doubleclicking the connection in the
“Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear on the
bottom right hand corner of the
screen verifying your connection if
the connection is successful.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP
Direct Connect on page 5-10. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-52).
Preparing for Communication through Modems
1. Prepare your 9300 for a modem connection through the serial port.
See step 2 on page 2-43.
2. If you have not already done so, create a 9300 passcode.
See To Create a Passcode on page 2-38.
3. Modem setup:
You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for your PC
and your 9300.
Reminder: Orban supports only the 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax
modem EXT on the 9300 side (although other 56kbps modems will often
work OK).
Connect the modem to the 9300’s serial port with a standard (not null) modem cable.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.
A) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection
icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
B) Connect the modem cable from the modem to the serial port of the 9300.
C) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dipswitches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All
other dipswitches should be set to the up position.
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection
This connection is used both for upgrading your 9300 and for connecting the 9300
PC Remote application to your 9300.
1. Add and configure modem for Windows 2000:
If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection on page 2-67.
A) Install Windows 2000 modem:
2-61
2-62
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
b) On your PC, click “Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you will
need to Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
B) Create a New Windows 2000 Dial-Up Connection:
a) Click “Start > Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections > Make New
Connection.”
b) Once the New Connection Wizard has opened, Click “Next.”
C) Create a New Windows 2000 Direct
Connection:
a) Launch 9300 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect > New 9300”
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
c) Give your 9300 a name (e.g., “KABC”)
by entering this name in the “9300
Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 9300 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.
g) Select “Dial-up to private network.”
h) Click “Next.”
i) Enter the phone number of the modem connected to the 9300 that you
are setting up.
j) Click the “Next” button.
INSTALLATION
2-63
2-64
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
k) Select either “For all
users” or “Only for
myself.”
The correct setting
depends on how your
network and security
are configured.
This screen may not
appear in computers
set up for single users.
l) Click the “Next” button.
m)Type in a name for your
Connection such as: “Connection to 9300–Modem.”
n) Click the “Finish” button.
o) Click “Yes.”
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
D) Edit your new Direct Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) In the “Connect using” field, select
the modem you will be using to make
the connection on the PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”
INSTALLATION
2-65
2-66
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
e) Set “Maximum speed
(bps)” to “115200.”
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Check “Enable modem error control.”
h) Check “Enable mcdem compression.”
i) Make sure that all
other boxes are not
checked.
j) Click “OK.”
k) Select the Networking
tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT
4 / 2000, Internet”
appears in the “Type
of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
m)Make
sure
that
“Internet
Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave
“Client for Microsoft Neworks”
checked if you
like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connection properties” window appears, click
“OK.”
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
2. Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 9300
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-38), choosing
this connection from 9300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 9300.
You can connect by selecting the desired connection from
the drop-down list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying
your connection.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting
Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect on page 5-9. If you
have trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to clear its serial port.
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-63).
Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection
1. Add and configure modem for Windows XP:
Skip this step if your modem is already configured and working.
A) Configure the Windows XP PC ports:
Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC.
b) Make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
c) Click “Start > Control Panel > Systems.”
d) Go to the “Hardware” tab and click “Device Manager.”
e) In the Device Manager dialog box click the “+” next to the “Ports (COM
and LPT)” icon.
A list will branch off, showing your available ports.
f) Double-click “Communications Port (COM1) or (COM2),” depending on
how you set up your system.
The “Communications Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box opens.
2-67
2-68
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Not all PCs have a COM2.
IMPORTANT: The COM port you choose at this point must match the
COM port to which you connected your modem.
g) From the tabs at the top, choose “Port Settings” and configure the settings
to match your PC modem.
If you are using a U.S. Robotics® external modem, the settings will be:
Bits per second= 115200, Data bits = 8, Parity = None, Stop bits = 1, Flow
Control = None.
h) When you are finished, click the OK button to close the “Communications
Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box.
i) Click the OK button in the “Systems Properties” dialog window.
j) Close the “Control Panel” window.
If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch an existing Windows XP modem
connection on page 2-72.
B) Install the Windows XP modem:
a) Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port
on your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone
line.
b) On your PC, click “Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you will
need to Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
C) Create a new Windows XP modem connection:
a) Launch 9300 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect > New 9300.”
The Connection Properties window opens.
c) Give your 9300 a name (e.g., “KABC”) by
entering this name in the “9300 Alias”
field.
d) If you wish to have 9300 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
You must enter a valid password
to connect. This means that at
least one 9300 passcode must have
been assigned via the 9300’s front
panel. (See To Create a Passcode
on page 2-38.)
e) Click “Add.”
The Windows New Connection
Wizard starts up.
f) Select “Serial Connection.”
g) Click the “Add” button.
h) Select “Dial-up to private network.”
i) Click “Next.”
INSTALLATION
2-69
2-70
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
j) Enter
the
phone
number of the modem
connected to the 9300
you are setting up.
k) Click “Next.”
l) Type in a name for
your Connection such
as: “Connection to
9300 – Modem”
m)Click
the
button.
n) Click “Yes.”
“Finish”
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
D) Edit your new Direct Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) Select the modem you will be using to
make the connection on the PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”
INSTALLATION
2-71
2-72
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
e) Set “Maximum speed
(bps)” to “115200.”
f) Check “Enable hardware
flow control.”
g) Check “Enable modem
error control.”
h) Check “Enable mcdem
compression.”
i) Make sure that no other
box is checked.
j) Click “OK.”
k) Select the Networking
tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 /
2000,
Internet”
ap–
pears in the “Type of
dial-up server I am
calling” field.
m)Make sure that “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is
checked.
You may leave “Client for Microsoft
Networks” checked
if you like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connection
properties” window appears, click “OK.”
2. Launch an existing Windows XP modem connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 9300
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-38), choosing
this connection from 9300 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 9300.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
You can connect by selecting the desired connection from
the drop-down list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying
your connection.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP
Modem Connect on page 5-11. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-63).
Updating your 9300’s Software
The software version number of PC Remote must be the same as the version number
of the software running within your 9300. If the software version of PC Remote is
higher than the version running in your 9300, PC Remote will automatically detect
this and will offer to update your 9300’s software automatically.
1. If you have not already done so, prepare your computer and the 9300
for a direct serial, modem, or Ethernet connection.
See Networking and Remote Control starting on page 2-42.
2. Install the latest version of 9300 PC Remote software on your computer.
This is available from
ftp://orban.com/9300
See Installing 9300 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-44.
See the readme9300_x.x.x.x.htm file (where x.x.x.x is the version number) for details about the upgrade not given in this manual. The PC Remote installer will install this file on your computer’s hard drive.
3. If you have not previously done so, start 9300 PC Remote and set up a
“connection” to the 9300 you will be updating.
See To set up a new connection on page 3-38.
2-73
2-74
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
4. Update your 9300.
A) Attempt to initiate communication to your 9300 via your connection.
See To initiate communication on page 3-39.
9300 PC Remote will automatically detect that the 9300 software version
on your 9300 is not the same as the version of 9300 PC Remote. PC Remote will then offer to update your 9300 automatically.
This procedure will only work for a connection using an “all-screens”
(administrator) passcode.
B) Choose YES and wait for the update to complete. Note that this will cause an
interruption in the audio of approximately 3 seconds when your 9300 automatically reboots after the update is complete. If you cannot tolerate such an
interruption, choose NO or CANCEL to abort the update.
Please be patient; this will take several minutes. (The exact time will depend on whether the 9300 has to do any “housekeeping” to its flash
memory as part of the update.)
Completion will be indicated by the updater’s command-line window’s
closing automatically and your 9300’s rebooting.
Your 9300 will continue to pass audio normally while the update is occurring. However, the audio will be interrupted for approximately 3 seconds
when your 9300 reboots.
Do not interrupt power to your 9300 or your computer, close PC Remote
or the update application’s command-line window, or reboot your computer during this time. While doing any of these things is unlikely to
damage your 9300 (because of extensive backup and error-checking provisions in your 9300), they will certainly cause the update to fail.
C) When the 9300 screen display returns after its automatic reboot, the 9300 will
be running with the updated software.
If the update fails for some reason, try repeating the procedure in steps
(A) through (C) again.
D) If the 9300 screen remains blank for more than one minute after the update
has completed, manually reboot the 9300 by removing AC power from the
9300 for at least ten seconds and then powering the 9300 back up.
E) The 9300 software update is now complete. You should now be able to connect to your 9300 via PC Remote.
NOTE: If you cannot make a connection after a software upgrade, manually reboot the 9300 with a normal “power-off/power-on” sequence.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
Section 3
Operation
9300 Front Panel

Screen Display labels the four soft buttons and provides control-setting information.

Screen Contrast button adjusts the optimum viewing angle of the screen display.

Four Soft buttons provide access to all 9300 functions and controls. The functions of the soft buttons change with each screen, according to the labels at the
bottom of each screen.

Next and Prev ( and ) buttons scroll the screen horizontally to accommodate menus that cannot fit in the available space. They also allow you to move
from one character to the next when you enter data into your 9300.
These flash when such a menu is in use. Otherwise, they are inactive.

Control Knob is used to change the setting that is selected by the soft buttons.
To change a value, you ordinarily have to hold down a soft button while you are
turning the control knob.

Recall button allows you recall a Factory or User Preset.
Selecting the Recall button does not immediately recall a preset. See step
16 on page 2-18 for instructions on recalling a preset.

Modify button brings you to list of controls that you can use to edit a Factory or
User Preset. If you edit a Factory Preset, you must save it as a new User Preset to
retain your edit.

Setup button accesses the technical parameters necessary to match the 9300 to
your transmission system.

Escape button provides an escape from current screen and returns user to the
next higher-level screen. Repeatedly pressing Escape will always return you to
the Idle screen, which is at the top level of the screen hierarchy.
3-1
3-2
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300

Input meters show the peak input level applied to the 9300’s analog or digital
inputs with reference to 0 = digital full-scale. If the input meter’s red segment
lights up, you are overdriving the 9300’s analog to digital converter, which is a
very common cause of audible distortion.

AGC meter shows the gain reduction of the slow two-band AGC processing that
precedes the multiband compressor. Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction. You can
switch the meter so that it either reads the gain reduction of the Master (above200 Hz) band, the Bass (below-200 Hz) band, or the difference between the gain
reduction in the Master and Bass bands.
The latter reading is useful for assessing the dynamic bass equalization
that the AGC produces, and it helps you set the AGC BASS COUPLING
control.

Gate LED indicates gate activity, lighting when the input audio falls below the
threshold set by the AGC gate threshold control (via the Full Control screen’s
AGC GATE control). When this happens, the AGC’s recovery time is slowed to
prevent noise rush-up during low-level passages.

Gain Reduction meters show the gain reduction in the multiband compressor.
Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction.

Output meters show the instantaneous peak output of the processed audio in
units of percentage modulation. The right-hand meter shows positive peaks and
the left-hand meter shows negative peaks.
Some audio processing concepts
Loudness and coverage are increased by reducing the peak-to-average ratio of the
audio. If peaks are reduced, the average level can be increased within the permitted
modulation limits. The effectiveness with which this can be accomplished without
introducing objectionable side effects (like clipping distortion) is the single best
measure of audio processing effectiveness.
Density is the extent to which the short-term RMS amplitude of audio envelope peaks
is made uniform (at the expense of dynamic range). Programs with large amounts of
short-term dynamic range have low density; highly compressed programs have high
density.
Reducing the peak-to-average ratio of the audio increases loudness. If peaks are reduced, the average level can be increased within the permitted modulation limits.
The effectiveness with which this can be accomplished without introducing objectionable side effects (such as pumping or intermodulation distortion) is the single
best measure of audio processing effectiveness.
Compression reduces the difference in level between the soft and loud sounds to
make more efficient use of permitted peak level limits, resulting in a subjective in-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
crease in the loudness of soft sounds. It cannot make loud sounds seem louder.
Compression reduces dynamic range relatively slowly in a manner similar to riding
the gain: Limiting and clipping, on the other hand, reduce the short-term peak-toaverage ratio of the audio.
Limiting increases audio density. Increasing density can make loud sounds seem
louder, but can also result in an unattractive busier, flatter, or denser sound. It is important to be aware of the many negative subjective side effects of excessive density
when setting controls that affect the density of the processed sound.
Clipping sharp peaks does not produce any audible side effects when done moderately. Excessive clipping will be perceived as audible distortion.
Loudness and density
The amount of gain reduction determines how much the loudness of soft passages
will be increased (and, therefore, how consistent overall loudness will be). The
automatic gain control (AGC) and the multiband limiter both provide gain reduction,
although their effects are quite different.
In a competently-designed processor, audibly objectionable distortion occurs only
when the processor is clipping peaks to prevent the audio from exceeding the peak
modulation limits of the transmission channel. The less clipping that occurs, the less
likely that the listener will hear distortion. However, to reduce clipping, you must
decrease the drive level to the clipper, which causes the average level (and thus, the
loudness) to decrease proportionally.
Receiver high frequency rolloff introduces further complications. A typical
receiver’s severe HF rolloff reduces the headroom available at high frequencies and
makes it difficult to achieve a bright sound. This is because bright sound requires
considerable high frequency power to appear at the output of the receiver, thus
requiring a very large amount of high frequency power to be transmitted so that a
sufficient amount will survive the receiver’s rolloff.
To increase brightness and intelligibility at the receiver, the 9300’s NRSC preemphasis
boosts the treble at 6dB/octave starting at 2.1 kHz. HF CURVE settings from 0 to 10
produce more severe preemphasis than NRSC, boosting at 18dB/octave with 2 kHz up
about 3 dB. Without very artful processing, this preemphasis will radically increase the
level of the peaks and force you to decrease the average level proportionally. Orban's
high frequency limiting and distortion-cancelling clipping systems greatly ease this
trade-off, but cannot eliminate it. Therefore, you can only increase brightness by
reducing average modulation (loudness)  unless you accept the increased distortion
caused by driving the final clippers harder.
In processing, there is a direct trade-off between loudness, brightness, and distortion.
You can improve one only at the expense of one or both of the other two. Thanks to
Orban's psychoacoustically-optimized designs, this is less true of Orban processors than
of any others. Nevertheless, all intelligent processor designers must acknowledge and
work within the laws of physics and psychoacoustics as they apply to these trade-offs.
3-3
3-4
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
OPTIMOD-AM Processing
OPTIMOD-AM processing occurs in the following main stages.

A gentle AGC that is ordinarily used to slowly ride gain, keeping long-term average drive levels into the following multiband compressor stage constant.

A program equalizer. This starts with a three stage parametric equalizer that allows you to adjust bass, midrange, and high-frequency equalization. There are
three fully parametric sections, each with non-interacting control over the
amount of EQ (in dB), the bandwidth, and the center frequency. They are used
to color the audio to achieve a “signature sound” for the station.
The program equalizer also contains a high frequency shelving section we call
the “receiver equalizer.” While the parametric equalizers are designed to produce program coloration as desired, the HF shelving section of the program
equalizer is ordinarily used to pre-emphasize the signal to help overcome the
high-frequency rolloff of typical AM radios. The shelving section can be operated as a fixed, first-order shelf to provide NRSC standard preemphasis or as a
third-order semi-parametric shelf with adjustable gain and curve shape. In general, if you use a great deal of HF boost, you will have to turn down the LESSMORE control to avoid audible distortion.

A five-band compressor with Orban's exclusive multiband distortion-cancelling
clipper. This system embeds the clipper within the multiband crossover to permit
the crossover to filter out clipping distortion products that would otherwise be
audible. A feedforward sidechain provides further, highly selective cancellation
of difference-frequency intermodulation distortion. The five-band compressor
also incorporates a single-ended dynamic noise reduction system, which can be
activated or defeated as desired.

A safety clipper and overshoot compensator. These elements precisely control
peak modulation without adding out-of-band frequencies, as a simple clipper
would.

A transmitter equalizer with four presets. The TX EQ allows you to pre-distort
OPTIMOD-AM's output waveform to compensate for low-frequency tilt,
high-frequency ringing, and high-frequency group delay distortion in the transmitter and antenna system. The active transmission preset also determines the
positive peak threshold and the highpass filter and lowpass filter cutoff frequencies,
AM Processing: The Art of Compromise
Noise, interference, and narrow bandwidth inherently restrict AM audio quality. Because of this, purist goals (“the output should sound just like the input”) are irrelevant because receiver design makes them impossible to achieve. Instead, the goal of
processing should be to deliver the highest subjective quality through this limited
transmission channel to the listener's ear. This always requires substantial compres-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
sion and limiting to ensure that the received signal will override the noise and interference over the maximum possible geographical area. It also requires high frequency boost to compensate for the high-frequency rolloff in all AM radios.
The 9300’s GEN PURPOSE MEDIUM factory preset at a LESS-MORE setting of 7 meets
these requirements and provides a sound that is subjectively undistorted even on
high-quality automobile radios. This is the default preset upon initial power-up of
the 9300. You may continue using this preset or choose another preset as you deem
appropriate.
You must also choose a setting of the system bandwidth control for the active System Preset (in System Setup). Depending on whether the bandwidth is 4.5 - 7 kHz or
7.5 - 9.5 kHz, the characteristics of any factory preset will change to complement the
chosen bandwidth. For example, if the frequency is set at 7.5 kHz or above, the HF
CURVE of the GEN PURPOSE MEDIUM preset will be automatically set to 10 and the
HF GAIN will be set to +10dB. If the frequency is set at 7.0 kHz or below (as appropriate for areas such as Europe and Asia), the HF CURVE will be set to 0 and the HF GAIN
will be set to +17dB. This matches OPTIMOD-AM's HF preemphasis to the bandwidth
of the radios that will most likely be in use in a given part of the world.
If the amount of transmitter power available is limited and you wish to cover the
widest possible area, you may choose to process harder (by advancing the LESSMORE control at the cost of some audible distortion and increased compression). You
may also wish to reduce the amount of high frequency receiver equalization and/or
decrease the audio bandwidth of the processing (by adjusting the system low-pass
filter) because you will discover that you can achieve a louder sound with the same
amount of distortion if you do this.
You will find out that in any setup there is a direct trade-off between loudness,
brightness, and distortion. You can improve any single parameter, but only at the
expense of one or both of the other two. This is true of any processor, not just
OPTIMOD-AM. Perhaps the most difficult part of adjusting a processor is determining the best trade-off for a given situation. If most of your listeners are located
where your signal is strong, it is wiser to give up ultimate loudness to achieve
brightness and low distortion. A listener can compensate for loudness by simply adjusting the volume control. But there is nothing the listener can do to make a dirty
signal sound clean again, or to undo the effects of excessive high-frequency limiting.
If processing for high quality is done carefully, the sound will also be excellent on
small radios. Although such a signal might fall slightly short of ultimate loudness, it
will tend to compensate with an openness, depth, and punch (even on small radios)
that cannot be obtained when the signal is excessively squashed. On the other hand,
if many listeners receive a weak signal or one that is frequently contaminated by interference, then processing harder to achieve maximum loudness, uniformity, and
average modulation will let the station be heard more easily. You may therefore
wish to process quite differently during the day than at night, when skywave interference is often a problem. OPTIMOD-AM's programmable presets make this easy.
If women form a significant portion of the station's audience, bear in mind that
women are more sensitive to distortion and listening fatigue than men are. In any
3-5
3-6
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
format requiring long-term listening to achieve market share, great care should be
taken not to alienate women by excessive stridency, harshness, or distortion.
AM radio has been losing its market share to FM in many countries because the public perceives that AM has lower sound quality. While this is inevitably true (except in
the automobile, where multipath often degrades FM reception below “entertainment quality”), the damage can be minimized by processing the audio to make the
best of the limitations of the AM channel and to avoid processing artifacts.
OPTIMOD-AM is uniquely effective in optimizing these trade-offs, and the discussion
below tells you in more detail how to do this.
Shortwave/HF Processing
The goals for HF broadcasters are likely to be quite different than they would be in
MW, LW, or FM broadcast. Listeners to HF broadcasts are often highly motivated and
will continue to listen even when the signal is severely degraded by poor propagation conditions or by interference that would almost certainly cause the average LW,
MW, or FM listener to tune to another station.
In LW and MW, the audio processor set-up controls are usually used to match the
processor’s ”sound” to a certain type of music or talk programming. HF is different.
In HF, the audio processor is usually adjusted to provide a sound at the receiver that
is as esthetically satisfying as possible, given the probable signal quality at the receiver. The broadcasting organization usually does not have the luxury of making
fine adjustments to match different types of program material, because such fine
adjustments will almost certainly be masked by the variability of the propagation
and interference experienced by the listener. This fact considerably simplifies the adjustment procedure.
We have tuned the 9300’s “HF” presets with these compromises in mind. There is a
general-purpose preset and a preset tuned to optimize voice intelligibility. We believe that further subtleties are inappropriate for the medium.
Working Together
Best results will be achieved if Engineering, Programming, and Management go out
of their way to communicate and cooperate with each other. It is important that
Engineering understands well the sound that Programming desires, and that Management fully understands the trade-offs involved in optimizing certain parameters
(such as loudness and coverage) at the cost of others (such as brightness or distortion).
Fundamental Requirements:
High-Quality Source Material and Accurate Monitoring
Very clean audio can be processed harder without producing objectionable distortion. If the source material is even slightly distorted, OPTIMOD-AM can greatly exaggerate this distortion, particularly if a large amount of gain reduction is used. Potential causes for distortion are poor-quality source material, including the effects of
the station's playback machines, electronics, and studio-transmitter link, as well as
excessive clipping settings in the OPTIMOD-AM processing. See Maintaining Audio
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
Quality in the Broadcast Facility (an Orban publication downloadable from
ftp.orban.com) for a discussion of how to improve source quality.
A high-quality monitor system is essential. To modify your air sound effectively, you
must be able to hear the results of your adjustments. Maintaining Audio Quality in
the Broadcast Facility also contains a detailed discussion of how to efficiently create
an accurate monitoring environment.
Monitor Rolloff Filter
The response curve of the monitor system is as important as its quality. Because the
studio monitor typically has a flat response, and because OPTIMOD-AM's output is
ordinarily significantly pre-emphasized, the sound that emerges from the monitor
will be shrill and unpleasant if the supplied Monitor Rolloff Filter is not installed before the monitor amplifier.
The response of this filter can be jumpered to emulate an “ideal” NRSC radio or to
complement the frequency response of the HF equalizer with its HF CURVE set to 0.
Because there are so few radios with anything approaching NRSC response (even in
NRSC countries), we believe that it is wiser to jumper the Monitor Rolloff Filter for
non-NRSC operation in almost all situations. If this 18dB/octave rolloff is used, the
response of this filter is approximately complementary to the frequency response of
the HF Equalizer with HF CURVE set to 0. (See Figure 3-1 on page 3-21 and Figure 2-5
on page 2-5.). Because the filter shelves off at high frequencies (to match the receiver equalization) instead of continuing to roll off like a real radio, the monitor
will sound somewhat brighter than a real radio and cannot be used to make final
subjective adjustments of OPTIMOD-AM setup controls. Nevertheless, it is suitable as
a reference for assessing quality, as it will clearly reveal distortion and other problems that may arise in the plant. Indeed, it will be somewhat more revealing than a
real radio.
Reference Radios for the Processing
However, do not rely on your monitor alone for subjectively evaluating your air
sound. It is a good idea to develop a set of “reference radios” with which you are
familiar and which are similar to those used by a majority of your audience. Too often, just one radio (typically the Program Director or General Manager's car radio) is
used to evaluate air sound. Unless all of your listeners happen to have the same radio, this approach will not give an accurate indication of what your audience is hearing.
Based on their high-frequency response, AM radios can be divided into three groups:

Group 1: Wideband AM radios, typically with response that approximately follows the recommended NRSC “modified 75µs” deemphasis to 5 kHz or above.
There are very few such radios available.

Group 2: Radios with a response down 3dB at approximately 2 kHz, with a gentle rolloff above that frequency. Because the rolloff is gentle, preemphasis can
be used to brighten the sound.

Group 3: Radios with a response down 3dB at approximately 2 kHz, with a very
3-7
3-8
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
steep rolloff above that frequency. The steepness of the rolloff eliminates the
possibility of improving the audio through preemphasis. In our opinion, these
radios must be written off as producing hopelessly bad sound. Very few people
would enjoy listening to music on these radios  although they could be used for
listening to talk programs, or for repelling pigeons and muggers.
The vast majority of present-day radios are in the second and third categories. In all
three types of radio, bass performance is completely unpredictable from model to
model. The best-sounding “Group 1” AM receiver we know of is the Sony SRF-A100
AM stereo radio (now discontinued), which can be switched between wideband and
narrowband operation. Use headphones, or drive an external amplifier and speaker
with the Sony's headphone output (its own tiny speakers cannot be used for reference
purposes). A representative good-sounding wideband mono radio is the General
Electric Superadio. In “Group 2,” we are fond of the Radio Shack MTA- series of small
table radios. The last time we looked, the model number was up to MTA-17, but these
numbers are updated periodically. Moreover, there is no guarantee that Radio Shack
will continue to sell this series.
Be aware that many radios produce excessive distortion all by themselves, especially if
they are located near the transmitter. If the station monitor (driven through
OPTIMOD-AM's monitor rolloff filter) sounds clean but your radio audio is distorted,
don't trust the radio! If the General Manager's auto radio sounds distorted, he or she
should not jump to the conclusion that there is something wrong with the station or
with the engineer's ears.
Modulation Monitors
Many modulation monitors and RF amplifiers indicate higher modulation than the
transmitter is actually producing. This forces the engineer to reduce transmitter
modulation unnecessarily, which can cost you up to 3dB of loudness! It is very
important to be sure that your modulation monitor is accurately calibrated and that it
does not exhibit overshoot on program material. Several newer monitors are designed
for accurate pulse response without overshoot. Any of these monitors will enable you
to obtain the highest loudness achievable from your transmitter and antenna system.
If the monitor is used remotely, be sure that the RF amp doesn't overshoot. Overshoots
in RF amps have been observed to be as high as 3dB.
Monitor readings should be compared with an oscilloscope observing the modulated
RF envelope. If the monitor indicates 100% negative peaks when the oscilloscope
reveals no carrier pinch-off, suspect inaccuracy in the monitor.
More About Audio Processing
Psychoacoustic factors were considered carefully during the design and construction of
OPTIMOD-AM. The resulting audio processor is easy to use (the LESS-MORE control
greatly simplifies setup) and produces a sound that is remarkably free from unwanted
processing artifacts.
Although the controls on OPTIMOD-AM provide the flexibility you need to customize
your station's sound, proper adjustment of these controls consists of balancing the
trade-offs between loudness, density, brightness, and audible distortion. In
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
programming the LESS-MORE curves, we have made it easy for you to make this
trade-off. As you advance the LESS-MORE control for a given factory preset, the sound
gets louder but distortion increases. However, for each setting of the LESS-MORE
control, other processing parameters are automatically adjusted to give you the lowest
possible distortion for the amount of loudness you are getting.
If you want to go beyond LESS-MORE and into the FULL CONTROL and EXPERT MODIFY
adjustments, you should carefully read and understand the following section. It
provides the information you need to adjust OPTIMOD-AM controls to suit your
format, taste, and competitive situation.
Judging Loudness
Apparent loudness in an analog AM channel will vary with the frequency response of
the radio and with the accuracy with which the radio is tuned. Narrowband radios will
usually get very much louder if tuned off center while a highly equalized signal is
being received. Loudness is a very complex psychoacoustic phenomenon. One station
cannot be judged louder than another unless it is consistently louder on many
different receivers with many different types of program material. Because a
wideband radio reproduces more of the frequency range in which the
highly-equalized signal concentrates its energy (and to which the ear is most sensitive),
a highly equalized signal may sound quieter than an unequalized signal on a
narrowband radio, while the reverse is true on a wideband radio.
Reverberation
In the distant past, the addition of artificial reverberation was touted as an easy
method of achieving greater loudness in AM broadcasting. Given the limitations of the
audio processing equipment of that time, this was true: reverberation increased the
signal density and average modulation without the pumping or other side effects that
heavy limiting would cause if equivalent density were to be achieved by compression
or limiting alone. However, because reverberation “smeared” the sound, it exacted a
price of decreased definition and intelligibility in many instances.
Because OPTIMOD-AM is to augment density without producing audible artifacts,
reverberation is neither necessary nor desirable for achieving high loudness and
density. Moreover, OPTIMOD-AM actually increases definition and intelligibility.
If you still wish to use reverb to achieve a nostalgic sound in an oldies format, we
recommend using it in extreme moderation and applying it to the signal before it
reaches OPTIMOD-AM. OPTIMOD-AM will effectively increase the amount of reverb by
increasing the level of the reverb decay and keeping the reverb before OPTIMOD-AM
will allow OPTIMOD-AM to control peak modulation accurately.
Customizing the 9300’s Sound
The subjective setup controls on the 9300 give you the flexibility to customize your
station’s sound. Nevertheless, as with any audio processing system, proper adjustment of these controls consists of balancing the trade-offs between loudness, density, and audible distortion. The following pages provide the information you need
to adjust the 9300 controls to suit your format, taste, and competitive situation.
3-9
3-10
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
When you start with one of our Factory Presets, there are two levels of subjective
adjustment available to you to let you customize the Factory Preset to your requirements: Basic Control and Full Control. A third level, Advanced Control, is accessible only from the 9300’s PC Remote software.
Spend some time listening critically to your on-air sound. Listen to a wide range of
program material typical of your format. Listen on several types of car, table, and
portable radios, not just your studio monitors.
Then, if you wish to customize your sound, read the rest of Section 3  it is important
to understand the functions and interactions of the audio processing controls before
experimenting with them.
See page 6-41 for a block diagram of the processing.
Basic Control
There are three sections in Basic Control:
 Equalization
 AGC (automatic gain control)
 LESS-MORE for the dynamics processing
Basic Control allows you to control three important elements of 9300 processing: the
AGC, equalizer and the dynamics section (multiband compression, limiting, and clipping), which is adjusted via the LESS-MORE control. LESS-MORE changes several different subjective setup control settings simultaneously according to a table that we
have created in the 9300’s permanent ROM (Read-Only Memory). In this table are
sets of subjective setup control settings that provide, in our opinion, the most favorable trade-off between loudness, density, and audible distortion for a given amount
of dynamics processing.
We believe that most 9300 users will never need to go beyond the Basic level of control. Orban’s audio processing experts have optimized the combinations of subjective setup control settings produced by this control by drawing on years of experience designing audio processing and hundred of hours of listening tests.
As you increase the setting of given LESS-MORE control, the air sound in that channel will become louder, but (as with any processor) processing artifacts will increase.
Please note that the highest LESS-MORE setting is purposely designed to cause unpleasant distortion and processing artifacts! This helps assure you that you have chosen the optimum setting of the LESS-MORE control, because turning the control up
to this point will cause the sound quality to become obviously unacceptable.
You need not (in fact, cannot) create a sound entirely from scratch. All User Presets
are created by modifying Factory Presets or by further modifying Factory Presets
that have been previously modified with a LESS-MORE adjustment. It is wise to set
the LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound
before you make further modifications at the Advanced Control level. This is be-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
cause the LESS-MORE control gets you close to an optimum trade-off between loudness and artifacts, so any changes you make are likely to be smaller and to require
resetting fewer controls.
You can change EQ or stereo enhancement and not lose the ability to use LESSMORE. When you create a user preset, the 9300 will automatically save your EQ settings along with your LESS-MORE setting. When you recall the user preset, you will
still be able to edit your LESS-MORE setting if you wish.
There are actually two sets of LESS-MORE tables for each factory preset  one optimized for Wideband (7.5 kHz and above) operation, the other for Narrowband (7.0
kHz and below) operation. The table set in use is determined by the low-pass filter
frequency you choose in Setup. These tables were programmed by assuming that
during wideband operation you would use less boost in the HF Equalizer than you
would during narrowband operation.
Full Control
Full Control is the most detailed control level available from the 9300’s front panel.
It allows you to adjust the dynamics section at approximately the level of “full control” available in Orban’s 9200 processor. These controls are somewhat risky (although not as much as the controls in Advanced Control). Most people will never
have any reason to go beyond Full Control, even if they want to create a “signature
sound” for their station.
Note: Full Control does not provide LESS-MORE control. Furthermore,
once you have edited a preset’s multiband dynamics parameters in Full
Control or Advanced Control, LESS-MORE control is no longer available in
Basic Control and will be grayed-out if you access its screen. As noted
above, we recommend using the Basic Control LESS-MORE control to
achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound before you
make further modifications at the Full or Advanced levels.
Advanced Control
If you want to create a signature sound for your station that is far out of the ordinary or if your taste differs from the people who programmed the LESS-MORE tables, Advanced Control is available to you from the 9300 PC Remote software only
(not from the 9300’s front panel). At this level, you can customize or modify any subjective setup control setting to create a sound exactly to your taste. You can then
save the settings in a User Preset and recall it whenever you wish.
Maladjustment of these controls can cause the 9300 to produce unexpected distortion or artifacts only on certain program material, even though it might sound good
on most other material. Placement of a control in the Advanced Control group emphasizes the risk of adjusting this control casually.
Compressor attack times and thresholds are available. These controls can be exceedingly dangerous in inexperienced hands, leading you to create presets that sound
3-11
3-12
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
great on some program material and fall apart embarrassingly on other material.
We therefore recommend that you create custom presets at the Advanced Control
level only if you are experienced with on-air sound design, and if you are willing to
take the time to double-check your work on many different types of program material.
The PC Remote software organizes its controls in tabbed screens. The EQUALIZATION,
and LESS-MORE tabs access the Basic Control controls. The remaining tabs combine
the Full Control and Advanced Control controls, logically organized by functionality.
See the note on page 3-11 regarding the unavailability of LESS-MORE after you have
edited a control in Full Control or Advanced Control.
Gain Reduction Metering
Unlike the metering on some processors, when any OPTIMOD-AM gain reduction
meter indicates full-scale (at its bottom), it means that its associated compressor has
run out of gain reduction range, that the circuitry is being overloaded, and that
various nastinesses are likely to commence.
Because the various compressors have 25 dB of gain reduction range, the meter
should never come close to 25 dB gain reduction if OPTIMOD-AM has been set up
for a sane amount of gain reduction under ordinary program conditions.
To accommodate the boosts introduced by the HF EQ control, Band 5 is
capable of 30 dB of gain reduction.
Further, be aware of the different peak factors on voice and music — if voice and
music are peaked identically on a VU meter, voice may cause up to 10 dB more peak
gain reduction than does music! (A PPM will indicate relative peak levels much more
accurately.)
To Create or Save a User Preset
Once you have edited a preset, you can save it as a user preset. The 9300 can
store an indefinite number of user presets, limited only by available memory.
The 9300 will offer to save any edited, unsaved preset when the main screen is
visible. To save a preset:
A) Press the ESC button repeatedly until you see the main screen, which shows
the current time and the preset presently on air.
If there is an unsaved preset on air, the rightmost button will be labeled
SAVE PRESET.
B) Press the SAVE PRESET button.
The Save Preset screen appears.
C) Choose a name for your preset.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
Some non-alphanumeric characters (such as < and >) are reserved and
cannot be used in preset names.
D) Use the knob to set the each character in the preset name. Use the NEXT and
PREV buttons to control the cursor position.
E) Press the SAVE CHANGES button.

You cannot give a user preset the same name as a factory preset. If the
name that you have selected duplicates the name of a factory preset, the
9300 will suggest an alternate name.

If the name you have selected duplicates the name of an existing user preset, the 9300 warns you that you are about to overwrite that preset. Answer YES if you wish to overwrite the preset and NO otherwise. If you answer NO, the 9300 will give you an opportunity to choose a new name for
the preset you are saving.
You can save user presets from the 9300 PC Remote application. (See
Using the 9300 PC Remote Control Software on page 3-37.) Please note
that when you save presets from the PC Remote application, you save
them in the 9300’s memory (as if you had saved them from the 9300’s
front panel). The PC Remote application also allows you to archive presets to your computer’s hard drive (or other storage device) and to restore them. However, archiving a preset is not the same as saving it. Archived presets reside on a storage medium supported by your computer,
while saved presets reside in the 9300’s local non-volatile memory. You
cannot archive a preset until you have saved it. (See To back up user presets, system files, and automation files onto your computer’s hard drive
on page 3-40.)
Note that if, for some reason, you wish to save an unmodified preset (either Factory or user) under a new name, you must temporarily make an
arbitrary edit to that preset in order to make the SAVE PRESET button appear. After you have saved the preset, reverse the edit and save the preset again.
Factory Programming Presets
Factory Programming Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various
program formats or types. The Factory Programming Presets are starting points to
help you get on the air quickly without having to understand anything about adjusting the 9300’s sound. You can edit any of these presets with the LESS-MORE control to optimize the trade-off between loudness and distortion according to the
needs of your format. Because it is so easy to fine-tune the sound at the LESS-MORE
level, we believe that many users will quickly want to customize their chosen preset
to complement their market and competitive position after they had time to familiarize themselves with the 9300’s programming facilities.
It is OK to use unmodified factory presets on the air. These represent the best efforts
of some very experienced on-air sound designers. We are sometimes asked about
unpublished “programming secrets” for Optimods. In fact, there are no “secrets”
3-13
3-14
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
that we withhold from users. Our “secrets” are revealed in this manual and the presets embody all of our craft as processing experts. The presets are editable because
other sound designers may have different preferences from ours, not because the
presets are somehow mediocre or improvable by those with special, arcane knowledge that we withhold from most of our customers.
Start with one of these presets. Spend some time listening critically to your on-air
sound. Listen to a wide range of program material typical of your format and listen
on several types of AM radios (not just on your studio monitors). Then, if you wish,
customize your sound using the information that follows.
Each Orban factory preset has LESS-MORE capability. The table shows the presets, including the source presets from which they were taken and the nominal LESS-MORE
setting of each preset. Some of the Five-Band presets appear several times under
different names because we felt that these presets were appropriate for more than
one format; these can be identified by a shared source preset name.
Important! If you are dissatisfied with the sound available from the factory presets, please understand that each named preset is actually 19 presets that can be accessed via the LESS-MORE control. Try using this control
to trade off loudness against processing artifacts and side effects. Once
you have used LESS-MORE, save your edited preset as a User Preset.
Do not be afraid to choose a preset other than the one named for the type of programming on-air if you believe this other preset has a more appropriate sound. Also,
if you want to fine-tune the frequency balance of the programming, feel free to use
Basic Control and make small changes to the Bass, Mid EQ, and HF EQ controls.
Unlike some earlier Orban’s processors, the 9300 lets you make changes in EQ, AGC,
and stereo enhancement without losing the ability to use LESS-MORE settings.
Of course, LESS-MORE is still available for the unedited preset if you
want to go back to it. There is no way you can erase or otherwise damage the Factory Presets. So, feel free to experiment.
Description of the Factory Presets
Presets with “HF” in their names are narrowband presets intended for international
shortwave transmission where 4.5 kHz audio bandwidth and difficult propagation
conditions are the norm. All other presets are intended for medium wave
transmission.
GENERAL PURPOSE MEDIUM is the default factory preset. It is based on the
Medium-Fast multiband release time and is adjusted to sound equally good on voice
and music. It is most appropriate for listeners in strong signal areas because it does not
bring up low-level material as much as presets based on the Fast multiband release
time.
GENERAL PURPOSE HEAVY is based on the Fast multiband release time, and is
designed to sound good on voice and music. Because it processes harder than the
GENERAL PURPOSE MEDIUM preset it can be louder but does not sound as punchy or
dynamic. It is a good choice when many listeners are subject to noise and interference
and you want the highest possible loudness.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
NEWS is based on the Fast multiband release time. Because of this, the unit adapts
quickly to different program material, providing excellent source-to-source
consistency. This “automatic equalization” action of the multiband compressor has
been adjusted to produce less bass than in the GENERAL PURPOSE presets, and the
gating threshold is set considerably higher. This maximizes voice intelligibility,
including low-quality sources like telephone. The high gating threshold resists noise
pumping even with noisy material.
NEWS + NR is identical to the News preset except that the Dynamic Noise Reduction
function is also activated, producing even more noise reduction on moderately noisy
program material. However, the Dynamic Noise Reduction function can produce
audible side effects that include noise pumping on very noisy material and a subtle loss
of crispness on high-quality voice. So you should listen carefully to decide if it is
preferable to News for your situation.
SPORTS is based on the Fast multiband release time. Compared to NEWS, the AGC is
operated with a slower release time to avoid pumping up crowd noise as much as the
News preset would. Yet the Fast multiband release time still provides excellent
consistency, intelligibility, and loudness.
FINE ARTS is based on the Slow multiband release time. It is designed for classical and
jazz programming where an open, unprocessed sound is more desirable than the last
bit of loudness. Unlike the other factory presets, the FINE ARTS LESS-MORE curves are
designed to produce more compression as they are advanced, but not to significantly
increase clipping distortion. So setting LESS-MORE higher will mostly increase the level
of quiet passages instead of increasing the loudness of loud passages in the source
material.
MUSIC MEDIUM is based on the Medium-Slow multiband release time. It is designed
for various adult-oriented music formats where an easy, relaxed sound is considered
more important than the highest possible loudness.
MUSIC HEAVY is based on the Fast multiband release time. However, its tuning is very
different than GEN PURPOSE HEAVY. It is tuned so that the AGC operates with a fast
release time, doing most of the work in compressing the program. This gives more of a
FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS
Preset Names
GEN PURPOSE MEDIUM
GEN PURPOSE HEAVY
NEWS
NEWS+NR
SPORTS
FINE ARTS
MUSIC MEDIUM
MUSIC HEAVY
GREGG
PRESENCE
HF GENERAL
Source Preset
GEN PURPOSE MEDIUM
GEN PURPOSE HEAVY
NEWS
NEWS+NR
SPORTS
FINE ARTS
MUSIC MEDIUM
MUSIC HEAVY
GREGG
PRESENCE
HF GENERAL
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets
Normal LESS-MORE
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
9.0
7.0
3-15
3-16
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
“wideband compression” sound than the other factory presets. Meanwhile, the
multiband compressor is operated lightly with relatively little gain reduction so it acts
more like a limiter than a compressor. Music Heavy is therefore an alternative to
General Purpose Fast, providing a different “flavor” of processing. Either preset could
be used to achieve a highly-processed sound with music programming.
The GREGG preset is designed for general-purpose voice/music programming,
particularly on music-oriented formats. Although not the loudest 9300 preset, it has a
smooth, well-balanced quality that keeps audiences listening. We tuned it to sound
very similar to the legendary Gregg Laboratories 2540 AM processor (designed by
Orban’s Vice President of New Product Development, Greg Ogonowski, in the 1980s),
using a direct A/B comparison with the Gregg processor to ensure accuracy. This
required setting the B1/B2 CROSSOVER to 200 Hz and setting other controls
appropriately.
The PRESENCE preset, as its name suggests, emphasizes the spectrum around 3 kHz.
It is a very loud preset, particularly useful for talk formats. Unlike the “HF” presets,
it is set for full NRSC bandwidth and tuned for a moderate amount of bass.
As always, the actual audio cutoff frequency will depend on the setting
of the bandwidth control in System Setup.
MW stations seeking to increase their coverage and to cut through co-channel interference are appropriate candidates for this preset, which renders speech crisp, loud,
and highly intelligible.
This preset is targeted for the typical narrowband MW radio and will sound shrill and
unpleasant on wideband radios (of which there are very few in the market). If you feel
that the preset has too much distortion, feel free to turn it down it with LESS-MORE to
taste. The factory LESS-MORE setting is 9.0, so there is plenty of room to turn the
preset down without seriously compromising loudness and coverage.
You can also reduce the midrange boost if you feel this is excessive. Part of the boost is
implemented in the Equalization section and part is implemented by the B4 and B5
output band mix controls, which are found in Advanced Control.
HF GENERAL is a 4.5 kHz-bandwidth preset for international shortwave transmission. In recognition of the severe noise and interference problems often
encountered in HF propagation, the HF GENERAL preset has been ``tuned" to
emphasize loudness and intelligibility. By comparison to the medium-wave-oriented
presets, HF GENERAL has a more ``forward" midrange balance and less bass. This is
because bass costs modulation without contributing proportional intelligibility (it
also can make intermodulation distortion worse during selective fading), and
because a boosted midrange can most effectively cut through noise to provide
intelligibility.
HF VOICE is a 4.5 kHz-bandwidth preset for international shortwave transmission.
Compared to HF GENERAL, it emphasizes voice-range frequencies and has less bass.
It is carefully crafted to maximize speech intelligibility in the presence of noise,
interference, and jamming. If you need even more average modulation at the
expense of distortion, turn up LESS-MORE as necessary.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
Equalizer Controls
Table 3-2 summarizes the equalization controls available for the 9300.
“Advanced” controls are accessible only from 9300 PC Remote software.
Any equalization that you set will be automatically stored in any User Preset that
you create and save. For example, you can use a User Preset to combine an unmodified Factory Programming Preset with your custom equalization. Of course, you can
also modify the Factory Preset (with Basic Control, Full Control, or Advanced Control) before you create your User Preset.
In general, you should be conservative when equalizing modern, well-recorded program material. This is particularly true with general-purpose AM programming.
Low Frequency Parametric Equalizer is a specially designed parametric equalizer
whose boost and cut curves closely emulate those of a classic Orban analog parametric equalizer with conventional bell-shaped curves (within 0.15 dB worst-case).
This provides warm, smooth, “analog-sounding” equalization.
Equalizer Controls
Group
Basic /
Full Control
Name
LF FREQ
LF GAIN
LF WIDTH
MID FREQ
MID GAIN
Advanced Name
Range
Low Frequency
Low Gain
Low Width
Mid Frequency
Mid Gain
20 ... 500 Hz
–10.0 … +10.0 dB
0.8 ... 4 octaves
250 ... 6000 Hz
–10.0 … +10.0 dB
MID WIDTH
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
Mid Width
High Frequency
High Gain
0.8 ... 4 octaves
1.0 … 15.0 kHz
–10.0 … +10.0 dB
HF Enhancer
HIGH WIDTH
HF ENHANCE
0.8 ... 4 octaves
0 … 15
HF Gain
HF GAIN
HF Curve
HF CURVE
DJ Bass
DJ BASS
B1 DRIVE
B2 DRIVE
B3 DRIVE
B4 DRIVE
B5 DRIVE
LOW PASS
High Width
High Frequency
Enhancer
High Frequency
Shelf Gain
High Frequency
Shelf Curve
DJ Bass Boost
Band 1 Input Drive
Band 2 Input Drive
Band 3 Input Drive
Band 4 Input Drive
Band 5 Input Drive
Lowpass
LPF SHAPE
HIGH PASS
LPF Shape
Highpass
Low
Mid
High
System Filters
0 … 22 dB
0 … 10, NRSC
Off, On dB
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
4.5, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 7.0, 7.5, 8.0,
8.5 ,9.0. 9.5(NRSC) kHz
–0.1, –3.0, –6.0 dB
50 ,60, 70, 80, 90, 100 Hz
Table 3-2: Equalization Controls
3-17
3-18
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
LF FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in Hertz.
Range is 20-500Hz.
LF GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a 10
dB range.
LF WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves. The
range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1.5 octaves is a good starting point. These curves are relatively
broad because they are designed to provide overall tonal coloration,
rather than to notch out small areas of the spectrum.
Although a certain amount of low-frequency boost must be used along with the
high frequency boost in order to obtain a balanced sound on analog AM radios for
MW, do so conservatively! Use the bassiest auto radios (all of which usually have a
peaky mid-bass when you listen through the standard dashboard speaker) as a
“worst case” reference. Do not boost the bass so much that your reference radio becomes muddy or boomy. With correct bass boost, your table radio will have only
moderate bass and your pocket radio will sound thin and tinny.
For example, a 6dB boost corresponds to a 400% increase in power! More than 6dB
of bass boost will strain many transmitters, unnecessarily increasing power supply
bounce and IM distortion problems. (The bass boost is further limited dynamically in
the multiband clipper  see immediately below.) Excessive bass boost will also cause
many dashboard speakers to sound unacceptably muddy.
Use of a narrow bandwidth, a low boost frequency (like 65 Hz), and a relatively
large boost can produce a very punchy sound in a car, or on a radio with significant
bass response. It can also cost you loudness (bass frequencies take lots of modulation
without giving you proportionate perceived loudness) and can cause thin sound on
radios with only moderate bass response. A smaller amount of boost can often produce a better compromise.
In HF broadcast, perhaps the most difficult of all processing tradeoffs is choosing
bass equalization. This is why the 9300’s a bass equalizer can cut as well as boost.
When propagation conditions are good and the signal strength is high, a certain
amount of bass boost (perhaps +3dB) provides the most pleasing sound. However,
robust bass can easily induce intermodulation distortion in the clippers, so the
amount of clipping must be reduced to provide acceptable distortion performance.
In turn, this may compromise loudness by up to 3dB — the equivalent of cutting
transmitter power in half!
Bass boost tends to reduce the life of power tubes in most high-powered transmitters. It will often induce intermodulation distortion in envelope detectors under selective fading, when detection becomes markedly nonlinear because of sideband
asymmetry. In short, the arguments for bass cut are usually more persuasive than
those for bass boost. Yet if an HF broadcasting organization seeks the highest possible subjective quality regardless of transmitter operating cost and feels that it usually delivers a strong RF signal, free from selective fading, to its listeners, then such
an organization may still wish to boost bass slightly.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
It is important to understand that the effect of the bass equalizer is relatively subtle,
because bass balances are also affected by the action of the 150Hz and 420Hz bands
of the multiband limiter and multiband distortion-canceling clipper. These bands will
make bass balances more uniform (partially ``fighting'' bass-balance changes made
with the bass equalizer) by increasing bass in program material that is thinsounding, and by limiting heavy bass to a user-settable threshold below 100%
modulation to prevent disturbing intermodulation between bass and higherfrequency program material. By comparison to the 9300’s preset for MW broadcasting , in the HF presets the threshold of limiting of the 150Hz band has been substantially lowered so that more gain reduction (and thus, less bass) is produced.
The multiband distortion-cancelling clipper prevents hard-clipped bass square waves
from appearing at OPTIMOD-AM's output. Older transmitters may respond much
better to this well-controlled, benign waveform than to the hard-clipped bass
square waves produced by less sophisticated processing.
The equalizer, like the classic Orban analog parametrics such as the 622B,
has constant “Q” curves. This means that the cut curves are narrower
than the boost curves. The width (in octaves) is calibrated with reference
to 10 dB boost. As you decrease the amount of EQ gain (or start to cut),
the width in octaves will decrease. However, the “Q” will stay constant.
“Q” is a mathematical parameter that relates to how fast ringing damps
out. (Technically, we are referring to the “Q” of the poles of the equalizer transfer function, which does not change as you adjust the amount
of boost or cut.)
The curves in the 9300’s equalizer were created by a so-called “minimax”
(“minimize the maximum error,” or “equal-ripple”) IIR digital approximation to the curves provided by the Orban 622B analog parametric
equalizer. Therefore, unlike less sophisticated digital equalizers that use
the “bilinear transformation” to generate EQ curves, the shapes of the
9300’s curves are not distorted at high frequencies.
Midrange Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose boost and cut
curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional
bell-shaped curves.
MID FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in Hertz.
Range is 250-6000Hz.
MID GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a
10 dB range.
MID WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1 octave is a good starting point.
The audible effect of the midrange equalizer is closely associated with the amount
of gain reduction in the midrange bands. With small amounts of gain reduction, it
boosts power in the presence region. This can increase the loudness of such material
substantially. As you increase the gain reduction in the midrange bands (by turning
the MULTIBAND DRIVE (Multiband Drive) control up), the MID GAIN control will have
progressively less audible effect. The compressor for the midrange bands will tend to
reduce the effect of the MID frequency boost (in an attempt to keep the gain con-
3-19
3-20
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
stant) to prevent excessive stridency in program material that already has a great
deal of presence power. Therefore, with large amounts of gain reduction, the density of presence region energy will be increased more than will the level of energy in
that region.
We advise using this control conservatively, because excessive midrange boost can
sound strident and fatiguing. Further, bear in mind that any equalization that affects frequencies above about 3kHz will affect wideband and narrowband radios
very differently; the narrowband radios will reproduce very little of the above-3kHz
equalization. So, if there are wideband radios in the hands of your audience, be sure
to double-check your sound on both wideband and narrowband radios before settling on a setting for the midrange equalization.
A 1 kHz boost is particularly effective in increasing the loudness of the low-quality
radios that are down about 3dB at 2kHz with steep-slope rolloff thereafter (the
third group of radios described in Reference Radios for the Processing on page 3-7).
If you are going to do this, set the equalizer's BANDWIDTH to approximately two octaves.
We do not recommend this 1 kHz equalization if you want a sound that is competitive with FM, because it will produce the old-fashioned AM honk. We do not believe
that type of sound is appropriate for the tastes of today's audiences. The 1kHz boost
should be used only as a last resort - the resulting sound will be louder, but it will
also be far less competitive with FM.
High Frequency Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose boost and
cut curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional bell-shaped curves.
HIGH FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in
Hertz. The range is 1-15 kHz.
HIGH GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut over a 10 dB
range.
HIGH WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, one octave is a good starting point.
Excessive high frequency boost can exaggerate hiss and distortion in program material that is less than perfectly clean. We suggest no more than 4 dB boost as a practical maximum, unless source material is primarily from compact discs of recently recorded material. In several of our presets, we use this equalizer to boost the upper
presence band (4.4 kHz) slightly, leaving broadband HF boost to the BRILLIANCE
and/or HF ENHANCE controls.
HF Gain (“High Frequency Shelf Gain”) determines the amount of high frequency
boost provided by the 9300’s receiver equalizer.
HF Curve (“High Frequency Shelf Curve”) determines the shape of the high frequency shelving curves curve produced by the 9300’s receiver equalizer. (See Figure
3-1.)
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
The high-frequency receiver equalizer is designed to compensate for the high frequency rolloff in average AM radios. The typical AM radio is down 3dB at 2kHz and
rolls off at least 18dB/octave after that. The HF equalizer provides an 18dB/octave
shelving preemphasis that can substantially improve the brightness and intelligibility
of sound through narrowband radios that do not have an abrupt rolloff. The HF
equalizer has two controls: a gain control that determines the height of the shelving
curve (dB), and a curve control, calibrated with an arbitrary number that determines
how abruptly the shelving equalizer increases its gain as frequency increases. 0 provides the most abrupt curve; 10 provides the gentlest. The HF CURVE control is used
to trade off harshness on wider band radios against brightness in narrowband radios.
An HF CURVE of 0 provides the same equalization that was originally supplied as
standard on early OPTIMOD-AM 9100 units and was later provided by the 9100’s
green module. Compared to higher settings of the HF Curve control, it provides
much more boost in the 5 kHz region, and tends to sound strident on wideband radios. However, it can be very effective where narrowband radios remain the norm.
With an HF CURVE setting of 0, an HF GAIN control setting of 22 dB will result in a
perceived bandwidth of 6 kHz on “Group 2” AM radios (see page 3-7); a 15 dB setting yields a 5 kHz perceived bandwidth, 10 dB yields 4 kHz, and 5 dB yields 3 kHz.
Advancing the HF GAIN control will result in a brighter, higher fidelity sound, but it
Figure 3-1: HF Receiver Equalizer Curves
3-21
3-22
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
will also require that the listener tune the radio more carefully.
If most of your listeners have wider-band radios (as may be the case in North America), use the NRSC curve, which can be chosen with the HF CURVE control. For a
somewhat brighter sound that can benefit narrowband radios more, yet is still compatible with wideband NRSC radios, use HF CURVE = 10 and HF GAIN = 10dB. HF
CURVE = 10 corresponds to the RED preemphasis module in Orban's analog
9100-series OPTIMOD-AM processors.
Note that the added brightness caused by using an HF CURVE of 10 (as opposed to
using NRSC) may tend to increase the first-adjacent interference being generated by
your station, contrary to the purpose and intentions of the NRSC.
HF CURVE settings between 0 and 10 smoothly interpolate between the two extremes, and provide more flexibility for user adjustment. An HF CURVE setting of 5
provides the curve family associated with the YELLOW preemphasis module in
Orban's analog 9100-series OPTIMOD-AM processors.
With the HF CURVE control at any setting other than NRSC, extreme amounts of
high-frequency boost may result in a slight `lisping' quality on certain voices. This is
because the high-frequency boost will increase the high-frequency content of sibilant voices, which can only be boosted to 100% modulation. Since the spectral balance of the voice is altered, this may be perceived as a lisping sound.
The receiver equalizer is of limited benefit to narrowband radios with abrupt rolloffs. We believe that these radios benefit more from a boost at 3 kHz, combined
with very little HF shelving EQ. These radios have almost no response at 5 kHz and
above, so boosting frequencies above 5 kHz wastes modulation. Using a bell-shaped
boost at 3 kHz causes the boost to decline naturally at frequencies that the radio
cannot reproduce. You can use either the midrange or HF parametric equalizer to
create such a boost.
This technique can also be useful if you are limiting your transmitted audio bandwidth to 5 or 6 kHz, which is required in much of the world and is becoming more
common in North America. OPTIMOD-AM’s sharp lowpass filters (necessary to control occupied RRF bandwidth adequately) can produce audible ringing, which many
people find objectionable. By limiting the amount of boost at the cutoff frequency
of the OPTIMOD-AM lowpass filter, you can reduce the audibility of filter ringing.
DJ BASS (“DJ Bass Boost“) control determines the amount of bass boost produced
on some male voices. In its default OFF position, it causes the gain reduction of the
lowest frequency band to move quickly to the same gain reduction as its nearest
neighbor when gated. This fights any tendency of the lowest frequency band to develop significantly more gain than its neighbor when processing voice because voice
will activate the gate frequently. Each time it does so, it resets the gain of the lowest
frequency band so that the gains of the two bottom bands are equal and the response in this frequency range is flat. The result is natural-sounding bass on male
voice.
If you like a larger-than-life, “chesty” sound on male voice, set this control ON,
which allows band 1 and band 2 to be gated independently.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
The amount of bass boost will depend on the fundamental frequency of a given
voice. If the fundamental frequency is far above 100Hz, there will be little voice energy in the bottom band and little or no audio bass boost can occur even if the gain
of the bottom band is higher than the gain of its neighbor. As the fundamental frequency moves lower, more of this energy leaks into the bottom band, so you hear
more bass boost. If the fundamental frequency is very low (a rarity), there will be
enough energy in the bottom band to force significant gain reduction, and you will
hear less bass boost than if the fundamental frequency were a bit higher.
If the GATE THRESH (Gate Threshold) control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS boost setting
is disabled.
HF ENHANCER (“High Frequency Enhancer”) is a program-adaptive 6 dB/octave
shelving equalizer with a 4 kHz turnover frequency. It constantly monitors the ratio
between high frequency and broadband energy and adjusts the amount of equalization in an attempt to make this ratio constant as the program material changes. It
can therefore create a bright, present sound without over-equalizing material that is
already bright.
B1-B5 DRIVE (“Band 1-5 Input Drive”) controls provide further equalization capability. This set of controls can be used like a graphic equalizer to get a different “flavor” of equalization from that provided by the other equalizer controls. Because the
crossovers have 18dB/octave slopes, this equalization is quite frequency-selective by
comparison to graphic equalizers with which you may be familiar. To prevent excessive coloration and headroom problems, the range of these controls is limited to
3dB. Thus, the multiband drive controls should be used to fine-tune equalization
provided by the other equalizers.
LOWPASS (“Lowpass Filter Cutoff Frequency”) allows you to decrease (but not increase) the low-pass cutoff frequency compared to its setting in active transmission
preset. See step (6.B) on page 2-22.
LPF SHAPE (“Lowpass Filter Shape”) allows you to decrease (but not increase) the
low-pass filter’s shape compared to its setting in active transmission preset. See step
(6.C) on page 2-23.
HIGHPASS (“Highpass Filter Cutoff Frequency”) allows you to increase (but not decrease) the highpass cutoff frequency compared to its setting in active transmission
preset. See step (6.D) on page 2-24.
AGC Controls
Several of the AGC controls are common to the Full Control and Advanced Control
screens, with additional AGC controls available in the Advance Modify screen, as
noted in the following table. (Note that “advanced” controls are accessible only
from 9300 PC Remote software.)
3-23
3-24
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
These controls are explained in detail below.
Each Factory Preset has a LESS-MORE control that adjusts on-air loudness by altering
the amount of processing. LESS-MORE simultaneously adjusts all of the processing
controls to optimize the trade-offs between unwanted side effects.
If you wish, you may adjust the Advanced Control parameters to your own taste.
Always start with LESS-MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible. Then
edit the Advanced Control parameters using the Advanced Control screen, and save
those edits to a User Preset.
AGC (“AGC Off/On”) control activates or defeats the AGC.
It is usually used to defeat the AGC when you want to create a preset with minimal
processing (such as a classical or fine arts preset). The AGC is also ordinarily defeated
if you are using a studio level controller (like Orban’s 6300). However, in this case it
is better to defeat the AGC globally in System Setup.
AGC DRIVE control adjusts signal level going into the slow dual-band AGC, and
therefore determines the amount of gain reduction in the AGC. This also adjusts the
“idle gain” — the amount of gain reduction in the AGC section when the structure
is gated. (It gates whenever the input level to the structure is below the threshold of
gating.)
The total amount of gain reduction in the 9300 processing is the sum of the gain reduction in the AGC and the gain reduction in the multiband compressor. The total
system gain reduction determines how much the loudness of quiet passages will be
increased (and, therefore, how consistent overall loudness will be). It is determined
by the setting of the AGC DRIVE control, by the level at which the console VU meter
or PPM is peaked, and by the setting of the MULTIBAND DRIVE (compressor) control.
AGC REL (“AGC Master Release”) control provides an adjustable range from 0.5
dB/second (slow) to 20 dB/second (fast). The increase in density caused by setting the
AGC Controls
Full Control Name
AGC
AGC DRIVE
AGC REL
AGC GATE
AGC B CPL
AGC METR
-----------------
Advanced Name
AGC Off/On
AGC Drive
AGC Master Release
AGC Gate Threshold
AGC Bass Coupling
AGC Meter Display
AGC Window Size
AGC Ratio
AGC Window Release
AGC Bass Threshold
AGC Idle Gain
AGC Bass Attack
AGC Master Attack
AGC Bass Release
Table 3-3: AGC Controls
Range
Off/On
–10 ... 25 dB
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2 … 20 dB/S
Off, –44 ... –15 dB
Off, 12 … 0 dB
Master, Delta
–25 … 0 dB
2:1, 3:1, 4:1, infinity:1
0.5 … 20 dB
–12.0 … 2.5 dB
–10 … +10 dB
1 … 10
0.2 … 6
1 … 10 dB/sec
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
AGC RELEASE control to fast settings sounds different from the increase in density
caused by setting the multiband compressor’s MULTIBAND RELEASE control to FAST,
and you can trade the two off to produce different effects.
Unless it is purposely speeded-up (with the AGC RELEASE control), the automatic
gain control (AGC) that occurs in the AGC prior to the multiband compressor makes
audio levels more consistent without significantly altering texture. Then the multiband compression and associated multiband clipper audibly change the density of
the sound and dynamically re-equalize it as necessary (booming bass is tightened;
weak, thin bass is brought up; highs are always present and consistent in level).
The various combinations of AGC and compression offer great flexibility:

Light AGC + light compression yields a wide sense of dynamics, with a small
amount of automatic re-equalization.

Moderate AGC + light compression produces an open, natural quality with
automatic re-equalization and increased consistency of frequency balance.

Moderate AGC + moderate compression gives a more dense sound, particularly
as the release time of the multiband compressor is sped up.

Moderate AGC + heavy compression (particularly with a FAST multiband release
time) results in a “wall of sound” effect, which may cause listener fatigue.

Adjust the AGC (with the AGC DRIVE control) to produce the desired amount of
AGC action, and then fine-tune the compression and clipping with the 9300
processing’s controls.
AGC GATE (“AGC Gate Threshold”) control determines the lowest input level that
will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD-AM; lower levels are considered to be
noise or background sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate,
effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
There are two independent gating circuits in the 9300. The first affects the AGC and
the second affects the multiband compressor. Each gate has its own threshold control.
The multiband compressor gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the
multiband compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in
those bands when the gate first turns on. This prevents obvious midrange coloration
under gated conditions, because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain.
The gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest frequency bands
(forcing the gain of the highest frequency band to be identical to its lower
neighbor), and independently sets the gain of the lowest frequency band according
to the setting of the DJ BASS boost control (in the Equalization screen). Thus, without introducing obvious coloration, the gating smoothly preserves the average
overall frequency response “tilt” of the multiband compressor, broadly maintaining
the “automatic equalization” curve it generates for a given piece of program material.
3-25
3-26
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
If the MB GATE THR (Gate Threshold) control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS
control is disabled.
AGC B CPL (“AGC Bass Coupling”) control clamps the amount of dynamic bass boost
(in units of dB) that the two-band AGC can provide.
The AGC processes audio in a master band for all audio above approximately 200Hz,
and a bass band for audio below approximately 200Hz. The AGC B CPL control determines how closely the on-air balance of material below 200Hz matches that of
the program material above 200Hz.
The AGC Master and Bass compressor sidechains operate without internal coupling.
The gain reduction in the Bass audio path is either the output of the Bass compressor sidechain or the output of the Master band sidechain. The AGC BASS COUPLING
control sets the switching threshold. For example, if the AGC BASS COUPLING control
is set to 4 dB and the master gain reduction is 10 dB, the bass gain reduction in the
audio path cannot decrease below 6 dB (10 – 4 = 6 dB) even if the gain reduction
signal from the Bass compressor sidechain is lower. However, the bass gain reduction
can be larger than the master gain reduction without limit. In the previous example,
the bass gain reduction could be 25 dB.
The normal setting of the AGC BASS COUPLING control is 0 dB, which allows the AGC
bass band to correct excessive bass as necessary but does not permit it to provide a
bass boost.
AGC METR (“AGC Meter Display”) determines what the AGC meter shows the
gain reduction of the slow two-band AGC processing that precedes the multiband
compressor. Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction. MASTER displays the gain reduction of
the Master (above-200 Hz) band. DELTA displays the difference between the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands.
Although it is located in the Full Control screen (to make it easy for a preset developer to switch meter modes), this control is not part of the active preset and its setting is not saved in User Presets, unlike the other controls in the Full Control screens.
The meter mode always reverts to MASTER when the user leaves Full Control.
Advanced AGC Controls
The following AGC controls are available only in the 9300 PC Remote software.
AGC Window Size determines the size of the floating “slow zone” window in the
master band of the AGC. (The Bass band is not windowed.)
The window works by slowing down changes in the AGC gain reduction that are
smaller than the AGC WINDOW SIZE. The window has 2:1 asymmetry around the current AGC gain reduction. For example, if the AGC WINDOW SIZE is set to 4 dB, the
window extends 4 dB in the release direction and 2 dB in the attack direction.
If the AGC needs to respond to a large change in its input level by making a gain
change that is larger than the window, then the AGC’s attack and release controls
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
determine the AGC’s response time. However, if the change in input level is smaller
than the window size, the AGC WINDOW RELEASE control determines the attack and
release times. This is usually much slower than the normal AGC time constants. This
prevents the AGC from building up density in material whose level is already well
controlled.
The previous explanation was somewhat simplified. In fact, the window has “soft
edges.” Instead of switching abruptly between time constants, the attack and release times morph smoothly between the setting of the WINDOW RELEASE control and
the setting of the AGC master release and attack controls.
The normal setting for the AGC WINDOW SIZE is 3dB.
AGC Window Release (see AGC WINDOW SIZE above.)
AGC Bass Threshold determines the compression threshold of the bass band in the
AGC. It can be used to set the target spectral balance of the AGC.
As the AGC B CPL control is moved towards “100%,” the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control affects the sound less and less.
The interaction between the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control and the AGC B CPL control is a bit complex, so we recommend leaving the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control at
its factory setting unless you have a good reason for readjusting it.
AGC Ratio determines the compression ratio of the AGC. The compression ratio is
the ratio between the change in input level and the resulting change in output
level, both measured in units of dB.
AGC Idle Gain. The “idle gain” is the target gain of the AGC when the silence gate
is active. Whenever the silence gate turns on, the gain of the AGC slowly moves towards the idle gain.
The idle gain is primarily determined by the AGC DRIVE setting — a setting of 10 dB
will ordinarily produce an idle gain of –10 dB (i.e., 10 dB of gain reduction). However, sometimes you may not want the idle gain to be the same as the AGC DRIVE
setting. The AGC IDLE GAIN control allows you to add or subtract gain from the idle
gain setting determined by the AGC DRIVE setting.
You might want to do this if you make a custom preset that otherwise causes the
gain to increase or decrease unnaturally when the AGC is gated.
For example, to make the idle gain track the setting of the AGC DRIVE control, set
the AGC IDLE GAIN control to zero. To make the idle gain 2 dB lower than the setting
of the AGC DRIVE control, set the AGC IDLE GAIN control to –2.
AGC Bass Attack sets the attack time of the AGC bass compressor (below 200Hz).
AGC Master Attack sets the attack time of the AGC master compressor (above
200Hz).
3-27
3-28
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
AGC Bass Release sets the release time of the AGC bass compressor.
Clipper Controls
B1-B5 Clip Thresh controls set the thresholds of four clippers in Orban’s patented
embedded multiband distortion-canceled clipper in units of dB with reference to the
final clipper. These clippers are embedded in the multiband crossover so that any
distortion created by clipping is rolled off by part of the crossover filters. The band
1+2 clipper operates on the sum of bands 1 and 2; these bands are not clipped separately.
The threshold of the Band 1+2 clipper is usually set between 2 dB and 6 dB below
the threshold of the final limiter in the processing chain, depending on the setting
of the LESS-MORE control in the parent preset on which you are basing your Modify
adjustments. This provides headroom for contributions from the other three bands
so that bass transients don’t smash against the back-end clipping system, causing
overt intermodulation distortion between the bass and higher frequency program
material.
Some 9300 users feel that the band 1+2 clipper unnecessarily reduces bass punch at
its factory settings. As you raise the threshold of the clipper, you will get more bass
but also more distortion and pumping. Be careful when setting this control; do not
adjust it casually. Listen to program material with heavy bass combined with spectrally sparse midrange material (like a singer accompanied by a bass guitar) and listen for IM distortion induced by the bass’ pushing the midrange into the clipping
system. In general, unless you have a very good reason to set the control elsewhere,
we recommend leaving it at the factory settings, which were determined following
extensive listening tests with many types of critical program material.
This advice also holds for the thresholds of the other band clippers. These clippers
prevent audible distortion in the final clipper and their settings are very critical.
MB CLIP (“Multiband Clipper”) control adjusts signal level going into the multiband clippers and therefore determines the amount of peak limiting done by clipping. Range is –4dB to +5dB.
Clipper Controls
Full Control Name
FINAL CLIP
MB CLIP
-----------
Advanced Name
Final Clip Drive
Multiband Clipping
B1+B2 Clip Threshold
Band 3 Clip Threshold
Band 4 Clip Threshold
Band 5 Clip Threshold
High Frequency Clipping
Table 3-4: Clipper Controls
Range
0 … +5.0 dB
–4.0 … +5.0
–16.00 … –1.25 dB, Off
–16.00 … –1.25 dB, Off
–16.00 … –1.25 dB, Off
–16.00 … –1.25 dB, Off
0…6
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
This control and the FINAL CLIP DRIVE control govern the trade-off between loudness
and distortion. Note that these ranges are relative, and do not indicate the exact
amount of clipping. 0dB refers to the average setting that we have found to be the
best compromise for many settings of the other controls.
If the MB RELEASE control is set to FAST or MFAST (medium-fast), perceived clipping
distortion will increase as the MB DRIVE control is advanced, and the MB CLIP control
may have to be turned down to compensate. To best understand how to make
loudness/distortion trade-offs, perhaps the wisest thing to do is to recall a factory
preset and then to adjust the LESS-MORE control to several settings throughout its
range. At each setting of the LESS-MORE control, examine the settings of the MB
DRIVE control, the MB CLIP control, and the FINAL CLIP drive control. This way, you
can see how the factory programmers made the trade-offs between the settings of
the various distortion-determining controls at various levels of processing.
HF Clipping determines the amount of protection provided by the 9300’s Band 5
multiband clipper. “0” is the preferred setting. Higher values will increase both
brightness and high frequency distortion. This control is for audio processing experts
only; it is important to listen to a very wide range of program material before deciding to set this control above 0. When the control is set above 0, there will definitely
be some program material that sounds harsh and distorted, so you must decide if
the trade-off against brighter sound and more vocal presence is acceptable to your
taste.
Final Clip (“Final Clip Drive”) adjusts the level of the audio driving the back end
clipping system that OPTIMOD-AM uses to control fast peaks. This control primarily
determines the loudness/distortion trade-off.
Turning up the FINAL CLIP control drives the final clipper and overshoot compensator
harder, reducing the peak-to-average ratio, and increasing the loudness on the air.
When the amount of clipping is increased, the audible distortion caused by clipping
also increases. Although lower settings of the FINAL CLIP control reduce loudness,
they make the sound cleaner.
If the RELEASE control is set to its faster settings, the distortion produced by the
back-end clipping system will increase as the MULTIBAND DRIVE control is advanced.
The FINAL CLIP DRIVE and/or the MULTIBAND LIMIT THRESHOLD controls may have to be
turned down to compensate. To best understand how to make loudness/distortion
trade-offs, perhaps the wisest thing to do is to recall a factory multiband preset, and
then to adjust the LESS-MORE control to several settings throughout its range. At
each setting of the LESS-MORE control, examine the settings of the MULTIBAND DRIVE
and MULTIBAND LIMIT THRESHOLD controls. This way, you can see how the factory programmers made the trade-offs between the settings of the various distortiondetermining controls at various levels of processing.
The 9300’s multiband clipping and distortion control system works to
help prevent audible distortion in the final clipper. As factory programmers, we prefer to adjust the FINAL CLIP control through a very narrow
range and to determine almost all of the loudness/distortion trade-off by
the setting of the Multiband Clipping control.
3-29
3-30
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Multiband Dynamics Processing
Multiband Controls
Full Name
MB DRIVE
MB GATE
DWNEXP TH
MB CLIP
HF CLIP
LESS-MORE
PARENT PRESET
-----
Advanced Name
Multiband Drive
Multiband Gate Threshold
Downward Expander
Multiband Clipping
High Frequency Clip Threshold
LESS-MORE Index
Parent Preset
High Frequency Limiter
B1/B2 XOVER
Range
0 ... 25
Off, –44 ... –15 dB
Off, –6.0 … 12.0 dB
–4.0 … +5.0
–16.00 … 0.0, Off
[read-only]; 1.0 … 10.0
[read-only]
Off, –23.8 ... 0.0 dB
100 Hz, 200 Hz
Table 3-5: Multiband Controls
MB DRIVE (“Multiband Drive”) control adjusts the signal level going into the fiveband compressor, hence determining the average amount of gain reduction in the
multiband compressor. Range is 25dB.
Adjust the MULTIBAND DRIVE control to your taste and format requirements. Used
lightly with slower multiband release times, the multiband compressor produces an
open, re-equalized sound. The multiband compressor can increase audio density
when operated at faster release times because it acts increasingly like a fast limiter
(not a compressor) as the release time is shortened. With faster release times, density also increases when you increase the drive level into the multiband compressor
because these faster release times produce more limiting action. Increasing density
can make sounds seem louder, but can also result in an unattractive busier, flatter, or
denser sound. It is very important to be aware of the many negative subjective side
effects of excessive density when setting controls that affect the density of the processed sound.
The MULTIBAND DRIVE interacts with the MULTIBAND RELEASE setting. With slower release time settings, increasing the MULTIBAND DRIVE control scarcely affects density.
Instead, the primary danger is that the excessive drive will cause noise to be increased excessively when the program material becomes quiet.
You can minimize this effect by carefully setting the MULTIBAND GATE THRESHOLD control to “freeze” the gain when the input gets quiet and/or by activating the singleended noise reduction.
When the release time of the multiband compressor is set to its faster settings, the
setting of the MULTIBAND DRIVE control becomes much more critical to sound quality
because density increases as the control is turned up. Listen carefully as you adjust it.
With these fast release times, there is a point beyond which increasing multiband
compressor drive will no longer yield more loudness, and will simply degrade the
punch and definition of the sound.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
We recommend no more than 10 dB gain reduction as shown on the meters for
band 3. More than 10dB, particularly with the FAST release time, will often create a
“wall of sound” effect that many find fatiguing.
To avoid excessive density with the FAST multiband release time, we recommend using no more than 5 dB gain reduction in band 3, and compensating for any lost
loudness by speeding up the MULTIBAND RELEASE instead. This is what we did in the
factory LESS-MORE presets for the FAST multiband release time.
MB REL (“Multiband Release”) control can be switched to any one of seven settings:
The Slow (SLOW and SLOW2) settings produce a very punchy, clean,
open sound that is ideal for Adult Contemporary, Soft Rock, Soft Urban,
New Age, and other adult-oriented formats whose success depends on
attracting and holding audiences for very long periods of time. The
SLOW and SLOW2 settings produce an unprocessed sound with a nice
sense of dynamic range. With these settings, the 9300 processing provides gentle automatic equalization to keep the frequency balance consistent from record to record (especially those recorded in different eras).
And for background music formats, these settings ensure that your sound
doesn’t lose its highs and lows. Because it creates a more consistent frequency balance between different pieces of source material than does
the Two-Band structure, SLOW is almost always preferable to the TwoBand structure for any popular music format.
The Medium Slow settings (MED and MED2) are appropriate for more
adult-oriented formats that need a glossy show-business sound, yet
whose ratings depend on maintaining a longer time spent listening than
do conventional Contemporary Hit Radio (CHR) formats. With the singleended noise reduction activated, it is also appropriate for Talk and News
MB Attack / Release / Threshold
Full Name
MB REL
Advanced Name
Multiband Release
-------------------------------
B1 Compression Threshold
B2 Compression Threshold
B3 Compression Threshold
B4 Compression Threshold
B5 Compression Threshold
B1 Attack
B2 Attack
B3 Attack
B4 Attack
B5 Attack
B1 Delta Release
B2 Delta Release
B3 Delta Release
B4 Delta Release
B5 Delta Release
Range
Slow, Slow2, Med, Med2, MFast, MFast2,
Fast
–16.0 … –1.5, Off
–16.0 … –1.5, Off
–16.0 … –1.5, Off
–16.0 … –1.5, Off
–16.0 … –1.5, Off
8 … 23ms, Off
8 … 23ms, Off
8 … 23ms, Off
8 … 23ms, Off
8 … 23ms, Off
–6 … 6
–6 … 6
–6 … 6
–6 … 6
–6 … 6
Table 3-6: MB Attack/Release Controls
3-31
3-32
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
formats. This is the sound texture for the station that values a clean, easyto-listen-to sound with a tasteful amount of punch, presence, and
brightness added when appropriate. This is an unprocessed sound that
sounds just right on music and voice when listened to on small table radios, car radios, portables, or home hi-fi systems.
The Medium Fast settings (MFAST and MFAST2) are ideal for a highly
competitive Contemporary Hit Radio (CHR) format whose ratings depend
on attracting a large number of listeners (high “cume”) but which does
not assume that a listener will listen to the station for hours at a time.
This is the major market competitive sound, emphasizing loudness as well
as clean audio. The sound from cut to cut and announcer to announcer is
remarkably consistent as the texture of music is noticeably altered to a
standard. Bass has an ever-present punch, there is always a sense of presence, and highs are in perfect balance to the mids, no matter what was
on the original recording.
The Fast setting is used for the TALK and SPORTS factory programming
formats. Processing for this sound keeps the levels of announcers and
guests consistent, pulls low-grade telephone calls out of the mud, and
keeps a proper balance between voice and commercials. Voice is the most
difficult audio to process, but these settings result in a favorable tradeoff between consistency, presence, and distortion.
It is possible to experiment with this sound for music-oriented programming as well. However, even with these settings, your sound is getting
farther away from the balance and texture of the input. We think that
this is as far as processing can go without causing unacceptable listener
fatigue. However, this sound may be quite useful for stations that are ordinarily heard very softly in the background because it improves intelligibility under these quiet listening conditions. Stations that are ordinarily
played louder will probably prefer one of the slower release times, where
the multiband compressor takes more gain reduction and where the AGC
is operated slowly for gentle gain riding only. These slower sounds are
less consistent than those produced by the FAST setting. Using SLOW
preserves more of the source’s frequency balance, making the sound less
dense and fatiguing when the radio is played loudly.
Bx THR (“Band x Compression Threshold”) controls set the compression threshold in
each band, in units of dB below the final clipper threshold. We recommend making
only small changes around the factory settings to avoid changing the range over
which the MB CLIPPING control operates. These controls will affect the spectral balance of the processing above threshold, but are also risky because they can strongly
affect the amount of distortion produced by the back-end clipping system.
MB GATE (“Multiband Gate Threshold”) control determines the lowest input level
that will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD-AM; lower levels are considered to
be noise or background sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate,
effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
There are two gating circuits in the 9300. The first affects the AGC and the second
affects the multiband compressor. Each has its own threshold control. The 9300’s in-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
put drives the AGC gate detector; the output of the 9300’s AGC drives the MB gate
detector.
The multiband compressor gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the
applicable multiband compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in those bands when the gate first turns on. This prevents obvious midrange
coloration under gated conditions, because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain.
The gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest frequency bands
(forcing the gain of the highest frequency band to be identical to its lower
neighbor), and independently sets the gain of the lowest frequency band according
to the setting of the DJ BASS boost control (in the Equalization screen). Thus, without introducing obvious coloration, the gating smoothly preserves the average
overall frequency response “tilt” of the multiband compressor, broadly maintaining
the “automatic equalization” curve it generates for a given piece of program material.
Note: If the MB GATE THRESH (Gate Threshold) control is turned OFF, the
DJ BASS control (in the Equalization screen) is disabled.
DwnExp Thr (“Downward Expander Threshold”) determines the level below which
the single-ended noise reduction system’s downward expander begins to decrease
system gain, and below which the high frequencies begin to become low-pass filtered to reduce perceived noise. Activate the single-ended dynamic noise reduction
by setting the DWNEXP THR control to a setting other than OFF.
The single-ended noise reduction system combines a broadband downward expander with a program-dependent low-pass filter. These functions are achieved by introducing extra gain reduction in the multiband
compressor. You can see the effect of this extra gain reduction on the
gain reduction meters.
Ordinarily, the gating on the AGC and multiband limiter will prevent objectionable build-up of noise, so you will want to use the single-ended
noise reduction only on unusually noisy program material. Modern commercial recordings will almost never need it. We expect that its main use
will be in talk-oriented programming, including sports.
Band Mix
Full Name
B2>B1 CPL
B1 OUT
B2 OUT
B3 OUT
B4 OUT
B5 OUT
-----------
Advanced Name
B2>B1 Coupling
B1 Output Mix
B2 Output Mix
B3 Output Mix
B4 Output Mix
B5 Output Mix
B1 On/Off
B2 On/Off
B3 On/Off
B4 On/Off
B5 On/Off
Range
0 ... 100 %
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
Band On, Band Off
Band On, Band Off
Band On, Band Off
Band On, Band Off
Band On, Band Off
Table 3-7: MB Band Mix Controls
3-33
3-34
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Please note that it is impossible to design such a system to handle all
program material without audible side effects. You will get best results if
you set the DWNEXP THR control of the noise reduction system to complement the program material you are processing. The DWNEXP THR
should be set higher when the input is noisy and lower when the input is
relatively quiet. The best way to adjust the DWNEXP THR control is to start
with the control set very high. Reduce the control setting while watching
the gain reduction meters. Eventually, you will see the gain increase in
sync with the program. Go further until you begin to hear noise modulation — a puffing or breathing sound (the input noise) in sync with the
input program material. Set the DWNEXP THR control higher until you can
no longer hear the noise modulation. This is the best setting.
Obviously, the correct setting will be different for a sporting event than
for classical music. It may be wise to define several presets with different
settings of the DWNEXP THR control, and to recall the preset that complements the program material of the moment.
Note also that it is virtually impossible to achieve undetectable dynamic
noise reduction of program material that is extremely noisy to begin
with, because the program never masks the noise. It is probably wiser to
defeat the dynamic noise reduction with this sort of material (traffic reports from helicopters and the like) to avoid objectionable side effects.
You must let your ears guide you.
B2>B1 CPL control determines the extent to which the gain of band 1 (below 100Hz
or 200Hz, depending on crossover setting) is determined by and follows the gain of
band 2 (centered at 400Hz). Set towards 100% (fully coupled) it reduces the amount
of dynamic bass boost, preventing unnatural bass boost in light pop and talk formats. Set towards 0% (independent), it permits frequencies below 100Hz (the
“slam” region) to have maximum impact in modern rock, urban, dance, rap, and
other music where bass punch is crucial.
HF CLIP (“High Frequency Clipper Threshold”) sets the threshold of clipping in
bands 4 and 5 with reference to the overall threshold set by the MB CLIP control. The
range is 0 to +6dB. We have made this control available for some major-market customers who prefer a brighter sound at the expense of audible distortion on a significant amount of program material. We recommend a setting of 0 for all program
material.
This control is for audio processing experts only; it is important to listen to a very
wide range of program material before deciding to set this control above 0. When
the control is set above 0, there will definitely be some program material that
sounds harsh and distorted and you must decide if the trade-off against brighter
sound and more vocal presence is acceptable to your taste.
Advanced Multiband Controls
The following Advanced Multiband controls are available only from 9300 PC Remote
software.
B1-B5 Out (“Band 1-5 Output Mix”) controls determine the relative balance of the
bands in the multiband compressor. Because these controls mix after the band compressors, they do not affect the compressors’ gain reductions and can be used as a
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
graphic equalizer to fine-tune the spectral balance of the program material over a
3 dB range.
Their range has been purposely limited because the only gain control element after
these controls is the back-end clipping system (including the final clipper and overshoot compensator), which can produce considerable audible distortion if overdriven. We have carefully tuned the thresholds of the individual compressors to prevent audible distortion with almost any program material. Large changes in the frequency balance of the compressor outputs will change this tuning, leaving the 9300
more vulnerable to unexpected audible distortion with certain program material.
Because all these controls are located before the compressor, you should make large
changes in EQ with the bass and parametric equalizers, the HF enhancer, and the individual band drive controls. The compressors will protect the system from unusual
overloads caused the chosen equalization. Use the output mix controls only for finetuning and spend time with a variety of program material to make sure that your
adjustments have not caused excessive clipping distortion.
You can also get a similar effect by adjusting the compression threshold
of the individual bands. This is comparably risky with reference to clipper
overload, but unlike the MB BAND MIX controls, does not affect the frequency response when a given band is below threshold and is thus producing no gain reduction.
B1-B5 On/Off switches allow you to listen to any band (or any combination of
bands) independently. This is a feature designed for intermediate or advanced users
and developers when they are creating new 9300 presets.
Please note that a single band will interact with the back-end clipping system quite
differently than will that band when combined with all of the other bands. Therefore, do not assume that you can tune each band independently and have it sound
the same when the clipping system is processing all bands simultaneously.
B1-B5 Attack (Time) controls set the speed with which the gain reduction in each
band responds to level changes at the input to a given band’s compressor. These
controls are risky and difficult to adjust appropriately. They affect the sound of the
processor in many subtle ways. The main trade-off is “punch” (achieved with slower
attack times) versus distortion (because slower attack times increase overshoots that
must be eliminated in the clipping system). The results are strongly programdependent and must be verified with listening tests to a wide variety of program
material.
The ATTACK time controls are calibrated in arbitrary units. Higher numbers correspond to slower attacks.
Delta Release controls are differential controls. They allow you to vary the release
time in any band of the Five-Band compressor/limiter by setting an offset between
the MULTIBAND RELEASE setting and the actual release time you achieve in a given
band. For example, if you set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium-fast and the
BAND 3 DELTA GR control to –2, then the band 3 release time will be the same as if
you had set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium and set the BAND 3 DELTA GR
control to 0. Thus, your settings automatically track any changes you make in the
3-35
3-36
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
MULTIBAND RELEASE control. In our example, the release time in band 3 will always be
two “click stops” slower than the setting of the MULTIBAND RELEASE control.
If your setting of a given DELTA RELEASE control would otherwise create a release
slower than “slow” or faster than “fast” (the two end-stops of the MULTIBAND
RELEASE control), the band in question will instead set its release time at the appropriate end-stop.
B1/B2 Xover (Band 1 to Band 2 Crossover Frequency) sets the crossover frequency
between bands 1 and 2 to either 150 Hz or 200 Hz. It significantly affects the bass
texture, and the best way to understand the differences between the two crossover
frequencies is to listen.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
Test Modes
The Test Modes screen allows you to switch between OPERATE, BYPASS, and SINE, and
SQUARE. When you switch to BYPASS or either tone mode (sine wave or square wave),
the preset you have on air is saved and will be restored when you switch back to
OPERATE.
The sine and square frequencies are adjustable. The triangle frequency is
fixed at 100 Hz.
Table 3-8: Test Modes (below) shows the facilities available.
BYPASS PROTECT sets the threshold of a clipper in the bypass signal chain. It allows
you to protect a transmitter in case excessive signal level is applied to the input of
the 9300 while in BYPASS mode.
BYPASS HPF (Highpass Filter) allows you to protect your transmitter by keeping
the 9300’s highpass filter to the bypass signal chain. The active System Preset determines the filter’s cutoff frequency.
Setup: Test
Parameter
Labels
MODE
Units
Default
Range (CCW to CW)
Step
---
Operate
---
BYPASS GAIN
BYPASS PROTECT
BYPASS HPF
SINE FREQ
dB
%
--Hz
0.0
100
Out
400
SQUARE FREQ
Hz
400
SINE/TRINGL MOD
SQUARE MOD
%
%
100
30
Operate, Bypass, Sine, Square,
Triangle
18 … +25
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 105
Out, In
16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50,
63, 80, 100, 125, 160,
200, 250, 315, 400, 500,
630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000,
2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,
6300, 8000, 9500, 10000, 12500,
15000
16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50,
63, 80, 100, 125, 160,
200, 250, 315, 400, 500,
630, 800, 1000
0 … 121
0 … 50
1
LOG
LOG
1
1
Table 3-8: Test Modes
Using the 9300 PC Remote Control Software
9300 PC Remote control software allows you to access any front-panel 9300 control.
In addition, you can access all of the Advanced Control controls that are unavailable
from the 9300’s front panel. The software also gives you the ability to backup user
3-37
3-38
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
presets, system files, and automation files on your computer’s storage devices (hard
drives, floppy drives, etc.) and to restore them later to your 9300.
The 9300 PC Remote software can connect to your 9300 via modem, direct serial cable connection, or Ethernet network. It communicates with your 9300 via the TCP/IP
protocol, regardless of how it is connected to your 9300.
PC Remote works best on displays of 1024x768 pel or higher. Scroll bars
will appear when using lower resolutions.
Before running 9300 PC Remote, you must have installed the appropriate Windows
communications services on your computer. By default, the installer installs a shortcut to 9300PC.exe on your desktop and in your Start Menu under Orban\Optimod
9300.
9300 PC Remote can control only one 9300 at a time, but it can readily switch between several 9300s. 9300 PC Remote has a built-in “address book” that allows it to
select and connect to:

any 9300 on the same network as the PC,

a 9300 that can be accessed through a modem connected to the PC via dial-up
networking, and,

a 9300 that is connected directly to the PC’s serial port.
Before your PC can communicate with a given 9300, you must first set up a “connection,” which is information that allows PC Remote to locate and communicate with
the 9300.
To set up a new connection:
A) Launch 9300PC.exe.
B) Create a new 9300 connection by choosing NEW 9300 from the CONNECT file
menu or by right-clicking on the ALL CONNECTIONS icon in the Connections List
and selecting NEW 9300.
The Connection Properties dialog box opens.
C) Enter an Alias name for your 9300 (like “KABC”).
D) Leave the password field blank to prompt the user to enter a password when
initiating a connection.
Refer to Security And Passcode Programming on page 2-38.
Otherwise, enter a password to allow PC Remote to connect to your 9300
without requiring a password when the connection is initiated.
To initiate a successful connection, a password must have already been
entered into your 9300 unit.
E) If you are communicating with your 9300 through a network, select the
Ethernet radio button and enter the appropriate IP address, subnet mask,
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
port, and gateway data. Note that these values must agree with the values
that you set in your 9300 (see step 1 on page 2-42). See also Setting Up
Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections on page 2-46.
If you are communicating via a direct serial cable connection or a modem
connection, follow the appropriate procedure described in Appendix:
Setting up Serial Communications, starting on page 2-51.
F) Click OK after entering all required information.
To initiate communication:
Initiate communication by double-clicking on the desired
9300 alias in the Connections List, or by selecting the desired 9300 alias from the CONNECT drop down menu.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying
your connection.

If a warning message appears stating: “No password is set at the 9300…”
go to your 9300 unit and enter a passcode.

If an Enter Passcode dialog box appears, enter a valid passcode and the
9300 PC Remote software will initiate a connection to the 9300 unit.
A window will appear saying, “Connecting to the 9300, please wait.” A few moments later, a new message will appear: “Loading system files, please wait.”
When run, the Orban PC Remote software installer makes copies of all 9300 factory preset files on your local hard drive. The PC Remote software reads these
files to speed up its initialization. If any of these files have been deleted or damaged, the PC Remote software will refresh them by downloading them from the
9300. If the PC Remote software needs to do this, it can substantially increase the
time required for the software to initialize, particularly through a slow modem
connection.
All communications between your Optimod and PC Remote are encrypted and all
transient files that PC Remote writes to your computer’s hard drive are encrypted
as well.
When this download is finished, the main meters will appear.
A wheel mouse is the quickest and easiest interface to use — you will rarely (if
ever) have to use the keyboard.
The help box at the bottom of the screen always presents a short help message
for the function you have selected.
To modify a control setting:
A) Choose PROCESSING PARAMETERS from the EDIT menu.
3-39
3-40
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
B) Select menu tabs for LESS-MORE, Stereo Enhancer, and EQ to access Basic Control controls. All other menu tabs contain Full or Advanced Control controls.
You can reset any Basic Control Control without losing LESS-MORE functionality; Full and Advanced Control control adjustments will cause LESSMORE to be grayed-out.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then adjust it by
dragging it with the mouse or moving the wheel on the mouse.
You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad to adjust any
control.
To recall a preset:
A) Choose RECALL PRESET from the FILE menu to bring up the OPEN PRESET FILE
dialog box.
B) Click the desired preset within the dialog box to select it.
C) Double-click the desired preset or select it and click the RECALL PRESET button
to put it on-air.
Continually clicking the RECALL PRESET button will toggle between the
current and previous on-air presets.
D) Click DONE to dismiss the OPEN PRESET FILE dialog box.
The folder on your hard drive containing the preset files (both Factory
and User) is automatically synchronized to the contents of its associated
9300’s memory each time 9300 PC Remote connects to that 9300. The
9300’s memory is the “master.” This means that if you delete a user preset from the 9300’s memory (whether locally via its front panel or via
9300 PC Remote), 9300 PC Remote will automatically erase this preset
from this folder on your computer. To archive a preset permanently, you
must use the Backup function (see page 3- 40).
To save a user preset you have created:
A) Select SAVE PRESET AS from the FILE menu to bring up the SAVE AS Dialog Box.
The current preset name will appear in the File Name field.
B) Click in the field, and edit it.
C) Click SAVE to save the preset to the 9300 as a User Preset.
If you have made edits to a previously existing user preset, you can select
SAVE PRESET from the FILE menu to overwrite the pre-existing user preset
automatically.
To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto
your computer’s hard drive:
A) Select BACKUP TO PC from the FILE Menu.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
B) Click OK.
PC Remote will offer three options:
 Save User Presets, system files, and automation in plain text.
This allows the presets and files to be read with any text editor program
and to be readily exchanged between Optimod users.
 Save User Presets, system files, and automation files using the session passcode to encrypt them.
 Save User Presets, system files, and automation files using the password of
your choice to encrypt them.
The encryption options prevent archived presets, system files, and automation files from being restored if the user does not have the password
used for the encryption. There is no “back door” — Orban cannot help
you to decrypt a preset whose password is unknown.
All User Preset, system, and automation files are copied from your Optimod’s internal memory to a folder called “backup” on your PC. This
folder is a subfolder of the folder named the same as the alias of the Optimod that you are backing up.
This folder name (“backup”) and location are hard-coded into the software. If you wish to move the backup files somewhere else later, use a
file manager (like Explorer) on your computer.
To make more than one backup archive, rename the current backup
folder (for example, to “Backup1”). 9300 PC Remote will create a new
backup folder the next time you do a backup, leaving your renamed
backup folder untouched. Later, you will be able to restore from any
folder — the Restore dialog box allows you to choose the folder containing the files to be restored
If you attempt to back up a preset with the same name as a preset existing in the Backup folder, but with a different date, 9300 PC Remote will
warn you and will allow you to overwrite the preset in the Backup folder
or to cancel the operation. If you wish to keep the existing archived preset, you can first use a file manager to move the existing user preset in
the Backup folder to another folder and then repeat the backup operation.
To restore archived presets, system files, and automation files:
In addition to restoring an archived preset to its original Optimod, you can also
copy archived presets from one Optimod to another. The Optimod whose connection is active will receive the preset.
If the preset, system file, or automation file was encrypted when it was originally
saved, PC Remote will request the password under which it was encrypted.
All User Presets are compatible with all 9300 software versions. If Orban
adds new controls to a software version, the new software will assign a
reasonable default value to any control missing in an old User Preset. If
you archive such a User Preset after restoring it, the newly written ar-
3-41
3-42
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
chive file will now include the new controls (with the default values,
unless you edit any of these values before you re-archive the preset).
A) Select RESTORE FROM PC from the FILE menu.
A standard Windows dialog box will open.
B) Select the type of files you want to restore using the FILES OF TYPE field at
the bottom of the dialog box.
You can select to restore all 9300 user presets (*.orb93user), system files
(*.orb93setup), and automation files (*.orb93autom).
If you want to restore files from a different directory (i.e., that might
have been created on a different 9300), navigate to that directory from
within the dialog box.
C) To restore a single user preset:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orb93user, *.orbu).
b) Select the desired preset in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
D) To restore all the user presets from a specific location:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orb93user, *.orbu)
b) Highlight all the user presets in the dialog window
c) Click the RESTORE button.
E) To restore a system file:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the System Setup file type (*.orb93setup).
b) Select the desired system file in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
F) To restore an automation file:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the Automation file type (*.orb93autom)
b) Select the desired automation file in the dialog box
c) Click the RESTORE button.
G) Click DONE to dismiss the RESTORE dialog box.
To share an archived User Preset between 9300s:
A) Navigate to the directory containing the desired User Preset from within the
RESTORE FROM PC dialog box
B) Click the RESTORE button.
This User Preset will be downloaded to the 9300 to which 9300 PC Remote is currently connected.
If the User Preset is encrypted, PC Remote will request its password.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
To modify INPUT/OUTPUT and SYSTEM SETUP:
Choose SETUP from the TOOLS menu.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then use the wheel on
the mouse to adjust it. You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad
to adjust any control.
To modify AUTOMATION:
C) Choose AUTOMATION from the TOOLS menu.
An Automation Dialog box will open.
D) Click the NEW EVENT to create a new event
Controls to set the event type and time are available on the right hand
side of the dialog box.
E) Check the ENABLE AUTOMATION check box at the top of the dialog box to enable automation.
To group multiple 9300s:
Right-click ALL CONNECTIONS in the Connections List and select NEW GROUP.
You can add multiple 9300 to a single group to help organize a network
of 9300. However, only one 9300 from within a group can be connected
to 9300 PC Remote at any one time.
Navigation Using the Keyboard
In general, PC Remote uses standard Windows conventions for navigation.
Navigate around the screens using the TAB key. Use CTRL-TAB to move to the next
tabbed screen in PC Remote.
Use the + and – keys or the left and right arrow keys on the numeric keypad to adjust control settings.
To Quit the Program
Use standard Windows conventions: Press ALT-F4 on the keyboard, or click the X on
the upper right corner with the mouse.
About Aliases created by Optimod 9300 PC Remote Software
When you ADD A NEW 9300 using Optimod 9300 PC Remote, your 9300 is automatically given a 9300 Alias name to differentiate it from other 9300s. You can change
the name anytime in the 9300 Properties window inside 9300 PC Remote.
3-43
3-44
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 9300
When you add a new 9300 or change the name of an existing 9300 Alias, an Alias
folder is created in the same location as the executable for Optimod 9300 PC Remote (usually \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 9300). The folder has the same name as
the Alias name. Once you establish the initial connection to the 9300, all presets for
that 9300 are automatically copied to the Alias folder; thus, the folder contains all
the preset files for that 9300, both Factory and User. If you have backed up the 9300
using 9300 PC Remote, there will also be a “backup” subfolder located within the
Alias folder.
Archived user preset files are text files and can be opened in a text editor
(like Notepad) if you want to examine their contents.
Alias folders and their associated backup subfolders are registered in your PC’s Registry. This prevents folders from being accidentally deleted or moved. If you move or
delete Alias folders from the PC, the Alias folders recreate themselves in the previous location and restore their contents by copying it from their associated 9300s
when 9300 PC Remote connects to such a 9300.
Multiple Installations of Optimod 9300 PC Remote
Rarely, you may want to have more than one installation of 9300 PC Remote on your
computer. There are a few extra things to know if you have multiple installations.
If you install a new version of the Optimod 9300 PC Remote software on your PC,
any Alias folders and backup subfolders created in an earlier software version still
remain in their original location on your PC (and in its registry).
The version of 9300 PC Remote must match the version of the software in the 9300
controlled by it. Therefore, you will only need multiple installations of PC Remote
(having separate version numbers) if:

you are controlling multiple 9300s, and

not all of your 9300s are running the same version of 9300 software, and

you do not want to upgrade at least one controlled 9300 to the latest version of
9300 PC Remote software.
Each version of 9300 PC Remote has its own top-level folder, normally under
\Program Files\Orban. (The default folder is \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 9300.)
When you install a new version of 9300 PC Remote, the default behavior is to overwrite the old version, which is usually the desired behavior. To prevent the installer
from overwriting the old version, you must specify a different installation folder
when you install the new version (for example, \Program Files\Orban\Optimod
9300v2).
Each version of 9300 PC Remote will display all 9300 Aliases, even those pointing to
9300s with incompatible version numbers. If you attempt to connect to an older version of 9300 from a newer version of 9300 PC Remote, 9300 PC Remote will offer to
upgrade the software in the target 9300 so that it corresponds to the version of
9300 PC Remote that is active. If you attempt to connect to newer version of 9300
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
OPERATION
from an older version of 9300 PC Remote, it will refuse to connect and will emit an
error message regarding incompatible versions.
If you decide to install the new software to a different location on your PC, new Aliases created using the new software will not be located in the same place as the old
Aliases.
To Move Alias Folders:
Even though each version of 9300 PC Remote can see all aliases, you may wish to
move the corresponding folders so they are under the folder corresponding to the
highest version of 9300 PC Remote that is currently installed on your computer (although this is not required). If your Alias folders reside in different locations, you
can move all the Alias folders to the same location by using the PC Remote software.
Do not use an external file manager to do this. The old Alias folders need to be recreated under the Optimod 9300 PC Remote software you wish to use (so that the
registry entries can be correctly updated). You can do this two different ways.

Rename the Alias (preferred): Start the Optimod 9300 PC Remote executable
you wish to use and rename your old Aliases with a slightly different name. A
new Alias folder with the new name will be created in the same location as the
Optimod 9300 PC Remote executable.

Delete and Recreate the Alias: Start the Optimod 9300 PC Remote executable
you wish to use. Delete the old 9300 Aliases and create new ones to replace
them. New Alias folders will be created in the same location as the Optimod
9300 PC Remote executable.
Important: The deletion process will automatically erase its associated
folder, including the Backup directory. If you have anything in the
Backup directory that you wish to keep, you should therefore move that
directory elsewhere (or transfer the desired files to another, active
backup directory).
Ordinarily, the erasure process will move the Backup directory to your
computer’s Recycle Bin, so you can recover a Backup directory that you
have accidentally deleted in this way.
To share an archived User Preset between 9300s:
A) Navigate to the directory containing the desired User Preset from within the
RESTORE FROM PC dialog box
B) Click the RESTORE button.
This User Preset will be downloaded to the 9300 to which 9300 PC Remote is currently connected.
3-45
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
Section 4
Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
The 9300 OPTIMOD-AM Audio Processor uses highly stable analog and digital circuitry throughout. Recommended routine maintenance is minimal.
1. Periodically check audio level and gain reduction meter readings.
Become familiar with normal audio level meter readings, and with the normal
performance of the G/R metering. If any meter reading is abnormal, see Section 5
for troubleshooting information.
2. Listen to the 9300's output.
A good ear will pick up many faults. Familiarize yourself with the “sound” of the
9300 as you have set it up, and be sensitive to changes or deterioration. However, if problems arise, please do not jump to the conclusion that the 9300 is at
fault. The troubleshooting information in Section 5 will help you determine if
the problem is with OPTIMOD-AM or is somewhere else in the station's equipment.
3. Periodically check for corrosion.
Particularly in humid or salt-spray environments, check for corrosion at the input
and output connectors and at those places where the 9300 chassis contacts the
rack.
4. Periodically check for loss of grounding.
Check for loss of grounding due to corrosion or loosening of rack mounting
screws.
5. Clean the front panel when it is soiled.
Wash the front panel with a mild household detergent and a damp cloth. Do not
use stronger solvents; they may damage plastic parts, paint, or the silk-screened
lettering. Do not use paper-based cleaning towels, or use cleaning agents containing ammonia, or alcohol. An acceptable cleaning product is “Glass Plus.” For
best results when cleaning the lens, use a clean, lint-free cloth.
4-1
4-2
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Subassembly Removal and Replacement
See page 6-21 for the Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections diagram.
1. Removing the Top Cover:
To access any internal board (including the display assembly), you must remove
the top cover.
A) Disconnect the 6300 and remove it from the rack.
Be sure power is disconnected before removing the cover.
Warning: Hazardous voltage is exposed with the unit open and the
power ON. Parts of the power supply that are shielded by an insulating
cover are hot to the AC line. These parts are labeled with a warning symbol like the one to the left of this paragraph. The insulating cover should
always be in place when the 6300 is connected to the AC line.
B) Set the unit upright on a padded surface with the front panel facing you.
C) Remove all screws holding the top cover in place and lift the top cover off.
Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
2. Removing the Front Panel Assembly:
A) Detach the cables that connect the display board assembly to the control
board. Avoid bending or breaking the pins. Note the lead dress so you can reassemble the unit correctly.
B) Detach the front panel from the unit.
a) On each side of the chassis, remove the three screws close to the front
panel.
b) Remove the front panel by sliding it out.
C) Set the front panel, face down, on a soft cloth to prevent scratches.
D) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the four hex nuts holding the two
side brackets and central shield to the front panel. Remove the brackets and
shield and set them aside.
E) Using a #1 Philips screwdriver, remove and reserve the eight screws and spacers that fasten the display board assembly to the front panel.
F) Lift the display board assembly off its supporting standoffs.
G) Separate the two boards in the display board assembly by carefully unplugging the top board from the bottom board. Note that there are four plugs
and jacks.
3. Removing the Control board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
B) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the four hex nuts holding the DB-25
and DB-9 connectors to the rear panel of the chassis.
C) If you have not done so yet, remove the cables that connect the display assembly to the control board (step 2 on page 4-2).
D) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the control board to the I/O+DSP
board.
E) Using a #1 Philips screwdriver, remove the four corner screws holding the control board to the chassis standoffs.
F) The control board is now free and can be removed from the chassis.
4. Removing the I/O+DSP (Input/Output+DSP) Board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Unlock all XLR connectors, using a jeweler's screwdriver: engage the locking
mechanism (in the center of the triangle formed by the three contact pins)
and turn counterclockwise until the XLR connector is no longer attached.
C) Remove the cable that connects the I/O board to the control board.
D) Remove the short two-conductor cable that connects the I/O+DSP board to
the control board.
E) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the power supply to the control
board. There are two connectors; unplug both. Note the lead dress so you can
reassemble the unit correctly.
F) Remove the twelve #1 Phillips screws (and their washers) that connect the
I/O+DSP board to the chassis.
G) Carefully pull the I/O+DSP board toward the front panel to clear the XLRs
from their housings. Then lift the board out of the chassis.
5. Removing the Power Supply:
IMPORTANT: The power supply has no user serviceable components because replacing components with other than exact replacements could cause the supply
to become unsafe and/or to generate unacceptable EMI. If the power supply
fails, please contact Orban Customer Service ([email protected]) to obtain an
exact replacement.
A) Verify that the 6300 is disconnected from the AC line.
B) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
C) Remove the screw holding the power supply’s insulating cover and remove
the cover.
For safety, this cover must always be in place when the 6300 is connected
to the AC line.
D) Remove the plug that connects the power supply to the AC line socket.
4-3
4-4
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 9300
E) Unplug the cable connecting the output of the power supply to the I/O+DSP
board.
F) Using a hex nutdriver, remove the threaded standoff that supports the power
supply’s insulating cover.
G) Remove the three Phillips screws holding the power supply to the main chassis.
H) Carefully lift the power supply up to remove it.
6. Reattaching the Power Supply:
A) Set power supply into main chassis, so that it aligns with its associated standoffs.
B) Thread, but do not tighten, the three Phillips screws that hold the power supply board to the main chassis.
C) Thread the long threaded standoff in the remaining mounting hole. Tighten
it firmly.
D) Tighten the three Phillips screws that hold the power supply board to the
main chassis.
E) Reattach the plug that connects the power supply to the AC line socket.
F) Reattach the cable that connects the power supply board to the I/O+DSP
board.
G) Secure the insulating cover to the long standoff. This cover must be replaced
for safety.
7. Replacing the Control board and I/O Board+DSP board:
Referring to steps 3 and 4, follow the instructions in reverse.
8. Replacing the Front Panel Assembly:
A) Set the front panel, face down, on a soft cloth to prevent scratches.
B) Lightly reattach the bottom and top circuit boards by mating the four plugs
and jacks. Use care to align the pins with the jacks so that all pins are correctly
aligned and no pins are bent. Do not push the pins all the way into the jacks
yet; leave room between the upper and lower boards for spacers.
C) Reattach the board assembly to the front panel using the eight #1 Philipshead screws and spacers removed in step (2.E) on page 4-2:
a) Thread each screw through a spacer placed between the upper and lower
circuit boards.
b) Push down the top board until it rests on the spacers.
c) Align the screws with the threaded standoffs on the front panel.
d) Evenly tighten all eight screws to reattach the board assembly to the panel.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
D) Place the two side brackets over the captive screws located on each side of the
front panel. Be sure that the large side of each bracket is oriented toward the
rack-screw cutouts in the panel.
E) Place the metal shield over the captive screws on each side of the front panel.
Align the shield so that its cutouts are aligned with the cables attached to the
circuit board assembly. Using a 3/16” nut driver, screw four hex nuts onto the
captive screws.
F) Attach the front panel assembly to the unit:
a) Verify that all cables are dressed through cutouts in the shield.
b) Slide the front panel assembly into the front of the chassis so that the three
threaded holes in the side brackets line up with the holes in the sides of the
chassis.
c) Attach the front panel assembly by screwing the six screws removed in step
2.B)a) on page 4-2 into the holes in the sides of the chassis.
G) Reattach the four cables that connect the display board to the base board.
Each cable has a different type or size of connector, so it is obvious which cable mates with which jack on the base board.
Carefully align the cables and connectors to avoid bending the pins.
9. Replacing the Top Cover:
A) Place the cover on the unit and reattach the Phillips screws. (Be careful not to
pinch any cables.)
Field Audit of Performance
Required Equipment:

Ultra-low distortion sine-wave oscillator / THD analyzer / audio voltmeter
(With verified residual distortion below 0.01%. Audio Precision System
One, or similar high-performance system.)
(The NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD is an excellent source of
test signals when used with a high-quality CD player.)

Spectrum analyzer with tracking generator (for making frequency response
tests)
(Stanford Research Systems SR760 or equivalent. Alternatively, a sweep
generator with 50-9,500 Hz logarithmic sweep can be used with an oscilloscope in X/Y mode, or you can use a computer-controlled test set like
the Audio Precision System One. )

Digital voltmeter
4-5
4-6
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Accurate to ±0.1%.

Oscilloscope
DC-coupled, triggered sweep, with 5M Hz or greater vertical bandwidth.

Two 620 ±5% resistors.

Optional: Audio Precision System 1 (without digital option) or System 2 (for digital tests).
It is assumed that the technician is thoroughly familiar with the operation of this
equipment.
This procedure is useful for detecting and diagnosing problems with the 9300's performance. It includes checks of frequency response, noise and distortion performance, and output level capability.
This performance audit assesses the performance of the analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converters and verifies that the digital signal processing section (DSP)
is passing signal correctly. Ordinarily, there is a high probability that the DSP is performing the dynamic signal processing correctly. There is therefore no need to
measure such things as attack and release times — these are defined by software
and will automatically be correct if the DSP is otherwise operating normally.
It is often more convenient to make measurements on the bench away from high RF
fields which could affect results. For example, in a high RF field it is very difficult to
accurately measure the very low THD produced by a properly operating 9300 at
most frequencies. However, in an emergency it is usually possible to detect many of
the more severe faults that could develop in the 9300 circuitry even in high-RF environments.
See the assembly drawings in Section 6 for component locations. Be sure to turn the
power off before removing or installing circuit boards.
Follow these instructions in order without skipping steps.
Note: To obtain an unbalanced output, jumper pin 1 (ground) to pin 3, and measure
between pin 1 (ground) and pin 2 (hot).
Note: All analog output measurements are taken with a 620 ±5% resistor tied between pin 2 and 3 of the XLR connector.
1. Prepare the unit.
A) Use the front panel controls to set the 9300's software controls to their default settings, as follows:
a) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > ANLG IN CALIB. After writing down the old
settings (so you can restore them later), set controls as follows:
Input ............................................................................................. analog
AI Ref VU ................................................................................... +4.0 dBu
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
R CH BAL.........................................................................................0.0 dB
b) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > INPUT > DIG IN CALIB. Set controls as in the
table below:
DI Ref VU ................................................................................ –15.0 dBFS
R CH BAL.........................................................................................0.0 dB
c) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > OUTPUT > ANALOG1/ANALOG2. Set controls as
follows:
AO #1 100% ............................................................................ +10.0 dBu
AO #2 100% ............................................................................ +10.0 dBu
POLARITY .................................................................................... Positive
d) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > OUTPUT > DIGITAL. Set controls as follows,
using the NEXT button to access controls as necessary:
DO 100% ................................................................................. –2.8 dBFS
DO RATE .......................................................................................32 kHz
DO SYNC.....................................................................................internal
DO Word Len ...................................................................................... 20
DO Dither ..........................................................................................Out
DO FORMAT ....................................................................................AES3
POLARITY .................................................................................... Positive
PRE EMPH ...........................................................................................Flat
e) Navigate to SETUP > TEST. Set controls as follows:
MODE ........................................................................................... Bypass
NOTE: Bypass defeats all compression, limiting, and program equalization, providing a “flat” bypass channel.
BYPASS GAIN ....................................................................................0 dB
BYPASS HPF ........................................................................................Out
BYPASS PROTECT ........................................................................... 100%
SINE TRNGL MOD........................................................................... 100%
SQUARE MOD .................................................................................. 25%
SINE/TRNGLE FREQ.......................................................................... 400.0
SQUARE FREQ ................................................................................. 400.0
2. Adjust Analog Output Level Trim.
A) Verify 9300 software controls are set to their default settings. [Refer to step
(1.A) on page 4-6.]
B) Feed the 9300 output with the built-in 400 Hz test tone:
a) Navigate to SETUP > TEST.
b) Set the MODE to SINE.
C) Connect the audio voltmeter to the Left Analog Output.
4-7
4-8
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 9300
D) Adjust output trim VR200 to make the meter read +10.6 dBu. (0 dBu = 0.775V
rms.) Verify a frequency reading of 400 Hz.
E) Verify THD+N reading of <0.05% (0.02% typical) using a 22 kHz low pass filter
in the distortion analyzer.
F) Set the MODE to BYPASS.
BYPASS defeats all compression, limiting, and program equalization but
retains preemphasis.
G) Verify a reading (noise) of <–80 dBu at the output of the unit.
H) Using VR201, repeat steps (C) through (G) for the Right Analog Output.
3. Check frequency response of Analog I/O.
A) Verify 9300 software controls are set to their default settings. [Refer to step
(1.A) on page 4-6.]
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (2.F)].
C) Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector.
D) Inject the Analog Input XLR connector with a level of +10 dBu with the oscillator set to 100 Hz.
E) Connect the audio analyzer to the 9300's Left Analog Output XLR connector.
F) Verify a level of +10 dBu ±1 dB. Use this level as the reference level.
G) Verify that frequency response at 50 Hz, 100 Hz, 400 Hz, 5 kHz, and 15 kHz is
within ±0.1 dB of the reference level.
This procedure tests the analog input circuitry, the A/D converter, the
DSP, the DAC, and the analog output circuitry.
H) Repeat steps (C) through (G) for the right channel.
4. Check distortion performance of Analog I/O.
A) Verify 9300 software controls are set to their default settings. (Refer to page
4-6.)
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (2.F)].
C) Connect a THD analyzer to the Left Analog Output #1 XLR connector. Set the
THD analyzer's bandwidth to 22 kHz.
D) Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector.
E) For each frequency used to measure THD, adjust the output level of the oscillator to make the COMP meter on the 9300 read 100.
F) Measure the THD+N at the frequency levels listed below.
Frequency
50 Hz
100 Hz
THD+N Typical
0.015%
0.015%
THD+N Maximum
0.03%
0.03%
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
Frequency
400 Hz
1 kHz
2.5 kHz
5 kHz
7.5 kHz
9.5 kHz
MAINTENANCE
THD+N Typical
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
THD+N Maximum
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
G) Repeat these measurements for Analog Output #2.
H) Disconnect the oscillator and THD analyzer from the 9300.
5. Test Digital Sample Rate Converter (Receiver).
A) Verify 9300 software controls are set to their default settings. (Refer to page
4-6.)
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (2.F)].
C) Navigate to SETUP > DIG IN CALIB and Set the INPUT to DIGITAL.
D) Connect the digital source generator to the AES3 Digital Input XLR connector
of the 9300.
E) Set the frequency of the digital source generator to 400 Hz and its output
level to 6 dB below full scale.
F) Set the word length of the digital source generator to 24-bit. In turn, set the
generator to emit 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz sample
rates. Listen to the analog outputs of the 9300 and verify that the output
sounds clean and glitch-free regardless of the source sample rate.
G) Leave the digital source generator connected to the 9300.
6. Test Digital Sample Rate Converter (Transmitter).
A) Connect an AES3 analyzer (like the Audio Precision System 2) to the 9300’s
AES3 digital output.
B) Set the sample rate of the digital source generator to 48 kHz.
C) On the 9300, navigate to SETUP > DIG OUT CALIB.
D) Change the 9300’s DO RATE to 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz,
and verify that the frequencies measured at the 9300’s AES3 output follow
the values in the chart below within given tolerances:
Sample Rate
32.0 kHz
44.1 kHz
48.0 kHz
88.2 kHz
96.0 kHz
Tolerance (PPM)
100 PPM
100 PPM
100 PPM
100 PPM
100 PPM
E) Disconnect the digital source generator from the 9300.
Tolerance ( Hz)
±1.60 Hz
±4.41 Hz
±2.40 Hz
±8.82 Hz
±4.80 Hz
4-9
4-10
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 9300
7. Optional tests.
A) You can test each GPI (Remote Interface) input for functionality in the obvious way, by programming a function for it and then verifying that the function executes when you activate the input. To program a GPI input, see
Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-40.
B) You can test the RS-232 port for functionality by verifying that you can connect to a PC through a null modem cable. See Networking and Remote Control starting on page 2-42 (in particular, step 4 on page 2-44).
C) You have made all of the previous tests with the 9300 is BYPASS mode. In most
cases, these tests are sufficient to determine that the 9300 is working correctly. However, the BYPASS mode does not use all of the DSP chips, so the
previous tests may fail to detect faults in certain DSP chips. To verify that all of
the DSP chips are working correctly:
a) Connect the oscillator to both 9300’s analog inputs.
b) Navigate to SETUP > TEST and set the 8400’s operating mode to OPERATE.
c) Recall the GEN PURP MED preset.
d) Set the oscillator’s frequency to 400 Hz and its output level to create 10 dB
of gain reduction as indicated on the AGC MASTER gain reduction meter.
e) Connect the N&D test set to the 9300’s left Analog Output #1.
f) Navigate to SETUP > IO CALIB > OUTPUT > ANALOG1 > SOURCE and set the
9300’s left Analog Output #1 to emit the analog AM signal.
g) Verify that combined noise and distortion are below 0.1%.
h) Repeat steps (f) and (g) for the right Analog Output #2.
8. Return OPTIMOD-AM to service.
A) Remove the 620 resistors connected across the outputs.
B) Restore your normal operating parameters, using the notes you made in step
(1.A) on page 4-6.
C) Navigate to SETUP > TEST > MODE and choose OPERATE.
D) Recall your normal operating preset.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
Section 5
Troubleshooting
Problems and Potential Solutions
Always verify that the problem is not the source material being fed to the 9300, or
in other parts of the system.
RFI, Hum, Clicks, or Buzzes
A grounding problem is likely. Review the information on grounding on page 2-10.
The 9300 has been designed with very substantial RFI suppression on its analog and
digital input and output ports, and on the AC line input. It will usually operate adjacent to high-powered transmitters without difficulty. In the most unusual circumstances, it may be necessary to reposition the unit to reduce RF interference, and/or
to reposition its input and output cables to reduce RF pickup on their shields.
The AES3 inputs and output are transformer-coupled and have very good resistance
to RFI. If you have RFI problems and are using analog connections on either the input or output, using digital connections will almost certainly eliminate the RFI.
Poor Peak Modulation Control
The 9300 ordinarily controls peak modulation to an accuracy of ±2%. This accuracy
will be destroyed if the signal path (including the STL and transmitter) following the
9300 has poor transient response. Almost any link can cause problems. The transmitter itself is particularly likely to cause problems, especially if it is plate-modulated.
Section 1 of this manual contains a complete discussion of the various things that
can go wrong.
Digital STLs using lossy compression algorithms (including MPEG1 Layer 2, MPEG1
Layer 3, Dolby AC2, and APT-X) will overshoot severely (up to 3 dB) on some program material. The amount of overshoot will depend on data rate — the higher the
rate, the lower the overshoot.
Even if the transmission system is operating properly, the AM modulation monitor or
reference receiver can falsely indicate peak program modulation higher than that
actually being transmitted if the monitor overshoots at high and low frequencies.
Many commercial monitors have this problem, but most of these problem units can
be modified to indicate peak levels accurately.
Orban uses the Belar “Wizard” series of DSP-based monitors internally for testing,
because these units do not have this difficulty.
5-1
5-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Excessively Low Positive Peak Modulation
The polarity of the 9300’s active output might be reversed. You can test this by editing the POLARITY field in the active System Preset.
You may have not allowed enough peak headroom in the 9300’s output level setting. Achieving 125% modulation requires 2 dB of headroom. To achieve 125% positive modulation, you must therefore set the AOX OUT control to +18 dBu or lower, or
the DO OUT control to –2.0 dBfs or lower.
If you have a tube-type transmitter with high-level plate modulation, the modulator
tubes may be flat.
Audible Distortion On-Air
Make sure that the problem can be observed on more than one receiver and at several locations. Multipath distortion at the monitoring site can be mistaken for real
distortion (and will also cause falsely high modulation readings).
Verify that the source material at the 9300's audio inputs is clean. Heavy processing
can exaggerate even slightly distorted material, pushing it over the edge into unacceptability.
The subjective adjustments available to the user have enough range to cause audible distortion at their extreme settings. Many controls can cause distortion, including MULTIBAND CLIPPING and FINAL CLIP DRIVE. Setting the LESS-MORE control beyond
“9” will cause audible distortion of some program material with all but the Classical
and Protect presets. Further, the “Loud” family of presets can sometimes cause audible distortion with certain program material; this is the price to be paid for “competitive” loudness as it is defined in certain markets.
If you are using analog inputs, the peak input level must not exceed +27 dBu or the
9300's A/D converter will clip and distort.
Unlike earlier digital Optimods, there is no input peak level adjustment
for the A/D converter. Instead, we have provided adequate headroom for
virtually any plant. This is possible because the A/D converter in the 9300
has higher dynamic range than older designs, so we could eliminate a
control that was frequently misadjusted without compromising the
9300’s noise level.
If you are using an external processor ahead of the 9300, be sure it is not clipping or
otherwise causing problems.
The 9300's highly processed output puts great demands on transmitter performance
Some transmitters cannot handle the very high average power in the 9300's output
Section 1 discusses this in detail
The distortion of tube-type transmitters will increase substantially as the tubes go
flat with use The first thing to go is asymmetrical positive peak capability, so if it is
impractical to replace the modulator tubes at this time, reduce the setting of the
9300 POSITIVE PEAK control until the transmitter no longer compresses the peaks. In-
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
deed, some transmitters cannot handle asymmetrical positive peaks without compression even with good tubes, Never try to run these transmitters with asymmetry.
Audible Noise on Air
(See also “RFI, Hums, Clicks, or Buzzes” on page 5-1.)
Excessive compression will always exaggerate noise in the source material. The 9300
has two systems that fight this problem.
1. The compressor gate freezes the gain of the AGC and compressor systems whenever the input noise drops below a level set by the threshold control for the processing section in question, preventing noise below this level from being further increased. There are two independent compressor gate circuits in the 9300. The first
affects the AGC, while the second affects the Multiband Compressor. Each has its
own independent threshold control. (See MB GATE on page 3-32.)
2. The dynamic single-ended noise reduction (see DWNEXP THR on page 3-33) can be
used to reduce the level of the noise below the level at which it appears at the input.
If you are using the 9300's analog input, the overall noise performance of the system is usually limited by the overload-to-noise ratio of the analog-to-digital converter used by the 9300 to digitize the input. (This ratio is better than 108 dB.) It is
important to drive the 9300 with professional levels (more than 0 dBu reference
level) to achieve adequately low noise. (Clipping occurs at +27 dBu.)
The 9300's AES3 input is capable of receiving words of up to 24 bits. A 24-bit word
has a dynamic range of approximately 144 dB. The 9300's digital input will thus
never limit the unit's noise performance even with very high amounts of compression.
If an analog studio-to-transmitter link (STL) is used to pass unprocessed audio to the
9300, the STL's noise level can severely limit the overall noise performance of the
system because compression in the 9300 can exaggerate the STL noise. For example,
the overload-to-noise ratio of a typical analog microwave STL may only be 70-75 dB.
In this case, it is wise to use the Orban 6300 Studio AGC to perform the AGC function prior to the STL transmitter and to control the STL's peak modulation. This will
optimize the signal-to-noise ratio of the entire transmission system. An uncompressed digital STL will perform much better than any analog STL. (See StudioTransmitter Link, starting on page 1-9.)
Shrill, Harsh Sound
This problem can be caused by excessively high settings of the HF EQ control It can
also be caused (or at least exaggerated) by a transmitter with substantial distortion,
particularly at higher modulating frequencies
Audible Lowpass Filter Ringing
If you have set the system’s lowpass filter cutoff frequency at 5 or 6 kHz, you may
hear the filter ring audibly on some radios. This is an inevitable side effect of filter-
5-3
5-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 9300
ing that is selective enough to protect the RF channel to various government standards.
To reduce the audible effect of such ringing, minimize the amount of 5 or 6 kHz energy applied to the filter. The most effective way to do this is to implement preemphasis with the HF parametric equalizer instead of the HF shelving equalizer. By
boosting 3 kHz with the parametric equalizer, you will improve speech intelligibility
on narrowband radios, yet the parametric’s bell-shaped boost curve will produce
considerably less boost at 5 or 6 kHz than the HF shelving equalizer would have otherwise produced.
You can also exploit the LPF SHAPE control in the system presets. This control allows
you to set the system lowpass filter’s frequency response curve so that it is –0.1 dB,
–3 dB, or –6 dB at the cutoff frequency. By making the transition between the passband and stopband progressively more rounded and gentle, each step trades off
duller sound against less ringing.
Dull Sound
A narrowband antenna that truncates higher modulating frequencies is the most
likely cause. Inappropriately low settings of the HF EQ control can also cause it.
Also, bear in mind that most analog AM receivers have less than 3 kHz audio bandwidth so they will inevitably sound dull compared to full-bandwidth media.
Excessive Occupied Bandwidth
The active system preset determines the maximum audio bandwidth at the 9300’s
output. (This can be reduced within a User Preset, but not increased higher than the
setting in the active system preset.)
The 9300 has very tight spectral control that significantly exceeds the requirements
of all international regulatory authorities, including the FCC and ITU-R. Because DSP
software does the processing, there is very little that can go wrong with the 9300
that will increase its output bandwidth without causing an all-out failure of the
unit.
If a spectrum analyzer determines that the 9300 is creating excessive bandwidth by
itself, the likely culprits are the output D/A converter and the output line amplifier.
However, a far more likely cause is a misbehaving transmitter Any problem in the
transmitter that causes audio distortion will also increase occupied bandwidth Flat
tubes are particularly suspect.
Some older designs (like out-phasing modulation schemes) are notorious for causing
out-of-band radiation when processing audio with substantial preemphasis, like that
supplied by the 9300. After the out-phasing transmitter's exciter has been carefully
realigned, the only cure for any remaining excessive out-of-band radiation is to reduce the setting of the 9300's lowpass filter until the transmission is within specification. These old transmitters are prime candidates for replacement with a modern
transmitter, which will reduce AC power costs and sound much better on-air.
Negative overmodulation that causes carrier pinch-off will also cause the bandwidth
to increase rapidly. Older transmitters may respond better to negative modulation
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
slightly below 100%, as their distortion can rise rapidly as they approach 100%
modulation.
System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation
This is normal. Sine waves have a very low peak-to-average ratio by comparison to
program material. The processing thus automatically reduces their peak level to
bring their average level closer to program material, promoting a more consistent
and well-balanced sound quality.
The 9300 can generate test tones itself. The 9300 can also be put into Bypass mode
(locally or by remote control) to enable it to pass externally generated tones at any
desired level. (See Test Modes on page 3-37.)
System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) Tones
at the Legally Required Modulation Level
See System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation (directly above) for an
explanation. These tones should be injected into the transmitter after the 9300 or
the 9300 should be temporarily switched to BYPASS to pass the tones.
System Receiving 9300’s Digital Output Will Not Lock
Be sure that the 9300’s output sample rate is set match the sample rate that the
driven system expects. Be sure that the 9300’s FORMAT control (AES3 or SPDIF; in
System Setup) is set to match the standard expected by the driven system.
General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound Quality
The 9300 is a complex processor that can be adjusted for many different tastes. For
most users, the factory presets, as augmented by the gamut offered by the LESSMORE control for each preset, are sufficient to find a satisfactory “sound.” However,
some users will not be satisfied until they have accessed other Modify Processing
controls and have adjusted the subjective setup controls in detail to their satisfaction. Such users must fully understand the material in Section 3 of this manual to
achieve the best results from this exercise.
Compared to competitive processors, the 9300 offers a uniquely favorable set of
trade-offs between loudness, brightness, distortion, and buildup of program density.
If your radio station does not seem to be competitive with others in your market,
the cause is usually problems with the source material, overshoot in the transmission
link (particularly the transmitter/antenna system) following the 9300, or an inaccurate modulation monitor that is causing you to undermodulate the carrier. A station
may suffer from any combination of these problems, and they can have a remarkable effect upon the overall competitiveness of a station's sound.
Section 1 of this manual provides a thorough discussion of system engineering considerations, particularly with regard to minimizing overshoot and noise. Orban's
publication Maintaining Audio Quality in the Broadcast Facility (available for
download from www.orban.com) provides many suggestions for maximizing source
quality
Bear in mind that the average AM receiver has an audio bandwidth of 2-3 kHz and
relatively high amounts of nonlinear distortion. 9300 processing is specifically de-
5-5
5-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 9300
signed to make the best of this class of receiver Nevertheless, even at their best, such
radios can never yield truly high quality sound.
Further, almost all AM transmitters have a sound of their own. The very latest
transmitters (using digital modulation schemes) will create an on-air sound that is
audibly superior to transmitters of older design because the new transmitters have
dramatically lower nonlinear distortion. This improvement is not subtle and is readily audible even on average consumer radios.
Security Passcode Lost (When Unit is Locked Out)
Please see If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode on page 2-40.
Connection Issues between the 9300 and a PC, Modem, or Network

Presets: The more user presets you make, the more slowly the 9300 will respond
to front-panel commands. Delete any user presets you do not need.

Quick Setup: On the Station ID screen (Quick Setup 9): Use Escape in place of
Cancel. The Cancel button will not work.

Software Updates: Close any running Windows programs before attempting
to update.

Interrupted Software Updates: If you canceled an update before it completed, wait at least one minute before attempting your next update.

Software Updates via Modem: If you are updating via the modem, do not
change the “connection type” parameter on the 9300 while the modem is connected or attempting to connect.

Security Passcode: An ALL SCREENS (administrator) security passcode is required for upgrading, regardless of whether you are using a Direct, Modem, or
Ethernet connection.

Passcode Format: The passcode is case-sensitive. When entering it into Windows’ Dial-up Connection dialog box, it must be typed exactly as it was originally entered into the Security screen.

MAC Address: To see the MAC address of your Optimod’s Ethernet hardware,
hold down the SETUP button until the address appears.
Troubleshooting Connections

If you get an error message such as “the specified port is not connected” or
“There is no answer”…
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
You may have the wrong interface type set on your 9300. Navigate to SETUP >
NETWORK & REMOTE > PC CONNEC and check the interface setting.
If you are connecting via Direct Serial Connection or modem, review the Properties you have set on that connection. Double-check to ensure that you have set
Windows parameters as described in Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications on page 2- 51.

If your Direct Connect does not work:
A) Check to make sure that the cables are connected properly.
B) Check that you are using a null modem cable.
C) Ensure that the null modem cable is connected to the 9300’s serial connector.

If your Modem Connect does not work:
A) Ensure that the modem cables and phone lines are connected properly.
B) Check that you have entered the correct phone number for connection.
C) Check that you have entered the passcode correctly on the 9300 and the passcode has been entered correctly on your PC.
D) Ensure that you enabled the correct PC modem port settings.
E) Ensure that the external modem attached to your 9300 is set to AUTO ANSWER.
F) Make sure that the only “Allowed Network Protocol” is TCP/IP. “NetBUI” and
“IPX/SPX Compatible” must not be checked.

If you cannot connect to your computer through a crossover Ethernet cable:
You must set your Windows networking to provide a static IP address for your
computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server.
You Cannot Access the Internet After
Making a Direct or Modem Connection to the 9300:
If you are connected to the 9300 via modem or direct connect, you cannot access
any other TCP/IP connection. The PPP connection becomes the default protocol
and the default gateway defaults to the 9300 unit’s IP address. This means that
all existing network connections point to the 9300 unit. To correct this:
A) In Start > Settings > Network and Dialup Connections, open the direct or modem connection you are using to connect to 9300.
B) Select “Properties.”
C) Click the tab that reads “Networking.”
D) Highlight “Internet protocol (TCP/IP).”
E) Select “Properties.”
F) Select “Advanced.”
5-7
5-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 9300
G) Uncheck the “Use default gateway on remote network” box.
H) Select “OK.”
If this “Use default gateway on remote network” box is not selected, the
gateway will not point to the 9300 unit when you establish a direct or
modem connection.
OS-Specific Troubleshooting Advice
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:
A) Click “Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network and
Dialup Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 9300 - Direct”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 9300 - Direct
D) Click the “Networking” tab.
E) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet.”
F) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked.
Then click “OK.”
G) In “Components checked are used by this connection,” uncheck all except for
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).”
H) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
I) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
J) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
K) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
L) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “DNS” Tab.
M) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “WINS” Tab.
N) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
O) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window.
P) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
Q) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
R) Restart your computer. (This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood
that you will encounter problems connecting to the 9300.)
S) If you see: “Error 777: The connection failed because the modem (or other
connecting device) on the remote computer is out of order”:
The “remote computer” is actually the 9300 and it is not out of order;
you just need to set the Maximum Speed (Bits per second) to 115200. If
you already set this speed when you configured your PC ports, you
shouldn’t have this problem.
The 9300 communicates at 115200 bps. COM ports on some older PCs are
incapable of communications at this rate and may not work reliably.
Most newer PCs use 16550-compatible UARTS, which support the 115200
bps rate.
If you do see this warning message, you can reset the Maximum BPS
Speed by accessing PROPERTIES for the connection:
a) Click START > PROGRAMS > ACCESSORIES > COMMUNICATIONS > NETWORK
DIAL-UP CONNECTIONS.
AND
b) Right click the name of your connection and access “PROPERTIES.”
c) Go to the “GENERALS” TAB and select the “CONFIGURE” button.
d) Set the MAXIMUM SPEED (BPS) to 115200.
e) Select OK and try your connection again.
T) If you see: “Error 619: The specified port is not connected.”
Make sure the INTERFACE TYPE on the 9300 is correct:
a) On the 9300, go to SETUP > NETWORK & REMOTE > PC CONNEC.
b) Set PC CONNECT to DIRECT.
c) Try your connection again.
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:
A) Click “Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network and
Dialup Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 9300 - Modem”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 9300 – Modem”.
D) Click the “Properties” button.
E) Select the “General” tab and make sure that “Connect Using” displays the
correct modem and port.
5-9
5-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 9300
F) Click the “Configure…” button.
G) Set the “Maximum Speed (bps) to 115200.
H) Check the “Enable hardware flow control,” make sure all other hardware features are unchecked. Then click “OK.”
I) Click the “Networking” tab on the “Properties” window.
J) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet.”
K) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked.
Then click “OK.”
L) In “Components checked are used by this connection,” uncheck all except for
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).”
M) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
N) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
O) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
P) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
Q) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
R) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window.
S) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
T) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
U) Restart your computer.
Although not strictly necessary, this resets the serial port and reduces the
likelihood that you will encounter problems connecting to the 9300.
Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:
A) Click “Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 9300 - Direct”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 9300 - Direct.”
D) Click the “Networking” tab.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
E) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet”
F) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked,
then click “OK.”
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
H) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
I) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
J) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
K) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
M) On the “Properties” window for “Optimod 9300 – Modem” click the “Advanced” tab.
N) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
O) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
P) Restart your computer.
This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you will encounter problems connecting to the 9300.
Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s properties to make sure they are set up correctly.
A) Click “Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 9300 - Modem”
and choose “Properties.”
The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 9300 - Modem.”
C) Click the “Networking” tab.
D) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet”
E) Select the “Settings” button. Make sure all PPP settings are unchecked, and
then click “OK.”
5-11
5-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 9300
F) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button.
The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
H) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically.”
I) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
J) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings,” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
K) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
M) Restart your computer. (This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood
that you will encounter problems connecting to the 9300.)
Troubleshooting IC Opamps
IC opamps are operated such that the characteristics of their associated circuits are
essentially independent of IC characteristics and dependent only on external feedback components. The feedback forces the voltage at the (–) input terminal to be
extremely close to the voltage at the (+) input terminal. Therefore, if you measure
more than a few millivolts difference between these two terminals, the IC is probably bad.
Exceptions are opamps used without feedback (as comparators) and opamps with
outputs that have been saturated due to excessive input voltage because of a defect
in an earlier stage. However, if an opamp's (+) input is more positive than its (–) input, yet the output of the IC is sitting at –14 volts, the IC is almost certainly bad.
The same holds true if the above polarities are reversed. Because the characteristics
of the 9300's circuitry are essentially independent of IC opamp characteristics, an
opamp can usually be replaced without recalibration.
A defective opamp may appear to work, yet have extreme temperature sensitivity. If
parameters appear to drift excessively, freeze-spray may aid in diagnosing the problem. Freeze-spray is also invaluable in tracking down intermittent problems. But use
it sparingly, because it can cause resistive short circuits due to moisture condensation
on cold surfaces.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
Technical Support
If you require technical support, contact Orban customer service. Be prepared to describe the problem accurately. Know the serial number of your 9300  this is printed
on the rear panel of the unit. Current contact information is found at
http://www.orban.com/contact/.
Please check Orban’s website, www.orban.com, for Frequently Asked Questions and
other technical tips about 9300 that we may post from time to time. Manuals (in
.pdf form) and 9300 software upgrades will be posted there too—click “Downloads”
from the home page.
Factory Service
Before you return a product to the factory for service, we recommend that you refer
to this manual. Make sure you have correctly followed installation steps and operation procedures. If you are still unable to solve a problem, contact our Customer Service for consultation. Often, a problem is relatively simple and can be quickly fixed
after telephone consultation.
If you must return a product for factory service, please notify Customer Service by
telephone, before you ship the product; this helps us to be prepared to service your
unit upon arrival. When you return a product to the factory for service, we recommend that you include a letter describing the problem.
Please refer to the terms of your Limited Standard Warranty (see page 1-26), which
extends to the first end user. After expiration of the warranty, a reasonable charge
will be made for parts, labor, and packing if you choose to use the factory service facility. Returned units will be returned C.O.D. if the unit is not under warranty. Orban
will pay return shipping if the unit is still under warranty. In all cases, the customer
pays transportation charges to the factory (which are usually quite nominal).
Shipping Instructions
Use the original packing material if it is available. If it is not, use a sturdy, doublewalled carton no smaller than 7 (H) x 15.5 (D) x 22 (W)  18 cm (H) x 40 cm (D) x
56 cm (W), with a minimum bursting test rating of 200 pounds (91 kg). Place the
chassis in a plastic bag (or wrap it in plastic) to protect the finish, then pack it in the
carton with at least 1.5 inches (4 cm) of cushioning on all sides of the unit. “Bubble”
packing sheets, thick fiber blankets, and the like are acceptable cushioning materials; foam “popcorn” and crumpled newspaper are not. Wrap cushioning materials
tightly around the unit and tape them in place to prevent the unit from shifting out
of its packing.
Close the carton without sealing it and shake it vigorously. If you can hear or feel
the unit move, use more packing. Seal the carton with 3-inch (8 cm) reinforced fi-
5-13
5-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 9300
berglass or polyester sealing tape, top and bottom in an “H” pattern. Narrower or
parcel-post type tapes will not withstand the stresses applied to commercial shipments.
Mark the package with the name of the shipper, and with these words in red:
DELICATE INSTRUMENT, FRAGILE!
Insure the package properly. Ship prepaid, not collect. Do not ship parcel post. Your
Return Authorization Number must be shown on the label or the package will
not be accepted.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Section 6
Technical Data
Specifications
It is impossible to characterize the listening quality of even the simplest limiter or
compressor based on specifications, because such specifications cannot adequately
describe the crucial dynamic processes that occur under program conditions. Therefore, the only way to evaluate the sound of an audio processor meaningfully is by
subjective listening tests.
Certain specifications are presented here to assure the engineer that they are reasonable, to help plan the installation, and make certain comparisons with other
processing equipment.
Performance
Except as noted, specifications apply for measurements from the analog left/right input to
the analog left/right output.
Frequency Response (Bypass Mode): ±0.2 dB, 50 Hz–15 kHz, or as determined by usersettable high-pass filter in the active transmission preset.
Noise: Output noise floor will depend upon how much gain the processor is set for (Limit
Drive, AGC Drive, Two-Band Drive, and/or Multiband Drive), gating level, equalization,
noise reduction, etc. The dynamic range of the A/D Converter, which has a specified
overload-to–noise ratio of 110 dB, primarily governs it. The dynamic range of the digital
signal processing is 144 dB.
Total System Distortion (de-emphasized, 100% modulation): <0.01% THD, 20 Hz–1 kHz,
rising to <0.05% at 9.5 kHz. <0.02% SMPTE IM Distortion.
Polarity: The processing employs phase rotation to maximize loudness. Therefore, the polarity is frequency-dependent.
Processing Sample Rate: The 9300 is a “multirate” system, using internal rates from 32
kHz to 128 kHz as appropriate for the processing being performed. Audio clippers operate at 128 kHz.
Processing Resolution: Internal processing has 24 bit (fixed point) or higher resolution;
uses Motorola DSP56362 DSP chips.
Low-Pass Filter: 4.5, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 7.0, 7.5, 8.0, 8.5, 9.0, or 9.5 (NRSC) kHz as set by
user. Unit can be set up to comply easily with ITU-R and NRSC spectrum masks. Lowpass filter shape is parametric and can be set to be –0.1, –3, or –6 dB down at the cutoff
frequency (see Figure 2-7 on page 2-23).
6-1
6-2
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
High-Pass Filter: Constrained by user settable fifth-order “quasi-elliptical” highpass filter to
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, or 100 Hz. All filters have equal-ripple (Chebychev-like) passbands
and a 25 Hz notch for transmitter protection.
Channel Configuration: Processing is monophonic.
Installation
Analog Audio Input
Configuration: Stereo (Configurable to drive the processing selection with mono from left,
mono from right, or mono from sum).
Impedance: >10k load impedance, electronically balanced 1.
Nominal Input Level: Software adjustable from –4.0 to +13.0 dBu (VU).
Maximum Input Level: +27 dBu.
Connectors: Two XLR-type, female, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, Pins 2 (+) and
3 electronically balanced, floating and symmetrical.
A/D Conversion: 24 bit 128x oversampled delta sigma converter with linear-phase antialiasing filter. Converter outputs 64 kHz sample rate, which the 9300 then decimates to
32 kHz in DSP using an ultra-high-quality image-free synchronous sample rate converter.
Filtering: RFI filtered, with high-pass filter at 0.15 Hz (–3 dB).
Analog Audio Output
Configuration: Two monophonic outputs, capable to driving two transmitters. The two outputs have independent level controls.
Source Impedance: 351 (includes the third-order output EMI suppression network), electronically balanced and floating. The user can specify the output impedance in software
to calibrate the output level accurately into a bridging or 600 load.
Load Impedance: 600 or greater, balanced or unbalanced. Termination not required or
recommended.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): Adjustable from –6 dBu to +24 dBu peak, into 600
or greater load, software-adjustable.
Polarity: When the POLARITY control (located in the active System Preset) is set to POSITIVE,
a positive-going signal at pin 2 of the XLR-type connector corresponds to positive modulation.
Signal-to-Noise: >= 90 dB unweighted (Bypass mode, de-emphasized, 20 Hz–9.5 kHz
bandwidth, referenced to 100% modulation).
Distortion: <= 0.01% THD (Bypass mode, de-emphasized) 20 Hz–9.5 kHz bandwidth.
Connectors: Two XLR-type, male, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, Pins 2 (+) and 3
electronically balanced, floating and symmetrical.
D/A Conversion: 24 bit 128x oversampled.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
1
No jumper selection available for 600. Through-hole pads are available on I/O module for userinstalled 600 termination.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Digital Audio Input
Configuration: Stereo per AES3 standard, 24 bit resolution, software processing selection
of mono from left, mono from right or mono from sum.
Sampling Rate: 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz, automatically selected.
Connector: XLR-type, female, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, pins 2 and 3 transformer balanced and floating, 110 impedance.
Input Reference Level: Variable within the range of –30 dBFS to –10 dBFS.
J.17 Deemphasis: Software-selectable.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Digital Audio Output
Configuration: Dual-channel per AES3 standard. Each channel carries an identical monophonic signal.
Sample Rate: Internal free running at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz, selected in software.
Can also be synced to the AES3 digital input at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2 or 96 kHz, as configured in software.
Word Length: Software selected for 24, 20, 18, 16 or 14-bit resolution. First-order highpass
noise-shaped dither can be optionally added. Dither level automatically adjusted appropriately for the word length.
Connector: XLR-type, male, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, pins 2 and 3 transformer balanced and floating, 110 impedance.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): –20.0 to 0.0 dBFS software controlled. Level must
be set lower than –2.0 dBfs to prevent clipping positive peaks at 125% modulation.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Remote Computer Interface
Configuration: TCP/IP protocol via direct cable connect, modem, or Ethernet interface.
Modem is not supplied.
Serial Port: 115 kbps RS–232 port DB–9 male, EMI-suppressed.
Ethernet Port: 10 or 100 Mbit/sec on RJ45 female connector.
Remote Control (GPI) Interface
Configuration: Eight (8) inputs, opto-isolated and floating.
Voltage: 6–15V AC or DC, momentary or continuous. 12 VDC provided to facilitate use with
contact closure.
Connector: DB-25 male, EMI-suppressed.
Control: User-programmable for any four of user presets, factory presets, bypass, test tone,
mono L mode, mono R mode, mono sum mode, analog input, digital input, clock reset,
status bit pass/block, and Transmission presets.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Power
Voltage: Universal switching power supply, 85–264 VAC, 50–60 Hz, 30 VA.
Connector: IEC, EMI-suppressed. Detachable 3-wire power cord supplied.
Fuse: 2.5A 20mm Quick Acting HBC, mounted on the power supply circuit board.
Grounding: Circuit ground is hard-wired to chassis ground.
6-3
6-4
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Safety Standards: ETL listed to UL standards, CE marked.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 32 to 122 F / 0 to 50 C for all operating voltage ranges.
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
Dimensions (W x H x D): 19” x 1.75” x 14.25” / 48.3 cm x 4.5 cm x 36.2 cm. One rack unit
high.
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
RFI/EMI: Tested according to Cenelec procedures. FCC Part 15 Class A device.
Shipping Weight: 19 lbs / 8.7 kg
Warranty
Two Years, Parts and Service: Subject to the limitations set forth in Orban's Standard
Warranty Agreement.
Because engineering improvements are ongoing, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Circuit Description
This section provides a detailed description of user-serviceable circuits used in the
9300. We do not provide detailed descriptions of the digital circuitry because most
of this is built with surface-mount components that cannot be removed or replaced
with tools typically available in the field. Field repair ordinarily consists of swapping
entire PC boards.
The section starts with an overview of the 9300 system, identifying circuit sections
and describing their purpose. Then each user-repairable section is treated in detail
by first giving an overview of the circuits followed by a component-by-component
description.
The drawing on page 6-21 shows circuit board locations.
Overview
The Control Circuits control the DSP, display, and Input/Output sections of the 9300
system.
The Input Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital
audio inputs, the digital sync input, and the circuitry to interface these inputs to the
digital processing.
The Output Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital audio outputs, and the circuitry to interface the digital processing to these outputs.
The DSP Circuits implement the bypass, test tone, and audio processing using digital
signal processing.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
The Power Supply provides power for all 9300 circuit sections.
A block diagram of the DSP signal processing appears on page 6-41.
Control Circuits
The control circuit is based on an AMD Elan SC520 microprocessor, which is a 586class processor running an Orban executable program over a third-party real-time
operating system. A flash memory emulates a hard drive. The memory is non-volatile
and does not rely on a battery to retain information when mains power is off.
The flash memory holds the operating system, the Orban executable program, and
all preset files, both factory and user. It also contains a write-protected “boot segment” that functions as a boot ROM.
The control circuits process and execute user-initiated requests to the system. The
source of these requests is the front panel buttons and rotary encoder, the rear
panel RS-232 port, Ethernet port, and the remote contact closures. These changes
affect hardware function and/or DSP processing. The control circuits also send information to the LCD display, the LED bar graphs, and the control status indicators.
The control circuit communicates with the DSP and display circuitry through the
SC520’s General Purpose bus.
The SC520 periodically refreshes a watchdog timer. If the timer times out without
being refreshed, it assumes that the control program has crashed and automatically
reboots the SC520. The DSP chips will continue to process audio until the time comes
to reload DSP program code into them. At this point, the audio will mute for about
a second until the DSP code download has finished. If you hear a short audio mute
on air, this may be because the 9300 has rebooted for some reason. (Of course, it
could also be caused by the 9300’s audio feed’s being interrupted.) Be prepared to
convey this fact to Orban customer service if you call for technical assistance.
The control board contains interface circuitry, the CPU, the Ethernet interface chip,
the flash memory, the DRAM, the RS-232 serial interface circuitry, the GPI/O interface
circuitry, and the real-time clock, which keeps time for the 9300’s automation functions. The real-time clock is backed up by a DL2032 battery so that it keeps accurate
time even when the 9300 is powered down. The battery is socketed and can be
readily accessed by removing the 9300’s top cover; the battery is located on the control board.
User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits
The user control interface enables the user to control the 9300’s functionality. A rear
panel GPI connector allows optically isolated remote control of certain functions,
such as recalling presets, via contact closure. An RS-232 serial port and an Ethernet
port allow you to connect a modem or computer to the 9300. Front panel pushbutton switches select between various operational modes and functions. A rotary encoder allows the user to adjust parameters and enter data.
6-5
6-6
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
1. Remote Interface and RS-232 Interfaces
Located on control board
A remote interface connector and circuitry implements remote control of certain
operating modes; Optimod 9300 has eight remote contact closure inputs.
A valid remote signal is a momentary pulse of current flowing through remote
signal pins. Current must flow consistently for 50msec for the signal to be interpreted as valid. Generally, the 9300 will respond to the most recent control operation, regardless of whether it came from the front panel, remote interface, or
RS-232.
Component-Level Description:
After being current limited by resistors, the GPI control signals are applied to
two quad optoisolators, U17, 19, and then to the control circuitry.
U12 is the RS323 port interface chip. It is socketed for easy field replacement in
the event of overload, lightning damage, etc. All other circuitry is surfacemount and is not field-repairable.
2. Switch Matrix and LED Indicators
Located on display board
Eleven front panel pushbutton switches are arranged in a matrix, configured as
three columns and four rows. These switches are the primary element of the
physical user interface to the 9300 control software. The host microprocessor
controls the system setup and function of the DSP according to the switch / rotary encoder entered commands, the AES status bits from the digital input signal,
the RS-232, and the remote control interface status. The microprocessor updates
the LED control status indicators accordingly.
Component-Level Description:
S1-S11 are the front panel pushbutton switches. CR11-CR15 are the front panel
LED control status indicators. The control microprocessor communicates with
these components through the General Purpose bus, which is buffered via IC3.
3. LED Meter Circuits
Located on display board
The meter LEDs are arranged in an 8x16 matrix, in rows and columns.
Each row of LEDs in the matrix has a 1/8 duty cycle ON time. The rows are multiplexed at a fast rate so that the meters appear continuously illuminated. Via the
General Purpose bus, the DSP sends meter data values to the control microprocessor, which sends the appropriate LED control words (eight bits at a time) to the
data latches that drive the LEDs directly.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Component-Level Description:
The meter LED matrix consists of ten 10-segment LED bar graph assemblies
(CR1-CR9, CR16) and one discrete LED (CR10). Row selector latches IC4, IC5,
IC6, and IC9 are controlled by the host microprocessor and alternately sink current through the LEDs selected by column selector latches IC1 and IC2, which
are also controlled by the SC520. IC1 and IC2 drive the selected row of LEDs
through current limiting resistor packs RP1 and RP2.
Input Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the analog and digital inputs to the DSP. The analog input
stages scale and buffer the input audio level to match it to the analog-to-digital
(A/D) converter. The A/D converts the analog input audio to digital audio. The digital input receiver accepts AES3-format digital audio signals from the digital input
connector and sample rate-converts them as necessary. The digital audio from the
A/D and SRC is transmitted to the DSP.
1. Analog Input Stages
Located on input/output/DSP board
The RF-filtered left and right analog input signals are each applied to a floating,
balanced amplifier that has an adjustable (digitally controlled) gain. Analog
switches set the gain. The outputs of a latch set the state of the switches. By writing data to the latch, the control circuits set the gain to correspond to what the
user specifies via the front panel controls. The gain amplifier’s output feeds a circuit that scales, balances, and DC-biases the signal. This circuit feeds an RC lowpass filter that applies the balanced signal to the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter.
The digitally controlled gain circuitry was included on the circuit board
for possible use in future products. In the 9300, its gain is preset so that
the A/D will clip at +27 dBu with respect to the 9300’s analog inputs.
Note that the small RFI “tee” filter assemblies connected to the input and output
connectors are socketed and user-replaceable.
Component-Level Description:
The left channel balanced audio input signal is applied to the filter / load network made up of L100-103 and associated resistors and capacitors. (There are
solder pads available in the PC board to accept an optional 600 termination
load [R106] on the input signal if the user wishes to install one.) A conventional three-opamp instrumentation amplifier (IC100 and associated circuitry)
receives the input signal. R110-114 and quad analog switch IC101 make up the
circuit that sets the gain of IC100. The switches in IC101 set the gain of the instrumentation amplifier by switching resistors in parallel with R104. (Smaller
total resistances produce larger gains.)
IC100 feeds IC104 and associated components. This stage balances, DC-biases,
and scales the signal to the proper level for the analog-to-digital (A/D) con-
6-7
6-8
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
verter IC107. IC105A and associated components comprise a servo amp to correctly DC-bias the signal feeding the A/D converter. R137-139, C109, C110
make an attenuator / RC filter necessary to filter high frequency energy that
would otherwise cause aliasing distortion in the A/D converter.
The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just
described.
IC100, 102 are socketed for easy field replacement. All other circuitry is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.
2. Stereo Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Located on input/output/DSP board
The A/D converter, IC107, is a stereo 24-bit sigma-delta converter. (This is a surface-mount part and is not field-replaceable,)
The A/D oversamples the audio, applies noise shaping, and emits a bitstream at
64 kHz sample rate. The 9300 decimates this to 32 kHz using a high-quality synchronous sample rate converter realized in DSP. The 9300’s audio processing operates at a 32 kHz sample rate and multiples thereof.
3. Digital Input Receiver and Sample Rate Converter (SRC)
Located on input/output/DSP board
The receiver IC300 accepts digital audio signals using the AES3 interface format
(AES3-1992). It applies its output to sample rate converter IC302. This accepts and
sample-rate converts any of the “standard” 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
and 96 kHz rates in addition to any digital audio sample rate within the range of
32 kHz and 96 kHz. The SRC converts the input sample rate to 48 kHz for processing by the DSP.
Receiver IC301 accepts sync signals in either AES11 or word clock formats and
generate a reference sample rate for the 9300’s output sample rate converters.
Relay IC304 determines if the 9300’s sync input will accept AES11 or word clock.
These chips are surface-mounted and not field-replaceable.
Output Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the DSP to the analog and digital audio outputs. The digital
audio from the DSP is transmitted to the digital-to-analog converter (D/A) and output sample rate converter (SRC). The digital-to-analog (D/A) converter converts the
digital audio words generated by the DSP to analog audio. The analog output
stages scale and buffer the D/A output signal to drive the analog output XLR connectors with a low impedance balanced output. The digital output transmitter accepts the digital audio words from the output sample rate converter (SRC) and
transmits them in AES3-format digital audio signals on the digital output connector.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
1. Stereo Digital-to-Analog (D/A) Converter
Located on input/output/DSP board
The D/A, IC211, is a stereo, 24-bit delta-sigma converter. It receives the serial left
and right audio data samples from the DSP at 64 kHz sample rate, and converts
them into audio signals requiring further, relatively undemanding analog filtering. IC211 is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.
2. Analog Output Stages
Located on input/output/DSP board
The 9300 uses the two channels of the stereo D/A converter to drive the 9300’s
Analog 1 and Analog 2 outputs. This allows the 9300 to use DSP to obtain separate independent control of the two outputs in DSP.
The left (Analog Output 1) and right (Analog Output 2) signals emerging from
are each filtered, amplified, and applied to a floating-balanced integrated line
driver, which has a 50 output impedance. The line driver outputs are applied to
the RF-filtered left and right analog output connectors.
Component-Level Description:
IC201 and associated components filter the left channel signal emerging from
IC211. The purpose of these stages is to reduce the out-of-band noise energy
resulting from the delta-sigma D/A’s noise shaping filter and to translate the
differential output of the D/A converter into single-ended form. These components apply a 3rd order low-pass filter to the differential signal from the D/A.
This filter does not induce significant overshoot of the processed audio, which
would otherwise waste modulation.
IC212 and associated components form a low-frequency servo amplifier to remove residual DC from the signal. The 0.15Hz 3 dB frequency prevents tiltinduced overshoot in the processed audio.
The buffered output of IC201 is applied to IC213, a balanced output line
driver. This driver emulates a floating transformer; its differential output level
is independent of whether one side of its output is floating or grounded.
IC213 and its right channel counterpart IC214 are socketed for easy field replacement. All other circuitry is surface-mounted.
The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just
described.
3. Digital Sample Rate Converter (SRC) and Output Transmitter
Located on input/output/DSP board
Output sample rate converter (SRC) chips IC400 and IC402 convert the 64 kHz
9300 DSP output sample rate to any of the standard 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz rates for the 9300’s Digital Out 1 and Digital Out 2 respectively. The sample rate converters drive digital audio interface transmitters IC403,
6-9
6-10
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
IC404, which encode digital audio signals using the AES3 interface format (AES31992). These chips are surface-mounted and are not field-replaceable.
DSP Circuit
The DSP circuit consists of four Motorola DSP56367 24-bit fixed-point DSP chips,
which execute DSP software code to implement digital signal processing algorithms.
The algorithms filter, compress, and limit the audio signal. The four DSP chips, each
operating at approximately 150 million instructions per second (MIPS), for a total of
600 MIPS, provide the necessary signal processing. A sampling rate of 48 kHz is used.
System initialization normally occurs when power is first applied to the 9300 and can
occur abnormally if the 9300’s watchdog timer forces the SC520 to reboot. Upon initialization, the SC520 CPU downloads the DSP executable code stored in the flash
memory. This typically takes about 7 seconds. Once a DSP chip begins executing its
program, execution is continuous. The SC520 provides the DSP program with parameter data (representing information like the settings of various processing controls), and extracts the front panel metering data from the DSP chips.
During system initialization, the SC520 queries the DSP hardware about its operational status and will display an error message on-screen if the DSP fails to initialize
normally. Please note any such messages and be ready to report them to Orban Customer Service.
The DSP chips are located on the I/O+DSP board—see the drawings starting on page
6-29.
Power Supply
Warning! Hazardous voltages are present in the power supply when it is connected
to the AC line. Several parts, including the heat sink, are hot to the AC power line.
Except for servicing, do not remove the insulating shield from the power supply.
The power supply is a modular switching supply to minimize heat buildup and
power consumption. It converts an AC line voltage input to +15, –15, and +5 volts.
All other supply voltages are derived from these three voltages via local regulation.
The supply accepts inputs from 95 to 264 VAC, 50 – 60 Hz.
The only fuse in your Optimod is a 2.5A 20mm Quick Acting HBC fuse mounted on
the power supply’s circuit board. Because the supply’s outputs are automatically current-limited, the fuse will usually open only if the power supply fails. Be sure to disconnect your Optimod from AC power before replacing the fuse!
Because of safety and EMI suppression requirements in the power supply, there are
no user-serviceable parts in it. In case of failure, replace the entire supply with an
Orban-supplied replacement (Orban part number 29270.000.01.1), which ensures
that your Optimod will continue to meet all regulatory requirements for safety and
emissions.
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Abbreviations
Some of the abbreviations used in this manual may not be familiar to all readers:
A/D (or A to D)
AES
AGC
A-I
A-O
BAL
BBC
BNC
CALIB
CIT
CMOS
COFDM
COM
D/A (or D to A)
dBm
dBu
DI
DJ
DO
DOS
DSP
EBU
EBS
EMI
ESC
FCC
FDNR
FET
FFT
FIFO
G/R
HD Radio
HF
HP
IBOC
IC
IM
I/O
ITU
JFET
analog-to-digital converter
Audio Engineering Society
automatic gain control
analog input
analog output
balanced (refers to an audio connection with two active conductors and one shield surrounding them).
British Broadcasting Corporation
a type of RF connector
calibrate
composite isolation transformer
complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex — a robust type of digital modulation using
many narrow-bandwidth, low data rate, mutually non-interfering carriers to achieve an aggregate high data rate with excellent multipath rejection.
serial data communications port
digital-to-analog converter
decibel power measurement. 0 dBm = 1mW applied to a specified load. In audio, the load
is usually 600. In this case only, 0 dBm = 0.775V rms.
decibel voltage measurement. 0 dBu = 0.775V RMS. For this application, the dBm-into600 scale on voltmeters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu.
digital input
disk jockey, an announcer who plays records in a club or on the air
digital output
Microsoft disk operating system for IBM-compatible PC
digital signal processor (or processing). May also refer to a special type of microprocessor
optimized for efficiently executing arithmetic.
European Broadcasting Union
Emergency Broadcasting System (U.S.A.)
electromagnetic interference
escape
Federal Communications Commission (USA regulatory agency)
frequency-dependent negative resistoran element used in RC-active filters
field effect transistor
fast Fourier transform
first-in, first-out
gain reduction
See IBOC
high-frequency
high-pass
“In-Band On-Channel” — a form of digital radio commercialized by iBiquity Corporation
where the digital carriers use a form of COFDM modulation and share the frequency allocation of the analog carriers. Also known by its trademarked name of “HD Radio.”
integrated circuit
intermodulation (or “intermodulation distortion”)
Input/Output
International Telecommunications Union (formerly CCIR). ITU-R is the arm of the ITU dedicated to radio.
junction field effect transistor
6-11
6-12
TECHNICAL DATA
LC
LCD
LED
LF
LP
LVL
MHF
MLF
MOD
N&D
N/C
OSHOOT
PC
PCM
PPM
RAM
RC
RDS/RBDS
REF
RF
RFI
RMS
ROM
SC
SCA
S/PDIF
TRS
THD
TX
s
VCA
VU
XLR
XTAL
ORBAN MODEL 9300
inductor/capacitor
liquid crystal display
light-emitting diode
low-frequency
low-pass
level
midrange / high-frequency
midrange / low-frequency
modulation
noise and distortion
no connection
overshoot
IBM-compatible personal computer
pulse code modulation
peak program meter
random-access memory
resistor/capacitor
Radio (Broadcasting) Data Service — a narrowband digital subcarrier centered at 57 kHz in
the AM baseband that usually provides program or network-related data to the consumer in
the form of text that is displayed on the radio. Occupied bandwidth is ±2500 Hz.
reference
radio frequency
radio-frequency interference
root-mean-square
read-only memory
subcarrier
subsidiary communications authorization  a non program-related subcarrier in the AM
baseband above 23 kHz (monophonic) or 57 kHz (stereophonic)
Sony/Philips digital interface
tip-ring-sleeve (2-circuit phone jack)
total harmonic distortion
transmitter
Microseconds. For AM preemphasis, the +3 dB frequency is 1 / (2  ), where  is the preemphasis time constant, measured in seconds.
voltage-controlled amplifier
volume unit (meter)
a common style of 3-conductor audio connector
crystal
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Parts List
Many parts used in the 9300 are surface-mount devices (“SMT”) and are not intended for field replacement because specialized equipment and skills are necessary
to remove and replace them. The list below includes substantially all of the parts
used in the 9300 (including surface-mount devices), and inclusion of a part in this list
does not imply that the part is field-replaceable.
The input amplifiers, output amplifiers, and tee-filters (used for EMI suppression) are
socketed and easily replaceable. These are the components most vulnerable to damage caused by severe EM surges, such as those caused by lightning strikes at a
broadcast transmitter site.
See the following assembly drawings for locations of components.
Obtaining Spare Parts
Special or subtle characteristics of certain components are exploited to produce an
elegant design at a reasonable cost. It is therefore unwise to make substitutions for
listed parts. Consult the factory if the listing of a part includes the note “selected” or
“realignment required.”
Orban normally maintains an inventory of tested, exact replacement parts that can
be supplied quickly at nominal cost. Standardized spare parts kits are also available.
When ordering parts from the factory, please have available the following information about the parts you want:
Orban part number
Reference designator (e.g., C3, R78, IC14)
Brief description of part
Model, serial, and “M” (if any) number of unit  see rear-panel label
To facilitate future maintenance, parts for this unit have been chosen from the catalogs of well-known manufacturers whenever possible. Most of these manufacturers
have extensive worldwide distribution and may be contacted through their web
sites.
Control Board
Control Board
PART #
20128.000.01
20128.010.01
20128.022.01
20128.332.01
20128.499.01
20129.301.01
20130.100.01
20130.200.01
DESCRIPTION
RESISTOR, 0 Ω, 0805
RESISTOR, 10 Ω, 0805
RESISTOR 22 Ω 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 33.2 Ω, 0805
RESISTOR 49.9 Ω 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 301Ω, 0805
RESISTOR, 1.00K 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 2.00K, 0805
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
R21, R46
R31, R34, R86, R89
R5, R6
R10, R11
R19, R20, R22, R23
R24, R25, R47, R66
R17, R35
R71, R79, R84, R88, R3, R4, R7,
6-13
6-14
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Control Board
PART #
DESCRIPTION
20130.475.01
RESISTOR, 4.75K, 0805
20130.562.01
20131.100.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 5.62K, 0805
RESISTOR, 10K, 0805
20131.113.01
20131.147.01
20132.100.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 11.3K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 14.7K, 0805
RESISTOR, 100K, 0805
20135.002.01
20136.000.01
20233.472.01
21139.000.01
RESISTOR, 0805, 5%, 2Ω
RESISTOR 300 Ω 5% 1/2W 2010
RESISTOR NETWORK 4.7K CTS745C
8R BUS
RESISTOR NETWORK 8R, ISO, 5%
CAPACITOR-SURFACE MOUNT 120610PF-5
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1UF, 10%, 0805
21141.000.01
21142.000.01
CAPACITOR, NPO, 1000PF, 1%, 0805
CAPACITOR, NPO, 100PF, 1%, 0805
21146.310.01
CAPACITOR, .01uf, 0805, 10%
21167.047.01
21170.018.01
21171.105.01
CAPACITOR 4.7pf 50V X7R 0805
CAPACITOR 18pf 1% 50V COG 0805
CAPACITOR 1uf X7R 0805
21322.547.01
CAPACITOR, 4.7uf, TANTALUM, 3528
10%
CAPACITOR 10UF 10% TANTALUM
3528
DIODE, 1N4148WT/R
DIODE, SHOT 1A, 60V, SMD
IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR LT1963-2.5
SOT223
IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR LT1963-3.3
SOT223
IC OCT D-TYPE FLIPFLOP W/
IC SDRAM MT48LC16 TSOP54P
IC, OCTAL BUS TRANS W/3
IC, PWRST MIC8115
IC, PWRST MCP120 SOT-23
IC, HEX INVERTER, SURFACE MOUNT
IC, 74ALVC164245DGG
20237.472.01
21136.010.01
21325.610.01
22101.001.01
22209.000.01
24331.025.01
24331.033.01
24417.000.01
24541.000.01
24638.000.01
24654.000.01
24656.475.01
24900.000.01
24965.000.01
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
R8, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30, R32
(R36, NO, STUFF), R205, R207,
R209, R211, R213, R215, R217
R74
R1, R2, R9, R33, R37, R38, R39,
R72
R87
R18, R73
R40, R41, R42, R43, R44, R45,
R50, R54, R57, R59
R65, R70, R78, R83, R85
R63, R67, R75
R81
RN1, RN2, RN3, RN4
RN5
C5
C6, C7, C8, C9, C19, C20, C21,
C23, C24, C25, C26, C27, C28,
C29, C30, C31, C32, C33, C39,
C43, C45, C177, C179, C182,
C184, C186, C187, C188, C200
C11
C22, C34, C40, C46, C47, C48,
C49, C50, C51, C52, C53, C54,
C55, C56, C58, C59, C61, C62,
C63, C64, C65, C66, C67, C68,
C69, C70, C71, C72
C10, C126, C127, C133, C134,
C156, C158, C160, C162, C180,
C185
C1
C3, C4
C14, C17, C36, C37, C38, C125,
C132, C151, C153, C155, C157,
C159, C161, C175, C176, C178,
C181, C183, (C201, NO, STUFF)
C12
C13, C15, C16, C18, C35, C42,
C44, C202
CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4, CR5
CR6, CR7, CR8, CR9
U14
U15
U20
U2, U3
U22
U5
U16
U23, U24
U7, U8, U9
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Control Board
PART #
24968.000.01
24972.520.01
24979.000.01
24983.000.01
25008.000.01
27017.009.01
27017.025.01
27147.124.01
27306.000.01
27406.014.01
27421.004.01
27421.006.01
27421.010.01
27421.016.01
27451.005.01
27630.001.01
28031.000.01
28041.000.01
28089.000.01
28090.000.01
28091.000.01
44099.100.01
20129.604.01.1
20238.000.01.1
22210.000.01.1
23216.000.01.1
24646.000.01.1
24674.000.01.1
24761.000.01.1
27374.000.01.1
27375.000.01.1
27479.002.01.1
29535.000.01.1
29536.000.01.1
43050.014.01.1
DESCRIPTION
IC, MAX208ECNG
IC MICROPROCESSOR ELANSC520
BGA388
IC, BAT54C-7
IC, 7064STC100-10
IC, PS2506-4 *
CONNECTOR, RT AGL, PC MNT, 9P
CONNECTOR, RT AGL, PC MNT, 25P
IC, SCKT, DIP, 24 PIN, DUAL
CONNECTOR RJ45 PCMT W/MAGS
CONNECTOR, SOCKET, STRIP, 14 PIN
CONNECTOR, HDR, DBL RW, 4P, 2 X 2
CONNECTOR, HDR, DBL RW, 6P, 2 X 3
CONNECTOR, HDR, DBL RW, 23", 2 X 5
CONNECTOR, HDR, STR, .23", 2 X 8
CONNECTOR, STR, DBL ROW, 26 PIN
JUMPER, PC MNT, TEST POINT
HOLDER, BATTERY, LITH CELL
CELL, COIN, BATTERY, LITHIUM, 3V
OSCILLATOR 33MHZ SG636PCE 4P
SMD
IC TCXO DS32KHZ 36P BGA
XTAL 25MHZ RXD MP35L SMD
FIRMWARE 8300 U4 28F128
R0805 604Ω 1% 1/8W
RESISTOR NET 100K 8RESISTOR 2512
DIODE MBR530 SOD123
TRANSISTOR MMBT4400 SOT23
IC 74ACT244 OCTAL TSSOP
IC 10/100BT ETHERNET CONTROLLER
(NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR)
IC LO POWER DC/DC CONVERT
HEADER, 2MM 2 X 10
HEADER, 2MM 2 X 6
CONNECTOR HEADER .156 CENTER 2
PIN
INDUCTOR 3.9uH CHIP 1008
INDUCTOR SURFACE MOUNT 10uH
10%
SASY CBL IDC 60PIN 1.4"
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
U12
U1
CR11, CR12
U6
U17, U19
J5
J9
SU12
J1
JP1
J8, J10, J13
J14
J3
(J6, NO, STUFF)
J11
TP100
BT1, HLDR
BT1
X1
U13
Y1
U4
R48, R49, R51, R53, R55, R56,
R58, R60, R62, R64, R68, R69,
R76, R77, R80, R82
RN52, RN61
CR10
Q1, Q2, Q3
U18
U10
U21
(J4, NO, STUFF)
J7
J12
L1, L2, L3
L4
J2
Combined Input/Output and DSP (I/O+DSP) Board
I/O+DSP BOARD
20040.604.01
20128.000.01
RESISTOR, MF, 1/8W, 1%, 604 Ω
RESISTOR, 0Ω, 0805
(R106, R119, NO, STUFF)
(R600, R601, R602, R603, NO
STUFF)
6-15
6-16
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
I/O+DSP BOARD
20128.022.01
RESISTOR 22 Ω 1% 0805
20128.075.01
20129.100.01
20129.110.01
20129.150.01
20129.249.01
20129.768.01
20130.150.01
RESISTOR, 75Ω, 1%, 0805
RESISTOR, 100 Ω, 0805
RESISTOR 110Ω 0805 1%
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 150Ω, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 249Ω, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 768Ω, 0805
RESISTOR, MF 1/8W 1% 1.50K SMT
20130.162.01
20130.210.01
20130.348.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 1.62K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 2.10K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 3.48K, 0805
20130.499.01
RESISTOR 4.99K 1% 0805
20130.562.01
20130.845.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 5.62K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 8.45K, 0805
20131.100.01
RESISTOR, 10K, 0805
20131.113.01
20131.147.01
20131.499.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 11.3K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 14.7K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 49.9K, 0805
20131.825.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 82.5K, 0805
20132.100.01
20135.100.01
20151.365.01
RESISTOR, 100K, 0805
RESISTOR MF 1/8W 1% 1.00M SMT
RESISTOR, 0.1% 3.65K, 0805
20151.536.01
20221.101.01
20511.310.01
21137.447.01
RESISTOR, 0.1%, 5.36K, 0805
RESISTOR, NET, SIP, 2%, 100K, 10PIN
TRMPTS, 10K, 20%, TOP ADJ
CAPACITOR .47UF 25V 10% 1206
21138.247.01
CAPACITOR, SMD1206, 4700PF, 50V,
5%
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1UF, 10%, 0805
21139.000.01
R806, R807, R808, R809, R810,
R811, R813, R820
R158, R303
R257, R258, R259, R260
R249, R250, R300, R400
R138, R151, R815
R137, R139, R149, R150, R155
R111, R126
R131, R134, R140, R141, R144,
R146, R159, R160, R161, R162
R132, R153, R156, R157, R302
R112, R127, R902, R905
R204, R210, R217, R220, R245,
R246
R103, R105, R118, R124, R725,
R800, R903
R113, R128
R201, R202, R205, R207, R208,
R211, R212, R214, R215, R218
R237, R251, R252, R406, R407,
R703
R206, R219, R233, R234
R114, R129
R301, R304, R310, R311, R317,
R318, R401, R402, R700, R706,
R707, R900, R901, R904
R104, R123, R203, R209, R213,
R216
R704, R705, R816, R817, R818
R142, R152, R247, R248
R101, R108, R116, R121, R130,
R133, R135, R136, R143, R145,
R147, R148
R102, R109, R117, R122
RN701
VR200, VR201
C113, C117, C234, C235, C502,
C504, C506, C508
C109, C110, C115, C116, C306
C111, C118, C119, C120, C121,
C123, C124, C125, C126, C127,
C128, C202, C203, C233, C300,
C301, C302, C309, C400, C700,
C802, C803, C805, C809, C916,
C932, C933, C934, C935, C936,
C937, C938, C939, C940, C941,
C942, C943, C944, C945, C947,
C948, C949, C950, C951, C952,
C953, C954, C955, C956, C957,
C958, C959, C960, C961, C962,
C963, C964, C965, C967, C968,
C969, C970, C971, C972, C973,
C974, C975, C976, C977, C978,
C979, C988, C996, C1003, C1004,
C1012, C1013
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
I/O+DSP BOARD
21140.000.01
21141.000.01
21142.000.01
21143.000.01
CAPACITOR, NPO, 470PF, 1%, 0805
CAPACITOR, NPO, 1000PF, 1%, 0805
CAPACITOR, NPO, 100PF, 1%, 0805
CAPACITOR, NPO, 1500PF, 1%, 0805
21144.000.01
CAPACITOR, 5%, 100V, 47PF, 1206
21146.310.01
CAPACITOR, .01uf, 0805, 10%
21154.433.01
21171.105.01
CAPACITOR, .33uf, 0805, 20%
CAPACITOR 1uf X7R 0805
21175.000.01
21227.747.01
CAPACITOR 6800pF 10% X7R 0805
CAPACITOR RADIAL LEADS 470UF 16V
HFS
CAPACITOR, 10uf, TANT, SMT
21319.610.01
22083.068.01
22101.001.01
22102.001.01
22104.000.01
22106.000.01
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR, 6.8
VLT
DIODE, 1N4148WT/R
DIODE, SIGNAL, 1N5711TR
DIODE, RECTIFIER 1N5818
DIODE, SMCJ26C, TRANZORB
23214.000.01
24024.000.01
24307.901.01
24334.000.01
24417.000.01
24753.000.01
24757.000.01
24858.000.01
24945.000.01
24946.000.01
24951.000.01
24958.000.01
24960.000.01
TRANSISTOR NPN MMBT3904
IC, OPA2134PA
IC, LINEAR, DC REG, 5V POS
IC 1.5A SWITCH REG 1.8V
IC OCT D-TYPE FLIPFLOP W/
IC AD1895 SRC 192KHZ
IC, DSPB56367PV150 150MHZ
IC, SO/14, SMT
IC 74AHC541 OCTLBUF SOL20
IC-8 BIT-DUAL TRANSVR W/3
IC HC151 8CH MUX SOIC16
IC, DRV134PA-DIP
IC, OPA2134UA
24963.000.01
24980.000.01
24994.000.01
24997.000.01
27053.003.01
IC, 5383 VS
IC, 74ACT32D
IC, 74ACT04, SOIC 14P
IC, DAC AK4393 SSOP28
CONNECTOR, MALE, INSERT, RT
ANGL
CONNECTOR, FEM, INSERT, RT
ANGLE
IC, SCKT, DIP, 8 PINS, DUAL
IC, SCKT, 44 PIN, LOW PROFIL
CONNECTOR, 3P SCKT STRIP
27054.003.01
27147.008.01
27174.044.01
27408.003.01
27421.002.01
27421.010.01
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DBL RW, 2P, 2
X1
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DBL RW, 23",
C217, C218, C219, C220
C236, C237, C238, C239, C305
C989
C221, C222, C240, C241, C242,
C243, C987, C990, C993
C101, C103, C105, C107, C108,
C114, C136
C900, C901, C902, C903, C904,
C905, C906, C907, C908, C909,
C910, C911, C912, C913, C914,
C915
C303
C200, C201, C232, C701, C985,
C986, C991, C992, C1011, C1014
C501, C503, C505, C507
C994
C112, C122, C129, C130, C131,
C804, C917, C918, C919, C920,
C922, C923, C946, C995, C1010
CR902
CR900, CR901
CR700
CR903, CR904
CR100, CR103, CR104, CR105,
CR202, CR203, CR204, CR205
Q900
IC100, IC102
IC902
IC901
IC108, IC406, IC700
IC302, IC400
IC501, IC502, IC503, IC504
IC804
IC701
IC702
IC407
IC213, IC214
IC104, IC105, IC106, IC201, IC202,
IC212
IC107
IC410, IC704
IC409, IC807
IC211
J201, J202, J400
J100, J103, J300
SIC100, SIC102, SIC213, SIC214
SIC703
SL100, SL102, SL104, SL106,
SL200, SL201, SL202, SL203
J700
J800, J903
6-17
6-18
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
I/O+DSP BOARD
27451.009.01
27630.001.01
2X5
CONNECTOR, HEADER, 3 PIN, SINGLE
RW
HEADER STR DBLRW 60P PCMT
JUMPER, PC MNT, TEST POINT
28083.000.01
29015.000.01
29506.001.01
29508.210.01
OSC-XTAL CLOCK-27MHZ-3 VO
XF-SMT- SCIENTI
BEAD- FERRITE- ON WIRE
FLTR-EMI SUPPRESSION-50V-
29522.000.01
INDUCTOR, 1200UH, 5%, 1-M-10-22
29527.000.01
44110.100.01
24672.000.011
20128.499.01.1
20129.301.01.1
20129.475.01.1
20129.604.01.1
20130.100.01.1
21170.282.01.1
21170.310.01.1
24676.000.01.1
24760.000.01.1
24762.000.01.1
24763.000.01.1
24766.000.01.1
27479.002.01.1
27479.004.01.1
27479.006.01.1
29537.102.01.1
32296.000.03.1
INDUCTOR, FIT44-4
FIRMWARE PIC16C IC703
IC DIG INTERFACE TRANSMIT
R0805 49.9Ω 1%
R0805 301Ω 1% 1/8W
R0805 475Ω 1% 1/8W
R0805 604Ω 1% 1/8W
R0805 1K 1%
CCC 0805 .0082U 50 5% COG
CCC 0805 .01U 50 5% COG
IC TRANS CS8427 28 PIN
IC QUAD CMOS SPST SWITCH
IC QUAD BUFFER 3-STATE OUTP
IC EPM7064AETC100-10
IC, PLL1707DBQ
CONNECTOR HEADER .156CTR 2 PIN
CONNECTOR HEADER .156CTR 4 PIN
CONNECTOR HEADER .156CTR 6 PIN
INDUCTOR 0805 FERRITE 1000 Ω
PCB I/O + DSP BOARD
27426.003.01
J801
J701
TP900, TP903, (TP901, TP902,
TP904, NO, STUFF)
IC805
T300, T400
L300, L301, L400, L401
L100, L102, L104, L106, L200,
L201, L202, L203
L101, L103, L105, L107, L208,
L209, L210, L211
L900
IC703
IC403
R253, R254, R255, R256
R100, R107, R115, R120
R261, R262, R263, R264
R306
R702
C132, C133, C134, C135
C100, C102, C104, C106
IC300
IC101, IC103
IC401
IC800
IC801
J901
J902
J900
L800, L801, L802
Display Board (Front)
PART #
DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
15057.010.01
SPACER, .100" HIGH
15061.005.01
25106.001.01
LED MNT, 1 POS'N, .240"HIGH
LED, YELLOW, T-1, HIGH EFFICIENCY
LMP
LED, RED, T-1, HIGH EFFICIENCY LMP
LED, ARRAY, 1 RED, 1 YEL, 8 GRN
LED, ARRAY, 9 YELLOW, 1 RED
CONNECTOR, 100 SCKT, 5X2 LOPRO
CONNECTOR, 100 SCKT, 8X2, LOPRO
LED ARRAY ALL YELLOW
CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4, CR5, CR6,
CR7, CR8, CR9, CR16
MNTCR10
CR11, CR12, CR13, CR14, CR15
25106.003.01
25167.000.01
25168.000.01
27368.000.01
27369.000.01
25172.000.01.1
CR10
CR7, CR16
CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4, CR5, CR6
J1
J2, J3, J4
CR8, CR9
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Display Board (Back)
PART #
DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
42007.100
15065.355.01
20122.110.01
FLAT CABLE 26P 10"
LED-MNT-1 POS-0.355
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 110 ohm
20124.100.01
20125.100.01
20226.000.01
RESISTOR TF 1/8W 1% 1206 10K
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 100K
RESISTOR, NETWORK, DIL, 2%, 100
OHM
CAPACITOR, SURFACE MOUNT 1206,
.1UF, 50V, 20%
CAPACITOR, 5%, 100V, 47PF, 1206
JP203
FOR, CR1 USE 2
R17, R18, R19, R20, R21, R22, R23,
R24
R29, R30
R25, R26, R27, R28
RP1, RP2
21131.410.01
21144.000.01
21313.568.01
24635.000.01
24636.000.01
24900.000.01
24905.000.01
24967.000.01
25112.001.01
26085.000.01
27366.000.01
27367.000.01
27404.000.01
27420.002.01
43008.501.01
43008.503.01
CAPACITOR, TANT, 6.8UF, 25V, 10%
IC 74HCT374
IC 74ACT574
IC, HEX INVERTER, SURFACE MOUNT
IC, CMOS OCTAL D REG. 3 ST
IC, 74ACT245DW
LED, RED/GREEN, BI-COLOR/POLAR
SWITCH, ROT, VERTICAL MOUNT, 2
BIT
CONNECTOR, 100 POSTS, 5X2 MLE
CONNECTOR, 100 POSTS, 8X2
CONNECTOR, PLUG, POLAR, WHITE,
NYL
CONNECTOR 2 PIN RIGHT ANGLE
ASSEMBLY-WIRE-BLK-12
ASSEMBLY-WIRE-RED-12
C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, C8
C9, C10, C11, C12, C13, (C14, NO,
STUFF)
C1
IC3
IC1, IC2
IC7
IC4, IC5, IC6, IC9
IC8
CR1
S12
P1
P2, P3, P4
P5-6
J1
Schematics and Parts Locator Drawings
These drawings reflect the actual construction of your unit as accurately as possible.
Any differences between the drawings and your unit are probably due to product
improvements or production changes since the publication of this manual.
If you intend to replace parts, please read page 6-13. Please note that because surface-mount parts are used extensively in the 9300, few parts are field-replaceable.
Servicing ordinarily occurs by swapping circuit board assemblies. However, many
vulnerable parts connected to the outside world are socketed and can be readily replaced in the field.
6-19
6-20
TECHNICAL DATA
Function
Chassis
Control board
I/O+DSP Board
Display Board
DSP Block
Diagram
ORBAN MODEL 9300
Description
Drawing
Page
Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections
Control microprocessor. Services
front panel, serial port, Ethernet,
and DSP+I/O board.
Contains:
General Purpose bus, address decoder, DSP, and I/O interface
Memory and clock generation
Ethernet
Miscellaneous input/output
Power and Ground
Analog Input/output
AES3 Input/output
DSP Chips; Local regulators.
Contains:
L and R Analog Inputs
Analog Outputs
Digital Input and Sync Input
Digital Outputs
DSP Extended Serial Audio Interface (ESAI) and Host Interface
DSP Serial Peripheral Interface,
Power, and Ground
General Purpose bus 8-bit I/O
Serial Audio Interface and Clock
Generation
Power Distribution
Front-Panel LCD, LEDs, Buttons,
and Rotary Encoder
Contains:
Front of board
Rear of board
Shows signal processing
Top view
(not to scale)
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-21
6-22
Schematic 1 of 5
6-23
Schematic 2 of 5
Schematic 3 of 5
Schematic 4 of 5
Schematic 5 of 5
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
Schematic 1 of 9
Schematic 2 of 9
Schematic 3 of 9
Schematic 4 of 9
Schematic 5 of 9
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
Schematic 6 of 9
6-34
Schematic 7 of 9
Schematic 8 of 9
6-35
6-36
Schematic 9 of 9
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-37
6-38
Schematic 1 of 2
Schematic 2 of 2
6-39
6-40
6-41
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
WARNING:
PARTS
UNDER SHIELD
ARE EXPOSED TO
AC LINE
INPUT/OUTPUT
SECTION
CONTROL
BOARD
INPUT/OUTPUT+DSP
BOARD
POWER
SUPPLY
DSP SECTION
DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
6-21
6-22
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
CONTROL BOARD PARTS LOCATOR
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
+3.3V
+
+5V C44 10UF
C45
R1
10.0K
1
SYSTEM_RESET-N
/RST
U5 MIC8115TU
3
VSS
VDD
VCC
GND
RESET-n
+3.3V
U1B SC520
4
2
C20
PWRGOOD
PIO14/GPIRQ9
PWRGOOD
3
1
MR-n
(SHT 5)
MCP120-475I/TT
GPRESET
PRGRESET
AE8
PIO14/GPIRQ9
AC22
D20
GP_RESET
PRGRESET
TV1
R2
10.0K
(SHT 5)
+5V
PIO26/GPMEMCS16
PIO25/GPIOCS16
PIO13/GPIRQ10
PIO23/GPIRQ0
PIO22/GPIRQ1
PIO21/GPIRQ2
PIO15/GPIRQ8
PIO12/GPDACK0
PIO8/GPDRQ0
RN2
DREQ1
10
9
8
7
6
R215
R211
R205
GPD[0..15]
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
+3.3V
AD4
AC4
AD8
AE5
AF5
AF6
AF8
AC8
AF9
PIO26/GPMEMCS16-N
PIO25/GPIOCS16-N
PIO13/GPIRQ10
PIO23/GPIRQ0
PIO22/GPIRQ1
PIO21/GPIRQ2
PIO15/GPIRQ8
DACK0-N
DREQ0
1
24
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
ISA_A15
ISA_A14
ISA_A13
ISA_A12
ISA_A11
ISA_A10
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
ISA_A7
ISA_A6
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
62
73
15
TDO
TMS
TDI
U8A 74ALVC164245
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA25
GPA24
TV52
TV53
TV14
TV15
TV16
GPA19
GPA18
GP_RESET
GP_AEN
GPA17
GPA16
GP_MEMRD-N
GP_MEMWR-N
DREQ0
+3.3V
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
1
24
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
ISA_A23
ISA_A22
ISA_A21
ISA_A20
ISA_A25
ISA_A24
ISA_IOWR-N
ISA_IORD-N
ISA_A19
ISA_A18
ISA_RESET
ISA_AEN
ISA_A17
ISA_A16
ISA_MEMRD-N
ISA_MEMWR-N
(SHT 5)
(SHT 5)
82
66
51
34
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
TCK
48
25
4
VCCIO
VCCIO
VCCIO
VCCIO
VCCIO
91
18
3
ISA_A0
ISA_A1
ISA_A2
ISA_A3
ISA_A4
ISA_A5
ISA_A6
ISA_A7
ISA_A8
ISA_A9
ISA_A10
ISA_A11
BUFFRD-N
ISA_A12
ISA_A13
RESETDRV-N
ISA_A14
DSPRST-N
ISA_A15
SYSTEM_RESET-N
ISA_A16
ISA_RESET
ISA_A17
SMEMRD-N
ISA_A18
ISA_MEMRD-N
ISA_A19
ISA_MEMWR-N
ISA_A20
PRGRESET
ISA_A21
START
ISA_A22
ISA_IORD-N
ISA_A23
ISA_AEN
ISA_A24
ISA_IOWR-N
ISA_A25
GND
GPDBUFOE-N
48
25
OE2
86
AD5
TV41
TV42
TV43
TV44
TV45
TV46
TV47
TV48
16
94
96
12
10
9
8
6
13
14
17
19
20
21
23
25
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
93
92
GND
GP_IOWR-N
GP_IORD-N
ISA_A0
ISA_A1
ISA_A2
ISA_A3
ISA_A4
ISA_A5
ISA_A6
ISA_A7
ISA_A8
ISA_A9
ISA_A10
ISA_A11
ISA_A12
ISA_A13
ISA_A14
ISA_A15
ISA_A16
ISA_A17
ISA_A18
ISA_A19
ISA_A20
ISA_A21
ISA_A22
ISA_A23
ISA_A24
ISA_A25
OE1
GND
C16
G24
90
U9A 74ALVC164245
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
88
FP_COL_A-N
FP_COL_B-N
FP_ROW_A-N
FP_ROW_B-N
FP_ROW_C-N
FP_ROW_D-N
FP_BUSEN-N
SMEMWR-N
DSP_BUSEN-N
DSPEN0-N
DSPEN1-N
DSPEN2-N
DSPEN3-N
SEL1
SEL0
REMOTE_IN-N
GND
GP_MEMRD-N
GP_MEMWR-N
(SHT 5)
GCLRn
74
F24
C18
(SHT3)
GPA[0..25]
TV13
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
1OE
2OE
ISA_D7
ISA_D6
ISA_D5
ISA_D4
ISA_D3
ISA_D2
ISA_D1
ISA_D0
ISA_D15
ISA_D14
ISA_D13
ISA_D12
ISA_D11
ISA_D10
ISA_D9
ISA_D8
(SHT3)
GPA[0..25]
C24
R24
P24
N24
N23
M23
C2
M24
F23
C1
H24
L24
J23
K24
G4
J24
1DIR
2DIR
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
C24
0.1UF
C23
0.1UF
60
57
58
48
84
46
54
45
47
52
56
79
76
80
65
71
64
42
41
40
44
MISC_OUT-N
DISPLAY
LED-N
ENCODER-N
FP_COL_A-N
FP_COL_B-N
FP_ROW_A-N
FP_ROW_B-N
FP_ROW_C-N
FP_ROW_D-N
FP_BUSEN-N
SMEMWR-N
DSP_BUSEN-N
DSPEN0-N
DSPEN1-N
DSPEN2-N
DSPEN3-N
SEL1
SEL0
REMOTE IN-N
C25
0.1UF
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
TV51
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
(SHT
R217
R213
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
ISA_A[0..9]
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
5)
(SHT 5)
+5V
R39 10.0K
(SHT5)
R38 10.0K
61 BUFFRD-N
(SHT 5)
+3.3V
(SHT 5)
63 RESETDRV-N
(SHT3)
67 DSPRST-N
68 SYSTEM_RESET-N
1
2
69 ISA_RESET
3
4
75 SMEMRD-N
81 ISA_MEMRD-N
J13 HDR 2X2
83 ISA_MEMWR-N
ADDRESS DECODE CONFIGURATION
85 PRGRESET
97 START
(NOT USED ON CURRENT CONFIGURATION)
98 ISA_IORD-N
99 ISA_AEN
100 ISA_IOWR-N
1
2
3
4
BUFFRD-N 1
24
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
C19
0.1UF
1
2
5
7
22
24
27
28
49
50
53
55
70
72
77
78
+5V
CABLE ASSY FLAT, 60 PIN
ISA_D[0..7]
TO I/O & DSP PCA
GND
R3 4.75K
AF12 PIO1/GPBHE-N
60
59
58
START
57
ROMCS2-N/GPCS2-N
56
ROMCS1-N/GPCS1-N
55
PITGATE2/GPCS3-N
54
PIO2/GPRDY
53
SIN2
52
SOUT2
51
RTS2-N
50
PIO28/CTS2-N
49
DSPEN3-N
48
DSPEN2-N
47
DSPEN1-N
46
DSPEN0-N
45
PIO27/GPCS0-N
44
PIO26/GPMEMCS16-N
43
PIO25/GPIOCS16-N
42
MHZ24
41
40
ISA_A0
39
ISA_A2
38
ISA_A1
37
36
ISA_A3
35
ISA_A5
34
ISA_A4
33
ISA_A7
32
31
ISA_A6
30
ISA_A8
29
SSI_DO
28
ISA_A9
27
26
DREQ1
25
DACK1-N
24
SSI_CLK
23
22
SSI_DI
21
20
ISA_IORD-N
19
ISA_IOWR-N
18
SMEMRD-N
17
16
SMEMWR-N
15
ISA_AEN
14
ISA_D0
13
ISA_D1
12
11
ISA_D2
10
ISA_D3
9
ISA_D5
8
ISA_D4
7
6
ISA_D6
5
ISA_D7
4
DSP_BUSEN-N
3
2
ISA_RESET
1
95
R4 4.75K
DACK0-N
RNET4.7K
1
2
3
4
5
GPA24
GPA23
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
MISC_OUT-N
DISPLAY
LED-N
ENCODER-N
GND
PIO24/GPDBUFOE
(NO STUFF)
+3.3V
R36 4.75K
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
GCLK1
59
DACK1-N
10
9
8
7
6
GPA25
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
U7A 74ALVC164245
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
87
89
(SHT 5)
43
GPIOWR
GPIORD
RN3
C3
D4
D3
F3
C19
C14
C21
B22
E24
D24
MHZ24
ISA_D[0..7]
38
GPMEMRD
GPMEMWR
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
ISA_A[0..25]
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
D17
C17
C15
D14
D13
C13
C12
C11
C10
D10
D9
C9
C8
C7
B5
C4
VCCIO
U6
EPM7064STC100-10
PIO1/GPBHE
1
2
3
4
5
39
TMROUT1/GPCS6
TMROUT0/GPCS7
PIO5/GPDRQ3
PIO9/GPDACK3
GPA25/DEBUG_ENTER
GPA24/INST_TRACE
GPA23/AMDEBUG_DIS
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
+3.3V
PIO2/GPRDY
GP_AEN
PIO27/GPCS0-N
+5V
PIO2/GPRDY
PIO3/GPAEN
PIO27/GPCS0
VCCINT
PIO6/GPDRQ2
PIO10/GPDACK2
J2
DSPRST-N
ROMCS1/GPCS1
ROMCS2/GPCS2
PITGATE2/GPCS3
TMRIN1/GPCS4
TMRIN0/GPCS5
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
+3.3V
AF11
AE11
AE4
TV5
TV6
VCCINT
TMROUT1/GPCS6-N AC23
TMROUT0/GPCS7-N AD23
PIO5/GPDRQ3
AD10
AE9
PIO9/GPDACK3-N
TV9
TV10
TV11
TV12
PIO4/GPTC
PIO0/GPALE
7x 4.75K
+5V
GND
AE10
AD9
AD11
AE12
TV2
TV3
TV4
TV49
TV50
GND
FLASHSTATUS
(SHT 3)
PIO16/GPIRQ7
PIO17/GPIRQ6
PIO18/GPIRQ5
PIO19/GPIRQ4
PIO20/GPIRQ3
26
TV7
TV8
PIO4/GPTC
PIO0/GPALE
AF7
AE7
AD7
AD6
AE6
11
ROMCS1-N/GPCS1-N B24
ROMCS2-N/GPCS2-N C23
PITGATE2/GPCS3-N AC21
AA24
TMRIN1/GPCS4-N
AC20
TMRIN0/GPCS5-N
DACK1-N
DREQ1
R209
PIO16/GPIRQ7
PIO17/GPIRQ6
PIO18/GPIRQ5
PIO19/GPIRQ4
PIO20/GPIRQ3
AC9
AF10
R207
PIO11/GPDACK1
PIO7/GPDRQ1
R40 100K
R41 100K
R42 100K
CONTROL BOARD:
GENERAL PURPOSE BUS
ADDRESS DECODER
DSP AND I/O INTERFACE
+5V
48
25
RNET4.7K
9
JTAG (CPLD)
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
U16
2
0.1UF
HDR 5X2
10
1
2
6-23
6-24
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
MD[0..31]
MA[0..12]
U2A MT48LC16
U3A MT48LC16
U1A SC520
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
+3.3V
+3.3V
RN1
1
2
3
4
5
10
9
8
7
6
MECC6
MECC5
MECC4
MECC3
MECC2
MECC1
MECC0
A24
A23
B21
A20
A19
B18
A17
B16
A15
B14
A13
B12
A11
B10
A9
B8
B23
A22
A21
B20
A18
B17
A16
B15
A14
B13
A12
B11
A10
B9
A8
B7
Y26
D25
C26
Y25
W26
D26
C25
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
MECC6
MECC5
MECC4
MECC3
MECC2
MECC1
MECC0
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
BA1
BA0
V26
U26
T26
R26
R25
P25
P26
N26
N25
M25
M26
L26
L25
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
U25
T25
BA1
BA0
E26
F25
K25
V25
RAMWE-N
RAMCAS-N
RAMRAS-N
RAMCS-N
16
17
18
19
H25
G26
H26
G25
SDQM3
SDQM2
SDQM1
SDQM0
38
+3.3V
R7
4.75K
36
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
21
20
37
CKELOW
SWEA
SCASA
SRASA
SCS0
SDQM3
SDQM2
SDQM1
SDQM0
SRASB
SCASB
SWEB
SCS1
SCS2
SCS3
CLKMEMOUT
A12
A11
A10/AP
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
BA1
BA0
CKE
UDQM
LDQM
53
51
50
48
47
45
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
39
15
SDQM1
SDQM0
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
+3.3V
R8
4.75K
36
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
21
20
37
CKEHIGH
16
17
18
19
WE-n
CAS-n
RAS-n
CS-n
38
CLK
A12
A11
A10/AP
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
BA1
BA0
CKE
UDQM
LDQM
53
51
50
48
47
45
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
39
15
SDQM3
SDQM2
WE-n
CAS-n
RAS-n
CS-n
CLK
K26
F26
E25
W25
J25
J26
B19
R5
CLKMEMOUT
DRAMCLK
22 OHM
R6
SDQM[0..3]
22 OHM
CLKMEMIN
A4
CLKMEMIN
RNET4.7K
C1
4.7PF
(SHT2)
GPA[0..24]
+2.5V
+3.3V
L5
1000 ohm
C11
1000PF
C10
0.01UF
LF_PLL
R32
R31
10 OHM
4.75K
+3.3V
+
C12
4.7UF
U1E SC520
+3.3V
X1
4
VCC_OSC
2
C9
0.1UF
VDD
GND
OE
OUT
1
AF24
AC26
AB26
U13 DS32KHZS
14
2
13
3
4
5
6
7
VBAT
VCC
GND
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
32KHZ
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
LF_PLL1
1
16
15
12
11
10
9
8
R37
10.0K
33MXTAL2
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
33MXTAL1
(SHT5)
ROMRD-N
FLASHWR-N
54
55
BOOTCS-N
14
2
29
RESETDRV-N
16
C22
RTC_CLOCK
AE26
32KXTAL2
(SHT2)
100PF
AF26
56
30
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
32
31
3
SG-636PCE-33MC2
VBAT
U4A E28F128
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
GPD[0..15]
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
VPEN
RP-N
32KXTAL1
CONTROL BOARD:
MEMORY AND CLOCK GENERATION
+3.3V
+3.3V
10.0K
STS
CE0-N
CE1-N
CE2-N
15
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
R9
BYTE-N
OE-N
WE-N
52
50
47
45
41
39
36
34
51
49
46
44
40
38
35
33
53
FLASHSTATUS (SHT2)
(SHT2)
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
6-25
+3.3V
RN4
1
2
3
4
5
10
9
8
7
6
PCI_AD[0..31]
RNET4.7K
+3.3V
U1C SC520
U10A DP83816AVNG
+3.3V
H4
H3
J3
GNT4
GNT3
GNT2
GNT1
INTD
INTC
INTB
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
AD25
AD24
AD23
AD22
AD21
AD20
AD19
AD18
AD17
AD16
AD15
AD14
AD13
AD12
AD11
AD10
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
CBE3
CBE2
CBE1
CBE0
RST
DEVSEL
STOP
IRDY
TRDY
FRAME
PERR
SERR
PAR
REQ0
GNT0
INTA
A2
A1
B1
B2
D2
D1
E1
E2
F1
G1
G2
H2
H1
J1
J2
K2
R2
T2
T1
U1
U2
V2
V1
W1
Y2
Y1
AA1
AA2
AB2
AB1
AC1
AC2
PCI_AD31
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD25
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD15
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD6
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD1
PCI_AD0
F2
K1
R1
W2
PCI_CBE3-N
PCI_CBE2-N
PCI_CBE1-N
PCI_CBE0-N
A5
M1
N1
L2
M2
L1
N2
P2
P1
PCI_RESET-N
PCI_DEVSEL-N
PCI_STOP-N
PCI_IRDY-N
PCI_TRDY-N
PCI_FRAME-N
PCI_PERR-N
PCI_SERR-N
PCI_PARITY
62
95
96
92
93
91
97
98
99
L3
M3
K3
PCI_REQ0-N
PCI_GNT0-N
PCI_INTA-N
64
63
61
PCI_AD31
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD25
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD15
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD6
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD1
PCI_AD0
+3.3V
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
U4
T3
P3
N4
REQ4
REQ3
REQ2
REQ1
RN5
4.7K
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
U3
R3
P4
N3
66
67
68
70
71
72
73
74
78
79
81
82
83
86
87
88
101
102
104
105
106
108
109
110
112
113
115
116
118
119
120
121
75
89
100
111
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
AD25
AD24
AD23
AD22
AD21
AD20
AD19
AD18
AD17
AD16
AD15
AD14
AD13
AD12
AD11
AD10
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
R21
0 OHM
TPTDP
54
TXDATA+
R19
49.9 OHM
ETHERNET
C5
10PF
76
TPTDM
53
TXDATA-
TXCT
TPRDP
46
RXDATA+
4
R22
49.9 OHM
CBE3N
CBE2N
CBE1N
CBE0N
RSTN
DEVSELN
STOPN
IRDYN
TRDYN
FRAMEN
PERRN
SERRN
PAR
2
3
TX+
CT1
TXRX+
C8
RXCT
R23
49.9 OHM
TPRDM
45
C7
0.1UF
5
6
7
+3.3V
REQN
GNTN
INTAN
X1
IDSEL
X2
17
R25 301 OHM
10
9
X1
12
11
R24 301 OHM
18
8
13
14
X2
25MHZ
3VAUX
PWRGOOD
PMEN/CLKRUNN
CT2
0.1UF
RXDATA-
+3.3V
122
123
59
1
R20
49.9 OHM
Y1
PCI_AD24
J1
C6
0.1UF
RXNC
YELLEDA
YELLEDC
GRNLEDA
GRNLEDC
GND
GND
GND
RJ-45
MagJack SI-40138
C3
18PF
C4
18PF
R10 33.2 OHM
PCI_CLKOUT
PCI_CLK
60
CLKPCIOUT
A6
28
29
6
15
14
12
11
10
7
31
R11 33.2 OHM
CLKPCIIN
G3
PCI_CLKRETURN
CNFGDISN
R17
1.00K
141
140
139
138
135
134
133
132
PCICLK
COL/MA16
CRS
RXCLK
RXDV/MA11
RXER/MA10
RXD3/MA9
RXD2/MA8
RXD1/MA7
RXD0/MA6
TXCLK
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4/EEDO
MD3
MD2
MD1/CFGDISN
MD0
MDC
MDIO
RXOE
TXEN
TXD3/MA15
TXD2/MA14
TXD1/MA13
TXD0/MA12
MWRN
MRDN
MCSN
EESEL
MA5
MA4/EECLK
MA3/EEDI
MA2/LED100N
MA1/LED10N
MA0/LEDACTN
5
4
13
30
25
24
23
22
131
130
129
128
3
2
1
144
143
142
MDIO
R18
14.7K
LED100LINK
LEDACTIVITY
CONTROL BOARD: ETHERNET
6-26
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
+3.3V
+3.3V
R43
100K
R26
U1D SC520
R44
100K
(SHT2)
PWRGOOD
R45
100K
R46
0 OHM
J4
AF25
AF23
AF1
AE25
AE24
AE1
AD26
AD25
AD2
AD1
AC25
AC3
AA26
AB4
AB3
E23
D23
C22
E3
C6
C5
B6
B4
B3
A3
+5V
C26
C27
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MT
C30
0.1UF
SOUT1
RTS1-N
DTR1-N
13
14
5
18
19
21
7
3
23
16
11
DB9_M
C40
HSM160J
CR7
C46
C51
C47
C49
C2+
C2-
V+
V-
T1IN
T2IN
T3IN
T4IN
T1OUT
T2OUT
T3OUT
T4OUT
R1IN
R2IN
R3IN
R4IN
R1OUT
R2OUT
R3OUT
R4OUT
C48
11
C29
15
0.1UF
2
1
24
20
6
4
22
17
SIN1
CTS1-N
DSR1-N
DCD1-N
GND
CR6
C1+
C1-
0.1UF
C28
0.1UF
9
10
12
0.1UF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VCC
MT
U12
10
MAX208ECAG
C50
AE17
AD17
AC17
AC16
AD16
AE16
AF16
AF15
AE15
AD15
AD14
AE14
AF14
AF13
AE13
AD13
SU12
8
J5
HSM160J
24 PIN DIP SOCKET
L3
3.9uH
7x 100pF
SPARES
14
+5V
U24E
TV26 JPV1
11
10
TV28
TV29 JPV2
U24F
12
13
AD18
AE18
AF18
74HC14A
7
74HC14A
TV31
AC12
T24
T23
AF20
AE20
AD12
+5V
TV35 JPV3
11
10
TV37
14
U23E
TV38 JPV4
13
7
74HC14A
U23F
12
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
TRIG/TRACE
BR/TC
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TCK
PIO31/RIN2
PIO30/DCD2
PIO29/DSR2
PIO28/CTS2
RIN1
DCD1
DSR1
CTS1
SSI_CLK
CF_DRAM/CFG2
PITOUT2/CFG3
CLKTIMER/CLKTEST
TRIG/TRACE
BR/TC
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TCK
AD3
AE3
AF3
AF4
AA3
V4
Y3
V3
PIO31/RING2-N
PIO30/DCD2-N
PIO29/DSR2-N
PIO28/CTS2-N
RING1-N
DCD1-N
DSR1-N
CTS1-N
TV17
TV18
TV19
(SHT2)
TV20
+3.3V
AD19 SSI_CLK
(SHT2)
W24 CF_DRAM-N/CFG2
Y24
A7
TV21
PITOUT2/CFG3
CLKTIMER/CLKTEST
STOP/TX
CMDACK
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TRST
AF17
U24
AF22
AE22
KEY
R28
4.75K
TV22
TV23
HDR, 2mm,2x10
+3.3V
J6 (NO-STUFF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R29
4.75K
R27
4.75K
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
STOP/TX
CMD ACK
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TRST-N
TV24
DTR2
RTS2
SIN2
SOUT2
DTR1
RTS1
SIN1
SOUT1
SSI_DI
SSI_DO
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
AC13
AD24
AE21
AF21
AD21
DATASTRB/CFG1
CF_ROM_GPCS/CFG0
AE23
AD22
V24
U23
W3
W4
AE2
AF2
RESERVED
DTR2-N
RTS2-N
SIN2
SOUT2
DTR1-N
RTS1-N
SIN1
SOUT1
TV25
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
TV40
ORBAN
USE ONLY
HDR 8X2
J7
AE19 SSI_DI
AF19 SSI_DO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
AC24 DATASTRB/CFG1
AD20 CF_ROM_GPCS-N/CFG0
TV32
TV33
R30 4.75K
ROMRD
FLASHWR
BOOTCS
ROMBUFOE
(NO-STUFF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
4.75K
+3.3V
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
TV34
AB23 ROMRD-N
AB24 FLASHWR-N
AB25 BOOTCS-N
AA25
(SHT2)
SYSTEM_RESET-N
KEY
J14
6
5
4
3
2
1
KEY
74HC14A
KEY
+5V
6
5
4
3
2
1
TO FRONT PANEL
DISPLAY PCA
(REVISIONS 01,02,03)
KEY
KEY
+5V
R47 301 OHM
TRIMMED FOR KEY
2
6
hdr,2mm,2x6
J8
4
TO POWER-ON LED
3
2
1
HDR 2X2
C31
+5V
0.1UF
12
5
11
R57
C32 0.1UF
7
U17D
10
9
604 OHM
1
U19A
16
C65
C66
15
U19B
R76
C68
27
C70
C71
8x 100pF
R81
300 OHM
CR10
MBR0530
R70
U18
74ACT244
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
G
G
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
(SHT2)
ISA_D0
ISA_D1
ISA_D2
ISA_D3
ISA_D4
ISA_D5
ISA_D6
ISA_D7
U20
74HCT374
(SHT2)
74HC14A
11
R78
U19D
100K
10
604 OHM
R82
8
PS2506-4
+12V
(SHT2)
100K
R86
CR3
10 OHM
1N4148W
ISA_D[0..15]
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
Q2
MMBT4400
74HC14A
R83
9
604 OHM
U24D
8
9
ISA_D0
ISA_D1
ISA_D2
ISA_D3
ISA_D4
ISA_D5
ISA_D6
ISA_D7
TALLY 2
CR2
1N4148W
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
R84 2.00K
SW
FB
4
C38
1.0UF
1
Vin
VCC
C33
GND
2
R73
14.7K
0.1UF
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
R74
5.62K
R85
100K
C34
100PF
R87
11.3K
C37
1.0UF
C36
1.0UF
R89
10 OHM
CR4
Q3
MMBT4400
CR1
1N4148W
(SHT2)
R88
2.00K
1N4148W
TALLY 1
R71
2.00K
BKLITE_ON
R79 2.00K
C
3
EN
R67
2.0 OHM
R66
301 OHM
U21 TPS61041
5
R63
2.0 OHM
ISA_D7
ISA_D6
ISA_D5
ISA_D4
RNET 100K
REMOTE IN-N
KEY
J10
TO LCD BACKLIGHT
4
3
2
TRIMMED
FOR KEY
1
4
HDR 2X2
1
J11
+5V
10
9
8
7
6
+5V
6
+5V
RN61
MISC_OUT-N
TO LCD
RNET 100K
CONTRAST
ISA_D0 1
ISA_D1 2
ISA_D2 3
ISA_D3 4
5
74HC14A
5
10
9 FP_D7
8 FP_D6
7 FP_D5
6 FP_D4
+5V
+5V
100K
PS2506-4
7
U24B
4
3
12
604 OHM
R77
6
R80
1
19
U24C
U19C
604 OHM
L2
3.9uH
L4 10uH
C69
U24A
2
100K
14
PS2506-4
5
74HC14A
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
R65
13
604 OHM
C67
R59
1
PS2506-4
604 OHM
R69
4
C64
U23D
8
74HC14A
604 OHM
3
9
100K
PS2506-4
604 OHM
R64
2
R68
100K
PS2506-4
604 OHM
R60
8
R62
+5V
6
74HC14A
FP_D01
FP_D12
FP_D23
FP_D34
5
+5V
1
2
3
ISA_A0
4
ISA_IOWR-N
5
DISPLAY
6
FP_D0
7
FP_D1
8
FP_D2
9
FP_D3
10
FP_D4
11
FP_D5
12
FP_D6
13
FP_D7
14
Q1
MMBT4400
R75
2.0 OHM
CR5
1N4148W
MMBT4400 OUTLINE
SOT-23
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
R72
10.0K
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
FP_COL_B-N
FP_ROW_C-N
FP_ROW_B-N
FP_ROW_A-N
FP_COL_A-N
(RESERVED)
ENCODER-N
FP_ROW_D-N
LED-N
FP_D7
FP_D6
FP_D5
FP_D4
FP_D3
FP_D2
FP_D1
FP_D0
TO FRONT PANEL
DISPLAY PCA
1
2
9
10
19
20
25
26
HDR 13X2
E
B
+5V
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+5V
C35
+
R58
20
U23C
U17C
5
FP_D7
FP_D6
FP_D5
FP_D4
FP_D3
FP_D2
FP_D1
FP_D0
GND
R55
604 OHM
C72
100PF
+5V
CR8
604 OHM
R56
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
MT
CR9
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
RN52
10
26
FP_D[0..7]
+5V
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
20
MT
74HC14A
100K
PS2506-4
DIR
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
E
VCC
J9
R54
13
604 OHM
ISA_IORD-N 1
ISA_D7 2
ISA_D6 3
ISA_D5 4
ISA_D4 5
ISA_D3 6
ISA_D2 7
ISA_D1 8
ISA_D0 9
FP_BUSEN-N19
CLK
C59
(SHT2)
OE
C56
C58
U22
74ACT245
11
C55
C63
U23B
4
3
10
C54
C62
14
20
C53
C61
U17B
3
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
+5V
100K
PS2506-4
604 OHM
R53
4
2
74HC14A
VCC
C52
DB25-M
R51
2x HSM160J
15
R50
GND
10x 100pF
1
GND
604 OHM
16
1
1
604 OHM
R49
2
10
R48
L1
3.9uH
5
1
U23A
U17A
FRONT PANEL
CONNECTIONS
JP1
+5V
10UF
C39
0.1UF
CONTROL BOARD:
MISCELLANEOUS I/O
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
+3.3V
U10B DP83816AVNG
+3.3V
(NO-STUFF)
34
42
43
48
C201
1.0UF
NC
NC
NC
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
28
41
54
+3.3V
35
20
32
8
16
26
84
136
65
77
90
103
114
57
124
51
52
55
38
44
37
49
126
6
12
46
52
36
VSS
VSS
VSS
AUXVDD
AUXVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
AUXVDD
VSS
AUXVDD
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSS
PCIVDD
PCIVDD
PCIVDD
PCIVDD
PCIVDD
VSS
AUXVDD
VSS
AUXVDD
AUXVDD
+3.3V
U2B MT48LC16
127
50
41
21
33
VSS
VSS
VSS
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
+3.3V
U3B MT48LC16
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
NC
1
14
27
28
41
54
3
9
43
49
40
6
12
46
52
9
19
27
85
137
VSS
VSS
VSS
U4B E28F128
1
14
27
VDD
VDD
VDD
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VCC
VCC
3
9
43
49
40
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
NC
VCCQ
21
42
48
37
9
43
GND
GND
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
C200
0.1UF
69
80
94
107
117
+
C202
10UF
+3.3V
C187
0.1UF
C125
1.0UF
58
125
C126
0.01UF
C132
1.0UF
C127
0.01UF
C133
0.01UF
C188
0.1UF
C134
0.01UF
56
VSS
VSS
+3.3V
VSS
VSS
IAUXVDD
IAUXVDD
VSS
VREF
39
47
40
R33
10.0K
+3.3V
+3.3V
U7B 74ALVC164245
C175
1.0UF
C176
1.0UF
C178
1.0UF
C181
1.0UF
C183
1.0UF
4
10
15
21
C184
0.1UF
28
34
39
45
+3.3V
C177
0.1UF
C179
0.1UF
C182
0.1UF
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
+5V
28
34
39
45
18
7
+2.5V
C161
1.0UF
3
2
BAT54C
BBATSENSE
1.00K
C21
0.1UF
B25
T16
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
R16
R15
R14
R13
R12
R11
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
N16
N15
N14
N13
N12
N11
M16
M15
M14
M13
M12
M11
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
BBATSEN
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
VCC_I/O
AC15
AC14
AC7
AC6
AC5
R23
P23
T4
R4
H23
G23
F4
E4
D19
D18
D12
D11
C186
0.1UF
28
34
39
45
18
7
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
+5V
18
7
C162
0.01UF
C151
1.0UF
C155
1.0UF
C156
0.01UF
C159
1.0UF
C160
0.01UF
C185
0.01UF
+3.3V
AC19
AC18
AC11
AC10
AA4
Y4
AA23
Y23
W23
V23
L23
K23
M4
L4
K4
J4
D22
D21
D16
D15
D8
D7
D6
D5
+2.5V
+5V
1
J12
FROM I/O /DSP PCA
1
2
C43
0.1UF
+
C42
10UF
+
GND_ANLG
VCC_ANLG
IN
C13
10UF
OUT
3
C14
1.0UF
+
C15
10UF
HDR 2
TP100
DGND
+3.3V
1
+2.5V
A25
U14
LT1963-2.5
4
1
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
VCC_CORE
TAB
GND
VCC_RTC
2
BAT54C
1
C158
0.01UF
U15
LT1963-3.3
4
C20
0.1UF
CR12
2
C157
1.0UF
B26
IN
TAB
GND
A26
3
2
BT1
BATTERY
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
42
31
U1F SC520
1
10 OHM
R35
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
GND
GND
GND
GND
+2.5V
2
R34
VCC
VCC
+3.3V
U9B 74ALVC164245
4
10
15
21
42
31
+5V
C153
1.0UF
VBAT
CR11
GND
GND
GND
GND
C180
0.01UF
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
U8B 74ALVC164245
4
10
15
21
42
31
+
C16
10UF
OUT
3
C17
1.0UF
+
C18
10UF
CONTROL BOARD:
POWER AND GROUND DISTRIBUTION
6-27
6-28
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
2
CR103
TRANSZORB
C103
OPA2134PA
C133
R160
INPUT
4.99K
1%
5
C135
R122
5.36K
0.1%
Vdd
IN4
14.7K
1%
+ C112
10µF
20V
C121
0.1µF
50V
2
OPA2134UA
R157
R146
1.62K
1%
1.50K 1%
R145
3.65K
0.1%
5
DD7
AGND
249OHM
1%
R147
3.65K
0.1%
R148
R151
150OHM
1%
3.65K 0.1%
AGND2
+ C122
10µF
20V
C115
4700PF
5%,50V
C116
4700PF
5%,50V
-15V
IC106A
1
2
IC105B
5
7
SMODE1
AINL+
HPFE
AINL-
AINR+
AGND
C123
0.1µF
50V
C124
0.1µF
50V
FSYNC
26
C126
0.1µF
50V
VCOMR
LRCK
28
C125
0.1µF
50V
AINR-
VREFR
SDATA
27
TEST
GNDR
6
10
9
RSTAD-N
(SHT9)
??
DFS
18
(SHT9)
12
11
19
17
AIN_MCLK
14
IN_BCLK
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
C136
47PF
5%,100V
16
13
IN_FCLK
15
R158
20
75OHM
1%
R155
249OHM
1%
(SHT9)
AIN_DATA
(SHT9)
E205
R149
3
7
6
DFS
VCOML
SCLK
R150
5
AGND2
RST
GNDL
AGND
47PF
5%,100V
IC106B
7
6
ZCAL
VREFL
SMODE2
R141
1.50K
1%
+ C130
10µF
20V
IC107
AK5383-VS
CAL
25
C114
OPA2134UA
+15V
249OHM
1%
AGND
OPA2134UA
C117
0.47µF
25V
DD[4..7]
R152
1.00M
1%
AGND
47PF
5%,100V
R162
AGND2
E204
+5V
3.65K, 0.1%, 0805
NO-STUFF
1.50K, 1%, 0805
C100, C102, C104, C106
1000pF, 1%, 50V, 0805
0.01uF, 5%, 50V, 0805
C132, C133, C134, C135
NO-STUFF
8200pF, 5%, 50V, 0805
(SHT8)
D[0..7]
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
DD0
DD1
DD2
DD3
DD4
DD5
DD6
DD7
CLK
4.99K, 1%, 0805
R159, R160, R161, R162
OE
R101, R108, R116, R121
IC108
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
AGND4
AGND3
AGND2
AGND1
AGND
DD[0..7]
I/O+DSP BOARD: LEFT AND RIGHT ANALOG INPUTS
74HCT374PW
11
301OHM, 1%, 0805
VCC
20
1.00K, 1%, 0805
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
1
9300 VA LUE
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
GND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
10
6300 VA LUE
5.62K
1%
R129
8
IN3
9
1
OPA2134PA
C107
AGND2
REF. DESIGNA T OR
1.50K 1%
5
DD4
2
CR105
TRANSZORB
R121
1200µH
5%
C106
1000PF
7
6
S4
DD6
AGND2
IC102B
L107
Vss
GND
6
R120
3.65K
0.1%
2.10K
1%
R128
11
S3
IN1
4.99K
1%
14
S2
R126
768OHM
1%
R127
3
S1
D1
D2
D3
D4
IN2
R124
3
4
NC
2
15
10
7
13
IC103
ADG442ABRZ
(NO-STUFF)
L106
FILTER
1
R144
1.62K
1%
C128
0.1µF
50V
MCLK
R143
R153
-15V+15V
R118
R123
82.5K
1%
R119
604OHM-TH
1%
C120
0.1µF
50V
1
21
R117
5.36KAGND2
0.1%
-15V
12
R161
C119
0.1µF
50V
3
4
C105
2
47PF
5%,100V
C134
AGND
C118
0.1µF
50V
24
AGND2
R100, R107, R115, R120
1.00M
1%
8
8
CR104
TRANSZORB
COMPONENT
R140
1.50K
1%
R142
0.47µF
25V
E103
16
3
1000PF
IC102A
OPA2134PA
1
3
1200µH
5%
C104
+ C131
10µF
20V
+5VA
+15V
C111
0.1µF
50V
R116
L105
2
?????
R115
3
249OHM
1%
E102
DD5
2
C113
C127
0.1µF
50V
4
4
1
4
+ C129
10µF
20V
R139
OPA2134UA
AGND1
L104
FILTER
1
C110
4700PF
5%,50V
VD
13
Vss
Vdd
14.7K
1%
+15V
J103
FEMALE
OPA2134UA
2
-15V
C109
4700PF
5%,50V
47PF
5%,100V
AGND1
RIGHT ANALOG
3
1
DD[0..3]
R109
5.36K
0.1%
IC104A
1
2
IC105A
3
5
1200µH
5%
C102
1000PF
5.62K
1%
R114
3.65K
0.1%
-15V
AGND1
+3.3V
+5VA
R138
150OHM
1%
DGND
7
R108
1.50K 1%
R133
3.65K
0.1%
+15V
AGND1
DD3
L103
DD0
R107
3
1
6
L102
FILTER
1
1.62K
1%
249OHM
1%
R135
3.65K
0.1%
R136
R134
8
IC100B
6
S4
IN4
AGND1
11
R137
OPA2134UA
R156
2.10K
1%
R113
8
IN1
4.99K
1%
GND
5
23
5
14
S3
IN3
R105
768OHM
1%
R112
3
S2
IN2
(NO-STUFF)
IC101
ADG442ABRZ R111
S1
D1
D2
D3
D4
DD1
R106
604OHM-TH
1%
2
15
10
7
16
AGND1
NC
R104
82.5K
1%
4
12
4.99K
1%
6
1.62K
1%
47PF
5%,100V
IC104B
7
VA
-15V+15V
R103
AGND1
R132
AGND
-15V
BGND
R102
5.36K
0.1%
C108
22
R159
1.50K 1%
E101
9
C132
CR100
TRANSZORB
R131
3.65K
0.1%
4
1
C101
2
47PF
5%,100V
R130
8
3
1200µH
5%
C100
1000PF
3
R101
DD2
L101
2
?????
R100
3
4
2
IC100A
OPA2134PA
8
L100
FILTER
1
8
+15V
J100
FEMALE
1
4
6-29
INPUT
4
LEFT ANALOG
TECHNICAL DATA
INGAINCS-N
(SHT8)
6-30
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
LEFT ANALOG
OUTPUT (6300)
ANALOG
OUTPUT 1 (9300)
L204
2
C218
470PF
1%,50V
2
R217
1
3
AK4393VF
R214
R215
R216
8.45K 1%
8.45K 1%
82.5K 1%
C220
470PF
1%,50V
AGND4
AGND4
AGND
R219
11.3K
1%
CR203
8
2
1
2
5
R220
3.48K 1% 8.45K
R246
1%
3.48K
R234
1%
11.3K
1%
+15V
AGND3
6
R218
C235
3.48K
1%
R248
1.00M
1%
0.47µF 25V
-15V
IC212A
1
AGND4
ANALOG
OUTPUT 2 (9300)
AGND3
OPA2134UA
L206
R250
110OHM
1%
RIGHT/2
OUTPUT
TRIM
10K
R252
10.0K
1%
3
C238
C242
C239
C243
R263
3
1000PF
+15V
AGND4
4
IC214
DRV134PA
AGND4
AGND4
3
R264
L203
FILTER
5
2
1
+15V
J202
MALE
L210
2
OPA2134UA
R259
R255
VR201
L202
FILTER
1
R256
R260
L211
-15V
1
3
2
1
4
?????
3
16
AGND3
5
1500PF
1%,50V
IC202A
OPA2134UA
RIGHT ANALOG
OUTPUT (6300)
6
TRANSZORB
VREFL
4
E200
L205
R251
10.0K
1%
IC212B
7
AGND3
5
?????
1000PF
-15V
VR200
3
1
1
4
10K
C222
82.5K 1%
-15V
AGND3
0.47µF
25V
IC202B
OPA2134UA
7
R258
L209
2
TRANSZORB
8.45K 1%
AGND3
AGND3
R254
CR204
82.5K 1%
R213
C234
3.48K
1%
L201
FILTER
CR205
8.45K 1%
8.45K 1%
R212
C219
470PF
1%,50V
R206
11.3K
1%
R262
2
8.45K 1%
R211
R209
R208
R205
C241
1000PF
2
R207
R210
3.48K 1% 8.45K
R245
1%
3.48K
R233
1%
11.3K
1%
+15V
110OHM
R247
1%
1.00M
1%
7
20
E203
21
R204
1
3
R249
6
8
22
E202
23
IC201A
OPA2134UA
7
6
??
E201
5
C237
R261
IC213
DRV134PA
3
6
C217
470PF
1%,50V
25
2
1500PF
1%,50V
IC201B
OPA2134UA
7
CW
4
82.5K 1%
-15V
4
LEFT/ 1
OUTPUT
TRIM
CW
8.45K
1%
8
24
VCOM
18
AVDD
AOUTR+
17
C221
R203
C240
+15V
4
C202
0.1µF
50V
AOUTR-
CKS0
CKS1
CKS2
R202
8
26
27
28
AOUTL+
DIF0
DIF1
DIF2
8.45K
1%
AGND
8
C200
1.0µF
CKS01
DEM0
DEM1
BVSS
(SHT9)
AOUTL-
15
12
13
14
P/S
AVSS
DFS
AGND
IC211
VREFH
19
(SHT9)
10
11
DVSS
10.0K 1%
MCLK
PD
BICK
SDATA
LRCK
SMUTE
DFS
1
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
R237
DVDD
2
R201
C236
CR202
Servo
f-3dB = 0.10Hz
C203
0.1µF 50V
+3.3V
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
L208
C233
0.1µF 50V
AOUT_MCLK
RSTDA-N
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_FCLK
J201
MALE
3
R257
R253
C232
1.0µF
L200
FILTER
1
TRANSZORB
C201
1.0µF
TRANSZORB
+5VA
1000PF
L207
AGND4
COMPONENT
AGND4
AGND3
AGND2
AGND1
REF. DESIGNA T OR
6300 VA LUE
9300 VA LUE
L204, L205, L206, L207
3.9uH, 1008
NO-STUFF
L208, L209, L210, L211
NO-STUFF
1200uH, 5%
R253, R254, R255, R256
NO-STUFF
49.9ohm, 1%, 0805
R257, R258, R259, R260
NO-STUFF
100ohm, 1%, 0805
R261, R262, R263, R264
NO-STUFF
475ohm, 1%, 0805
C236, C237, C238, C239
NO-STUFF
1000pF, 1%, 50V, 0805
C240, C241, C242, C243
NO-STUFF
1500pF, 1%, 50V, 0805
AGND
I/O+DSP BOARD: ANALOG OUTPUTS
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
PICSDI
(SHT8)
AES/EBU
DIGITAL
INPUT
E313
AESINCS-N
(SHT8)
J300
FEMALE
R301
49.9K
1%
L300
AESINLRCK
AESINSCLK
PICSCK
C300
1
4
2
FERRITE
0.1µF
IC300
R300
1%
110OHM
1
2
3
?????
T300
SC937-02
1
5
L301
3
4
4
2
8
5
+5V
FERRITE
C301
0.1µF
C303
0.33µF
10%
R302
1.62K
1%
6
C305
1000PF
1%,50v
7
8
9
C306
4700PF
5%,NPO
10
11
E300
E301
E302
(SHT8)
(SHT5)
SRCRST-N
AESINRMCK
6-31
12
13
14
R310
49.9K
??
SDA/CDOUT
SCL/CCLK
AD0/CS
AD1/CDIN
EMPH
RXP
RXN
VA+
AGND
FILT
RST
RMCK
RERR
TXR
TXN
H/S
VL+
DGND
OMCK
U
INT
SDOUT
ILRCK
OLRCK
ISCLK
OSCLK
SDIN
CS8427-CSZ
TCBL
28
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT8)
PICSDO
IC302
(SHT8)
1
27
26
25
E303
(SHT9)
E315
MCLK_A
+5V
2
3
24
23
21
20
19
18
4
C302
0.1µF
22
(SHT9)
MCLK_A
5
6
R304
E312
DIINT
49.9K 1%
(SHT9)
NC
MMODE_2
MCLK_IN
MMODE_1
MCLK_OUT
MMODE_0
SDATA_I
SCLK_I
LRCLK_I
SCLK_O
LRCLK_O
SDATA_O
28
27
26
25
IN_BCLK
24
IN_FCLK
23
75OHM 1%
+5V
7
17
R303
8
VDD_IO
DGND
VDD_CORE
DGND
DIN_DATA
+3.3V
22
21
C309
0.1µF
16
9
15
E316
R311
49.9K
??
10
11
12
(SHT8)
SRCRST-N
13
14
BYPASS
TDM_IN
SMODE_IN_0
SMODE_OUT_0
SMODE_IN_1
SMODE_OUT_1
SMODE_IN_2 WLNGTH_OUT_0
RESET
MUTE_IN
WLNGTH_OUT_1
MUTE_OUT
20
19
18
17
16
15
AD1895AYRS
I/O+DSP BOARD: DIGITAL INPUT
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
6-32
TECHNICAL DATA
IC400
+5V
4
(SHT9)
6
MCLK_C
5
7
74ACT32
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
DOUT1_DATA 4
DOUT1_BCLK 5
DOUT1_FCLK 6
74ACT32
7
+5V
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
1
10
(SHT8)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
10
Y
5
12
(SHT8)
W
16
IC409D
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
IC408
LRCLK_O
LRCLK_I
SDATA_O
24
5
23
4
VDD_IO
DGND
VDD_CORE
DGND
22
7
C400
0.1µF
21
BYPASS
TDM_IN
20
SRCRST-N 9
SMODE_IN_0
SMODE_OUT_0
SMODE_IN_1
SMODE_OUT_1
19
10
18
11
SMODE_IN_2 WLNGTH_OUT_0
17
12
RESET
WLNGTH_OUT_1
16
13
MUTE_IN
MUTE_OUT
15
14
7
5
1
MCKOUT2
(SHT9)
W
MCLK_C
2
3
6
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
74HC151
DOUT2_BCLK
5
DOUT2_FCLK
6
1OE
2OE
3OE
4OE
GND
7
9
74ACT32
11
12
74ACT32
(SHT8)
IC409C
6
SRCRST-N
NC
MMODE_2
MCLK_IN
MMODE_1
MCLK_OUT
MMODE_0
SDATA_I
SCLK_O
28
(SHT8)
27
(SHT8)
11
AESOUT2CS-N 2
3
H/S
L401
24
VD
VL
FERRITE
23
TEST
DGND
TEST
OMCK
22
21
MCKOUT1
RST
U
TEST
INT
TEST
TEST
ILRCK
TEST
ISCLK
TEST
SDIN
TCBL
R401
20
19
E401 49.9K 1%
DO1INT
18
17
16
15
R402
SDA/CDOUT
SCL/CCLK
AD0/CS
AD1/CDIN
AD2
TXP
28
PICSCK
27
PICSDO
(SHT8)
4
25
RXP
TXN
1 T401
SCLK_I
LRCLK_O
LRCLK_I
SDATA_O
VDD_IO
VDD_CORE
DGND
DGND
BYPASS
TDM_IN
SMODE_IN_0
SMODE_OUT_0
SMODE_IN_1
SMODE_OUT_1
13
SMODE_IN_2 WLNGTH_OUT_0
RESET
MUTE_IN
WLNGTH_OUT_1
MUTE_OUT
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
AESINLRCK
AESINSCLK
SYNCINLRCK
SYNCINSCLK
5
5
24
DGND
H/S
+5V
6
7
22
C401
0.1µF
21
8
VD
VL
TEST
DGND
TEST
OMCK
RST
U
22
21
MCKOUT2
20
(SHT8)
10
19
TEST
INT
TEST
TEST
ILRCK
TEST
ISCLK
TEST
SDIN
TCBL
SC937-02
FERRITE
23
E403
SRCRST-N 9
20
1
4
?????
8
L403
24
+5V
23
2
FERRITE
4
25
J401
MALE
L402
(SHT8)
R403
26
AES/EBU
DIGITAL
OUTPUT 2
110OHM1%
19
R404
E404 49.9K 1%
DO2INT
Note: ALL THESE
COMPONENTS ARE
STUFFED ONLY ON
THE 6300. THEYARE
ALL NO-STUFFS ON
9300.
(SHT8)
11
18
12
17
13
16
18
17
16
E405
14
15
15
R405
49.9K 1%
CS8406-CZZ
1
4
10
13
74ACT04D
E412
1
PICSDI
26
+5V
IC405
IC409G
74ACT04D
74ACT32
IC411D
12
DGND
+5V
E414
8
SC937-02
IC404
+3.3V
8
10
5
4
25
3
6
8
11
1Y
2Y
3Y
4Y
AD1895AYRS
E413
TXN
1
4
?????
14
VCC
1A
2A
3A
4A
+5V
14
11
RXP
2
+5V
8
E409
5
FERRITE
2
DOUT2_DATA 4
IC411C
9
SPARES
1 T400
R400
26
CS8406-CZZ
2
5
9
12
10
74ACT04D
13
8
5
10
TXP
J400
MALE
L400
(SHT8)
+5V
6
IC402
6
IC409E
74ACT32
4
IC411B
74ACT32
8
11
13
SCLK_I
AESINLRCK
AESINSCLK
SYNCINLRCK
SYNCINSCLK
74ACT04D
E411
25
1
4
10
13
7
2
9
E410
SCLK_O
74HC151
14
3
E408
SDATA_I
IC401
+5V
IC411A
1
AD2
E402
(SHT9)
IC410D
12
3
AD1895AYRS
Y
8
E406
10.0K
1%
PICSDO
49.9K 1%
R406
E407
26
74ACT125
S
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
13
VCC
A
B
C
SRCRST-N
14
GND
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
33.8688MHZ
SYNCINRMCK
36.864MHZB
R407
10.0K
1%
AESOUT1CS-N 2
6
14
(SHT9)
(SHT4)
(SHT9)
12.288MHZ
16.9344MHZ
AESINRMCK
18.432MHZ
7
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT4)
(SHT9)
(SHT8)
MCKOUT1
+5V
7
27
(SHT8)
(SHT8)
11
S
DOUTSRCS-N
11
10
9
AD1/CDIN
PICSCK
(SHT8)
VCC
A
B
C
IC407
8
(SHT8)
9
16
7
AD0/CS
28
E400
GND
11
10
9
CLK
20
VCC
OE
GND
IC406
74HCT374PW
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
SCL/CCLK
+3.3V
8
D[0..7]
27
+5V
+5V
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
MMODE_0
SDA/CDOUT
+5V
10
4
74ACT04D
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
MCLK_OUT
1
PICSDI
8
3
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
MMODE_1
(SHT8)
2
(SHT9)
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
MCLK_IN
28
110OHM1%
IC410C
9
IC409B
2
3
74ACT32
74ACT04D
MMODE_2
3
3
NC
AES/EBU
DIGITAL
OUTPUT 1
IC410B
2
2
1
1
IC403
3
14
IC410A
1
IC409A
ORBAN MODEL 9300
2
5
9
12
7
1OE
2OE
3OE
4OE
VCC
1A
2A
3A
4A
GND
74ACT125
1Y
2Y
3Y
4Y
14
3
6
8
11
I/O+DSP BOARD: DIGITAL OUTPUT
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
IC501A
DSP56367-150
E36 E37
SD03
SD04
SD01
IN_FCLK
IN_BCLK
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
+1.8V
SD02
EXTALA
+3.3V
C501
11
10
7
13
15
17
59
60
48
55
61
45
46
47
E28
SDO0
SDI0
SDO1
SDI1
SDO3/SDI2 SDO2/SD13
FST
FSR
SCKT
SCKR
HCKT
HCKR
FSR_1
FST_1
SCKR_1
SDO5_1/SDI0_1 SCKT_1
EXTAL SDO4_1/SDI1_1
MODA/IRQA
PINIT/NMI
MODB/IRQB
VCCP
MODC/IRQC
PCAP
MODD/IRQD
GNDP
4
5
6
12
14
16
50
53
138
137
136
135
134
SD00
FSYNCA
BCLKA
11
10
7
13
15
17
59
60
48
55
61
45
46
47
E30
SDO0
SDI0
SDO1
SDI1
SDO3/SDI2 SDO2/SD13
FST
FSR
SCKT
SCKR
HCKT
HCKR
FSR_1
FST_1
SCKR_1
SDO5_1/SDI0_1 SCKT_1
EXTAL SDO4_1/SDI1_1
MODA/IRQA
PINIT/NMI
MODB/IRQB
VCCP
MODC/IRQC
PCAP
MODD/IRQD
GNDP
4
5
6
12
14
16
50
53
138
137
136
135
134
FSYNCA
BCLKA
SD11
IC503A
DSP56367-150
E31
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
+1.8V
+3.3V
SD20
EXTALA
+3.3V
C505
6800PF
C504
11
10
7
13
15
17
59
60
48
55
61
45
46
47
SDO0
SDI0
SDO1
SDI1
SDO3/SDI2 SDO2/SD13
FST
FSR
SCKT
SCKR
HCKT
HCKR
FSR_1
FST_1
SCKR_1
SDO5_1/SDI0_1 SCKT_1
EXTAL SDO4_1/SDI1_1
MODA/IRQA
PINIT/NMI
MODB/IRQB
VCCP
MODC/IRQC
PCAP
MODD/IRQD
GNDP
E32
4
5
6
12
14
16
FSYNCA
BCLKA
SD21
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
SD30
EXTALA
(SHT9)
+1.8V
+3.3V
+3.3V
C507
11
10
7
13
15
17
59
60
48
55
61
45
46
47
6800PF
C508
0.47µF
E49 E34 E35 E38
IC504A
DSP56367-150
E33
E39
50
53
138
137
136
135
134
6800PF
C506
0.47µF
0.47µF
(SHT8)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
SD10
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
EXTALA
+1.8V
+3.3V
+3.3V
C503
6800PF
C502
(SHT8)
IC502A
DSP56367-150
E29
SDO0
SDI0
SDO1
SDI1
SDO3/SDI2 SDO2/SD13
FST
FSR
SCKT
SCKR
HCKT
HCKR
FSR_1
FST_1
SCKR_1
SDO5_1/SDI0_1 SCKT_1
EXTAL SDO4_1/SDI1_1
MODA/IRQA
PINIT/NMI
MODB/IRQB
VCCP
MODC/IRQC
PCAP
MODD/IRQD
GNDP
6-33
4
5
6
12
14
16
SD32
SD33
SD34
FSYNCA
BCLKA
50
53
138
137
136
135
134
OUT_FCLK
OUT_BCLK
SD31
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
+3.3V
0.47µF
IRQB-N
(SHT9)
HA[0..2]
HD[0..7]
IC501B
DSP56367-150
HD7
HD6
HD5
HD4
HD3
HD2
HD1
HD0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
IC502B
DSP56367-150
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD-N
(SHT8)
DSPEN0-N
(SHT8)
HWR-N
(SHT8)
DSPRST-N
(SHT8)
HD7
HD6
HD5
HD4
HD3
HD2
HD1
HD0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
IC503B
DSP56367-150
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD-N
(SHT8)
DSPEN1-N
(SHT8)
HWR-N
(SHT8)
DSPRST-N
(SHT8)
HD7
HD6
HD5
HD4
HD3
HD2
HD1
HD0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
IC504B
DSP56367-150
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD-N
(SHT8)
DSPEN2-N
(SHT8)
HWR-N
(SHT8)
DSPRST-N
(SHT8)
HD7
HD6
HD5
HD4
HD3
HD2
HD1
HD0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD-N
(SHT8)
DSPEN3-N
(SHT8)
HWR-N
(SHT8)
DSPRST-N
(SHT8)
I/O+DSP BOARD: DSP ESAI AND HOST INTERFACE
6-34
IC501C
DSP56367-150
AA0/RAS0
AA1/RAS1
AA2/RAS2
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
70
69
51
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
AA0/RAS0
AA1/RAS1
AA2/RAS2
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
IC504C
DSP56367-150
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
AA0/RAS0
AA1/RAS1
AA2/RAS2
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
70
69
51
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
TCK
TDI
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
TDO
1
144
143
2
3
28
E603
27
29
141
140
139
142
GNDS
GNDS
TMS
9
(NO-STUFF)
R603
0 OHM
1%
25
8
VCCS
VCCC
38
65
57
VCCC
VCCH
TIO0
(SHT8)
26
142
ADO
GNDH
139
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
SCK
MISO
MOSI
SS
HREQ
ACI
39
140
GNDC
141
66
+1.8V
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDC
E602
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
58
TMS
+3.3V
27
29
IC504D
DSP56367-150
+3.3V
1
144
143
2
3
28
DSPEN3-N
(SHT8)
(NO-STUFF)
R602
0 OHM
1%
25
8
VCCS
38
VCCH
57
65
VCCC
TDO
GNDS
142
TDI
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
26
139
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
TCK
GNDS
140
TIO0
9
141
ADO
GNDH
29
SCK
MISO
MOSI
SS
HREQ
ACI
39
+1.8V
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDC
TMS
27
VCCC
25
8
VCCS
38
VCCH
57
65
VCCC
TDO
E601
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
66
142
TDI
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
+3.3V
1
144
143
2
3
28
IC503D
DSP56367-150
+3.3V
GNDC
139
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
(NO-STUFF)
R601
0 OHM
1%
DSPEN2-N
(SHT8)
58
140
TCK
GNDS
141
TIO0
26
GNDS
26
GNDS
9
GNDH
39
GNDC
TMS
29
ADO
GNDS
TDO
+1.8V
9
TCK
27
SCK
MISO
MOSI
SS
HREQ
ACI
GNDH
TIO0
E600
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
39
ADO
28
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
GNDC
ACI
1
144
143
2
3
IC502D
DSP56367-150
66
SCK
MISO
MOSI
SS
HREQ
TDI
66
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
DSPEN1-N
+3.3V
R600
0 OHM
1%
+3.3V
25
38
8
VCCS
VCCC
VCCH
65
57
VCCC
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
(SHT8)
(NO-STUFF)
IC501D
DSP56367-150
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
GNDC
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
AA0/RAS0
AA1/RAS1
AA2/RAS2
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
DSPEN0-N
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
58
+1.8V
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
70
69
51
IC503C
DSP56367-150
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
ORBAN MODEL 9300
SSI_DO
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK
(SHT8)
(SHT8)
(SHT8)
+3.3V
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
VCCC
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
GNDC
70
69
51
+3.3V
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
58
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
IC502C
DSP56367-150
TECHNICAL DATA
I/O+DSP BOARD: DSP, SPI, POWER, GROUND & NC
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
IC702
74LVX4245
+3.3V
+5V
+5V
D[0..7]
(SHT6)
+3.3V
(SHT2)
E700
(SHT5)
E701
E702
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
(SHT9)
3
INGAINCS-N 4
5
DOUTSRCS-N 6
7
8
12.288MHZ
14
15
R703
10.0K
1%
RN701
100K-RESNET
RD0/PSP0 RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RD1/PSP1 RC1/T1OSI/CCP2
RC2/CCP1
RD2/PSP2
RC3/SCK/SCL
RD3/PSP3
RC4/SDI/SDA
RD4/PSP4
RC5/SDO
RD5/PSP5
RC6/TX/CK
RD6/PSP6
RC7/RX/DT
RD7/PSP7
RE0/RD
RE1/WR
RE2/CS
RA0
RB0/INT
RA1
RB1
RA2
RB2
RA3
RB3
RA4/T0CKI
RB4
RA5/SS
RB5
RB6
OSC1/CLKIN
RB7
OSC2/CLKOUT
MCLR/Vpp
16
18
19
20
25
26
27
29
9
10
11
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
E703
E704
E705
PICSCK
PICSDI
PICSDO
SIN2
(SHT4,5)
(SHT4,5)
(SHT4,5) IC704A
1
R700
49.9K
1%
SOUT2
3
2
PIO28/CTS2-N
RTS2-N
E706
AESOUT1CS-N
(SHT5)
AESOUT2CS-N
(SHT5)
AESINCS-N
(SHT4)
SYNCCS-N
(SHT4)
E707
E708
E709
74ACT32
+5V
14
(SHT2,5)
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
IC704B
4
6
IC704C
5
NC
NC
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
R725
4.99K
1%
Note: +3.3V come
from CONTROL
COMBO PCA via
J701.
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
IC409F
12
13
ISA_RESET
74ACT04D
DACK1-N
SSI_DO
ISA_A6
ISA_A7
ISA_A5
(SHT7)
NC
NC
NC
IC701
74AHC541
+3.3V
ISA_A2
PIO25/GPIOCS16-N
PIO27/GPCS0-N
DSPEN1-N
DSPEN3-N
RTS2-N
SIN2
PITGATE2/GPCS3-N
ROMCS2-N/GPCS2-N
+5V
IDC HEADER 30X2
FROM CONTROL COMBO PCA
ISA_IORD-N
ISA_IOWR-N
ISA_A0
ISA_A1
ISA_A2
NC
NC
(SHT6,7)
(SHT6,7)
DACK1-N
NC
NC
ISA_IORD-N
R704
100.0K
1%
R705
100.0K
1%
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
19
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
VCC
(SHT9)
NC
(SHT6,7)
(SHT6,7)
DO2INT
C701
?????
GND
NC
NC
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
24.576MHZB
PIO26/GPMEMCS16-N
DSPEN0-N
DSPEN2-N
PIO28/CTS2-N
SOUT2
PIO2/GPRDY
ROMCS1-N/GPCS1-N
START
DSPRST-N
ISA_IOWR-N
13
20
NC
NC
5082-2800
+3.3V
DO1INT
49.9K 1%
ISA_D7
NC
12
R707
74ACT32
IO_RESET-N
10
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
ISA_D0
SMEMWR-N
SMEMRD-N
ISA_IORD-N
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK
DREQ1
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
(SHT4)
49.9K 1%
1
17
28
40
34
13
NC
NC
(SHT4)
R706
IC704D
R702
1.00K
1%
CR700
ISA_D5
ISA_D2
ISA_D1
ISA_AEN
SIINT
11
J701
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
10
74ACT32
2
+5V
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
DIINT
74ACT32
+5V
ISA_RESET
DSP_BUSEN-N
ISA_D6
ISA_D4
ISA_D3
9
8
7
74HCT374PW
MISCCS-N
HD[0..7]
35
VDD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
NC
NC
NC
NC
ADRST-N
DARST-N
SRCRST-N
VDD
12
AES
E712
E713
E714
(SHT4)
E715
(SHT9)
(SHT9)
(SHT4,5)
VSS
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
VSS
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
CLK
VCC
IC700
11
HD0
HD1
HD2
HD3
HD4
HD5
HD6
HD7
OE
DSP_BUSEN-N
13
12
NC
OE
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
GND
B to A
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
GND
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
1
24
VccB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
GND
IORD-N
ISA_D0
ISA_D1
ISA_D2
ISA_D3
ISA_D4
ISA_D5
ISA_D6
ISA_D7
GND
VccA
ISA_D[0..7]
1
0.1µF
50V
IC703
PIC16C67-20L
+5V
20
C700
6-35
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
HRD-N
HWR-N
HA0
HA1
HA2
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
IORD-N
J700
DREQ1
1
2
HDR 2X1
UNSHRD
I/O+DSP BOARD: 8-BIT I/O CONTROL INTERFACE
6-36
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
+5V
+3.3V
+3.3V
14
+3.3V
R816
100.0K
1%
IC807G
74ACT04D
C809
0.1µF
R817
100.0K
1%
R818
100.0K
1%
JTAG PORT
IC800
+3.3V
7
4
IC804A
PR
+
L800
D
Q
5
10
11
10µF 20V
6
7
10
11
13
6
+5V
Vdd3
14
15
3
4
74ACT04D
6
5
R807
33.8688MHZ
(SHT5)
22OHM
1%
DGND3
R811
36.864MHZB
(SHT5)
22OHM
1%
R806
1
+3.3V
IC807A
2
22OHM
1%
R809
74ACT04D
22OHM
1%
R819
L802
HZ0805G102R-10
14
24.576MHZB
(SHT8)
24.576MHZ
22OHM
1%
+5V
10
36.864MHZ
IC804B
CMX-309FBC-27.000000M
CLK
C803
0.1µF
+5V
VCC
GND
11
CLR
1
13
150OHM
??
OE
D
7
4
GND +3
OSC
2
3
12
PR
IC807D
R815
R800
4.99K
1%
Note: J801 is for diagnostic
purposes - jumpering J801 pins
and 3 together causes IC800 to
re-route AOUT_DATA,
DOUT1_DATA, and
DOUT2_DATA so as to come
directly from AIN_DATA, directly
bypassing all DSP circuitry
.
36.864MHZ
(SHT8)
(SHT8)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT2)
(SHT4)
17
16
4
AGND
DGND1
DGND2
74ACT04D
9
J801
HDR 3
IC807C
XT2
IC805
24.576MHZ
+3.3V
1
2
3
E800
E801
18
19
2
3
SCK00
SCK01
SCK02
SCK03
XT1
(SHT5)
22OHM
1%
IC807B
FS1
SR
16.9344MHZ
74HC74
IC801
PLL1707
MCK01
MCK02
FS2
74ACT04D
R808
20
Vdd2
Vdd1
Vcc
5
N/C
1
8
0.1µF
CSEL
Q
1
C805
0.1µF
12
CLK
4
15
62
73
CLR
HZ0805G102R-10
C802
+3.3V
3
3
18
34
51
66
82
IC807E
C804
2
2
4
6
8
10
HDR 5X2
UNSHRD
+5V
+3.3V
HZ0805G102R-10
39
91
J800
1
3
5
7
9
L801
+3.3V
Q
Q
9
8
9
8
74ACT04D
R810
22OHM
1%
18.432MHZ
DSPRST-N
START
SD00
SD01
SD02
SD03
SD04
SD10
SD11
SD20
SD21
SD30
SD31
SD32
SD33
SD34
AIN_DATA
DIN_DATA
87
88
89
90
16
17
19
54
56
58
61
69
80
92
98
VCCINT
VCCINT
VCCIO
VCCIO
VCCIO
VCCIO
VCCIO
VCCIO
TDI
TMS
TCK
TDO
GCLK1
OE1
GCLRN
OE2/GCLK2
6
8
9
67
35
36
37
33
32
31
30
29
12
10
99
100
25
13
14
1
2
5
7
22
24
27
28
49
50
53
55
70
72
77
78
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
GNDIO
GNDIO
GNDINT
GNDIO
GNDIO
GNDIO
GNDINT
GNDIO
60
76
79
81
93
94
96
97
DFS
AIN_MCLK
CKS01
AOUT_MCLK
DARST-N
RSTDA-N
ADRST-N
RSTAD-N
52
75
68
40
41
42
64
63
48
47
85
IRQB-N
1.536MHZ
MCLK_C
EXTALA
FSYNCA
BCLKA
OUT_BCLK
OUT_FCLK
46
65
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
23
57
71
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
21
44
83
DOUT1_DATA
DOUT1_BCLK
DOUT1_FCLK
20
45
84
DOUT2_DATA
DOUT2_BCLK
DOUT2_FCLK
(SHT2,3)
(SHT2)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT8)
(SHT3)
(SHT8)
(SHT2)
(SHT6)
(SHT10)
MCLK_A
IC807F
12
13
(SHT4)
(SHT5)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
74ACT04D
R820
R813
12.288MHZ
(SHT5,8)
22OHM
1%
MCLK_B
(SHT4)
22OHM
1%
(SHT2,4,6)
(SHT2,4,6)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
11
26
38
43
59
74
86
95
(SHT5)
EPM7064AETC100-10
74HC74
I/O+DSP BOARD: SAI AND CLOCK GENERATION
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
6-37
TECHNICAL DATA
FROM POWER SUPPLY
TP902 (NO-STUFF)
TP-DUAL
+5V
J900
TO CONTROL COMBO PCA
+5V
+5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
+5V
+ C995
10µF 20V
+ C946
10µF
20V
C996
0.1µF
J901
C947
0.1µF
C948
0.1µF
C949
0.1µF
C950
0.1µF
C951
0.1µF
C952
0.1µF
C953
0.1µF
C954
0.1µF
C955
0.1µF
C956
0.1µF
C957
0.1µF
C958
0.1µF
C1003
0.1µF
C959
0.1µF
1
2
C1004
0.1µF
HDR 2
TP903
TP-DUAL
HDR 6
M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
TESTING ACCESS
+15V
AGND
HDR 4
C932
0.1µF
+ C923
10µF
20V
AGND
C936
0.1µF
C933
0.1µF
C934
0.1µF
AGND4
C937
0.1µF
C938
0.1µF
C935
0.1µF
C939
0.1µF
C940
0.1µF
AGND3
C942
0.1µF
AGND2
C941
0.1µF
C943
0.1µF
4
+ C922
10µF
20V
C944
0.1µF
C945
0.1µF
1
AGND1
C1012
0.1µF
IN
TAB
GND
-15V +15V
1
2
3
4
+15V
OUT
IC902
78MO5CT
+1.8V
+5VA
J903
1
3
5
7
9
+15V
3
+5V
+3.3V
C1013
0.1µF
2
TP900
TP-DUAL
J902
C1014
1.0µF
2
4
6
8
10
KEY
-15V
+5VA
HDR 5X2
2
10
PIN 10 TRIMMED FOR KEY
-15V
Note: +3.3V come
from CONTROL
COMBO PCA via
J701.
AGND
1
+3.3V
9
TP901 (NO-STUFF)
TP-DUAL
+
C1010
10µF
???
+ C919
10µF
20V
C1011
1.0µF
+ C920
10µF
20V
CR902
C960
0.1µF
C961
0.1µF
C962
0.1µF
C964
0.1µF
C963
0.1µF
C965
0.1µF
C967
0.1µF
C968
0.1µF
C969
0.1µF
C970
0.1µF
C971
0.1µF
C972
0.1µF
C973
0.1µF
C974
0.1µF
C975
0.1µF
C976
0.1µF
C977
0.1µF
C978
0.1µF
C979
0.1µF
C916
0.1µF
DIODE_VOL 6.8
+5V
CR900
C988
1N4148W
CR901
0.1µF
1
1N4148W
R901
49.9K
1%
C987
1500PF
1%
(SHT9)
Vc
BODY
FB
TP904
TP-DUAL
5.22UH
FIT44-4
CR903
1N5818
6
1.536MHZ
Q900
MMBT3904
R902
2.10K
1%
+1.8V
L900
3
C991
1.0µF
16V
C992
1.0µF
16V
+ C994
470µF/16V
7
SHDN
Vsw
9
5
Vin
GND
C986
1.0µF
16V
4
C985
1.0µF
16V
8
R900
49.9K
1%
SYNC
2
CR904
1N5818
(NO-STUFF)
IC901
LT1767EMS8E-1.8
BOOST
+3.3V
+3.3V
C989
100PF
1%
C990
1500PF
1%
R903
4.99K
1%
R905
2.10K
1%
R904
49.9K
1%
C993
1500PF
1%
+1.8V
+ C917
10µF
20V
+ C918
10µF
20V
C900
0.01µF
C901
0.01µF
C902
0.01µF
C903
0.01µF
C904
0.01µF
C905
0.01µF
C906
0.01µF
C907
0.01µF
C908
0.01µF
C909
0.01µF
C910
0.01µF
C911
0.01µF
C912
0.01µF
C913
0.01µF
C914
0.01µF
I/O+DSP BOARD: POWER DISTRIBUTION
C915
0.01µF
6-38
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
FRONT PANEL PARTS LOCATOR DIAGRAM
SOF T 4 SOF T 3
12
1 R Y 14
4
13 R Y 14
15 R Y 15
2
7 R Y 15
16
14
5 R Y 14
8
19 R Y 15
6
17 R Y 14
FRONT PANEL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM -- FRONT SIDE
CR7D
GRN
18
CR8I
YEL
CR8J
RED
20
20
11 R Y 13
12
3 R Y 13
4
15 R Y 13
16
NOT E : BAR GR APHS AR E
NUMB E R E D LIK E AN IDC.
S1
RS10
RS11
RS12
RS13
ESCAP E RECAL L MODI FY SYSTEM CONTRAST
PRESET PROSETUP
CESSI NG
3 R Y 15
10
8
19 R Y 13
6
17 R Y 12
18
9 R Y 12
10
1 R Y 12
2
13 R Y 12
14
GAT E
20
CR16J
GRN
11 R Y 15
9 R Y 14
7 R Y 13
5 R Y 12
3 R Y 11
4
16
7 R Y 11
8
19 R Y 11
20
11 R Y 11
12
1 R Y 10
CR10
RED
2
20
19 R Y 9
17 R Y 8
15 R Y 11
2
13 R Y 10
14
5 R Y 10
6
17 R Y 10
18
9 R Y 10
10
8
19 R Y 9
CR9J
RED
CR16I
GRN
18
1 R Y 10
19 R Y 9
20
12
3 RY 9
4
16
7 RY 9
5 RY 8
6
17 R Y 8
18
CR9I
YEL
CR16H
GRN
16
15 R Y 9
2
13 R Y 8
14
12
3 RY 7
4
15 R Y 7
15 R Y 7
13 R Y 6
11 R Y 9
18
9 RY 8
10
1 RY 8
19 R Y 7
20
11 R Y 7
18
9 RY 6
10
1 RY 6
2
13 R Y 6
14
16
CR9H
GRN
CR16G
GRN
14
CR16F
GRN
17 R Y 8
15 R Y 7
16
8
6
17 R Y 6
4
15 R Y 5
16
7 RY 5
8
19 R Y 5
20
11 R Y 5
12
10
CR16E
GRN
7 RY 7
3 RY 5
5 RY 6
14
12
10
1 RY 4
2
13 R Y 4
14
5 RY 4
6
17 R Y 4
18
9 RY 4
16
CR16D
GRN
13 R Y 6
11 R Y 5
9 RY 4
7 RY 3
19 R Y 3
20
11 R Y 3
12
3 RY 3
4
15 R Y 3
20
11 R Y 1
2
8
6
18
10
CR16C
GRN
CR9G
GRN
CR5H
YEL
CR7C
GRN
CR8H
YEL
1
S2
1
CR16B
YEL
CR16A
RED
CR9F
GRN
11 R Y 5
RS5
RS7
RS9
RS11
RS13
CR9E
GRN
12
2
4
6
8
10
CR9D
GRN
CR8G
YEL
CR4B
YEL
CR5G
YEL
CR7B
YEL
2
2
2
S3
1
S4
1
S5
1
1
S6
SOF T 1 PREVI OUS NEXT
2
2
2
2
S7
1
S8
1
S9
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
SOF T 2
S10
.
.
.
.
.
R24
R25
R26
RS7
RS8
RS9
S11
.
.
.
.
.
5x2 SKT
RS6
RS5
J1
CR9C
GRN
CR8F
YEL
CR2F
YEL
CR4A
YEL
CR5F
YEL
CR7A
RED
6-39
CR2E
YEL
CR3J
RED
CR5E
YEL
CR6J
RED
CR8E
YEL
CR2D
YEL
CR3I
YEL
CR5D
YEL
CR6I
YEL
CR8D
YEL
CR2C
YEL
CR3H
YEL
CR5C
YEL
CR6H
GRN
CR8C
YEL
CR2B
YEL
CR3G
YEL
CR5B
YEL
CR6G
GRN
CR8B
YEL
CR2A
YEL
CR3F
YEL
CR5A
YEL
CR6F
GRN
CR8A
YEL
CR1J
RED
CR3E
YEL
CR4J
RED
CR6E
GRN
CR7J
GRN
CR1I
YEL
CR3D
YEL
CR4I
YEL
CR6D
GRN
CR7I
GRN
9 RY 4
CR15
YEL
1
3
5
7
9
3 RY 1
CR14
YEL
RS6
RS8
RS10
RS12
4
NEXT
1 RY 0
PREVI OUS
R21
R22
R23
2
+5V
CR9B
GRN
4
CR9A
GRN
CR7H
GRN
CR1H
YEL
CR3C
YEL
CR4H
YEL
CR6C
GRN
10
RS3
CR7G
GRN
7 RY 3
R17
R18
R19
R20
CR7F
GRN
CR1G
YEL
CR3B
YEL
CR4G
YEL
CR6B
GRN
8
RS4
CR7E
GRN
CR6A
GRN
CR1F
YEL
CR3A
YEL
CR4F
YEL
7 RY 3
8x2 SKT
R16
R18
R20
R22
R24
R26
RS2
RS4
12
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
9 RY 0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3 RY 1
RS2
CR13
YEL
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CR4E
YEL
CR5J
RED
CR1E
YEL
CR2J
RED
8
CR12
YEL
J3
10
SYSTEM
SETUP
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1 RY 0
CR11
YEL
2
RS1
MODI FY
PROCESSI NG
1
RECAL L
PRESET
R15
R17
R19
R21
R23
R25
RS1
RS3
18
CR5I
YEL
R13
R14
R15
R16
9 RY 2
CR4D
YEL
1 RY 2
R9
R10
R11
R12
8x2 SKT
16
CR4C
YEL
2
GNDF
R2
R4
R6
R8
R10
R12
R14
13 R Y 2
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5 RY 2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
J4
17 R Y 0
8x2 SKT
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
5 RY 2
GNDF
R1
R3
R5
R7
R9
R11
R13
CR1D
YEL
CR2I
YEL
6
GNDF
T O GND PLA NE ON LY
RY1
RY3
RY5
RY7
RY9
RY11
RY13
RY15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
7 RY 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CR2H
YEL
19 R Y 1
J2
5 RY 0
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
R5
R6
R7
R8
6
RY0
RY2
RY4
RY6
RY8
RY10
RY12
RY14
14
CR2G
YEL
CR1C
YEL
17 R Y 2
15 R Y 1
13 R Y 0
R1
R2
R3
R4
CR1B
YEL
4
2
CR1A
YEL
5 RY 2
3 RY 1
TECHNICAL DATA
1 RY 0
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
6-40
P2
74AC574
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
FY0
FY2
FY4
FY6
FY8
FY10
FY12
FY14
RP 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FY1
FY3
FY5
FY7
FY9
FY11
FY13
FY15
DI SROW B
DI SCOL B
N/C
N/C
+5V
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
FS2
+5V
74HC374
DI SROW D
IN_SENSI T
DI SROW A
FS4
R18
110.0
R19
110.0
1%
1%
1%
1
3
5
7
9
P1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
C11
47PF
L ED
R20
N/C
N/C
N/C
1
3
5
110.0 1%
R22
FS7
110.0 1%
R23
+5V
FS8
110.0 1%
R24
FS9
+5V
+5V
R27
100K
1%
+5V
+5V
R28
100K
1%
110.0 1%
+5V
+5V
R29
10.0K
R30
10.0K
1%
IC7A
1
2
IC8
+5V
FS10
FS11
FS12
FS13
4
C3
0.1UF
50V
C4
0.1UF
50V
C5
0.1UF
50V
14
7
C6
0.1UF
50V
2
4
6 (POLARIZING PIN)
R26
100K
1%
R25
100K
1%
S12
ROTARY ENCODER
C2
0.1UF
50V
VIEW FROM
CONTACT END
FS5
FS6
+ C1
6.8UF
25V
ALL VERSIONS
DI SROW C
5x2 POSTS
110.0 1%
R21
+9VB
HDR 4
FS5
FS7
FS9
FS11
FS13
2
4
6
8
10
1
2
3
4
4
IN_SENSI T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DI R
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
74HC14A
1%
IC7B
3
C14
E
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
47PF
ENCODER
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
74HC245
D[0..7]
4
74HC14A
2
3
1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
CL K
D[0..7]
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
11
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
FS3
R17
110.0
FS6
FS8
FS10
FS12
????????????
+5V
JP202
1
3
20
DI SROW D
P5
D1
D3
D5
D7
CABL E_26P
F24
F25
F26
IC3
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
2
20
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
L ED
ENCODER
DI SCOL A
F16
F18
F20
F22
F24
F26
FS2
FS4
SPARES
D[0..7]
JP203
D0
D2
D4
D6
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
1
2
????????
8x2 POSTS
CK
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
N/C
???
??
V CC
FS3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
SOEARTH
MNT HOL E
FRONT PANEL REAR SIDE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
C7
0.1UF
50V
N/C
74HC14A
N/C
74HC14A
G ND
+5V
P3
12
IC7E
10
DI SROW C
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
8
11
FY15
FY14
FY13
FY12
FY11
FY10
FY9
FY8
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
MAI N BOARD
D[0..7]
F15
F17
F19
F21
F23
F25
IC7F
74HC14A
RES_NET
100 OHM
CK
OC
V CC
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
11
10
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
N/C
N/C
13
IC7D
9
DI SCOL B
47PF
V CC
CK
V CC
OC
V CC
OC
74AC574
6
74HC14A
DI SCOL A
20
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
5
RES_NET
100 OHM
CK
OC
V CC
20
11
10
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
IC7C
FY7
FY6
FY5
FY4
FY3
FY2
FY1
FY0
C13
G ND
74FCT574
DI SROW B
47PF
11
D[0..7]
10
G ND
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
1
IC9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
G ND
CK
OC
V CC
20
+5V
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8x2 POSTS
20
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
C10
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
RP 2
47PF
+5V
IC1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
C12
8x2 POSTS
OE
74FCT574
10
D[0..7]
F2
F4
F6
F8
F10
F12
F14
+5V
47PF
11
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
G ND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D[0..7]
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
D[0..7]
C9
+5V
IC6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
74FCT574
10
D[0..7]
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
11
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
G ND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
P4
1
F1
F3
F5
F7
F9
F11
F13
+5V
IC5
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
G ND
CK
DI SROW A
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
20
V CC
OC
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
1Q
2Q
3Q
4Q
5Q
6Q
7Q
8Q
10
74FCT574
10
D[0..7]
IC2
11
1D
2D
3D
4D
5D
6D
7D
8D
G ND
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
ORBAN MODEL 9300
+5V
+5V
IC4
TECHNICAL DATA
C8
0.1UF
50V
OPTIMOD-AM DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
R INPUT
50 - 100 HZ
+
HIGH
PASS
FILTER
4.5 - 9.5 KHZ
TWO-BAND
LOWPASS
FILTER
AGC
EQUALIZER
HF ENHANCER
5-BAND
5-BAND
COMPRESSOR
LIMITER
L INPUT
(SWITCHABLE
BETWEEN
ANALOG &
DIGITAL)
COMPRESSOR/LIMITER
CONTROL COUPLING
ANALOG
OUTPUT #1
DISTORTIONCANCELLED
CLIPPER
OVERSHOOT
COMPENSATOR
LOWPASS
FILTER
TRANSMITTER
EQUALIZER
ANALOG
OUTPUT #2
4.5 - 9.5 KHZ
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
6-41
6-42
[NOTES]
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 9300